Catia Cadam Cadex - Manual 1

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide
November 2000 Edition
Copyright 2000 by DASSAULT SYSTEMES OF AMERICA CORP. Woodland Hills, California 91367 All rights reserved This document shall not be reproduced, nor shall the information contained herein be used by or disclosed to others, except as expressly authorized by DASSAULT SYSTEMES OF AMERICA CORP.
CADEX is a trademark of DASSAULT SYSTEMES OF AMERICA CORP. CADAM is a registered trademark of DASSAULT SYSTEMES OF AMERICA CORP.
About This Guide

The CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator User's Guide explains how to use the CADEX product to create a design, check that design for errors, extract information from the design, and report that information in the form of customized lists.
Intended Audience
This guide is intended for any designers involved in the design and manufacturing process. In particular, this guide is meant to be used by designers of wiring diagrams, electrical printed circuit boards, mechanical assemblies, and facility plans.
Prequisites
When using CADEX, you should have experience with the basic procedures and terminology of CATIA/CADAM Drafting. In particular, you should have a thorough understanding of the following advanced features:
Function key OVERLAY
Using multilines in function key LINE
Positioning and justifying text using function key NOTE How to Use This Guide
CADEX is a flexible process rather than a collection of distinct operations. To fully understand most CADEX tasks, you must understand the entire process. How you use this guide depends on your level of experience. New users should read Chapters 1 and 2 which introduce the CADEX product.
Conventions Used in This Guide CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator is referred to as CADEX.
A reference to a menu option, unless otherwise noted, means a menu option within function key CADEX.
A reference to a menu option under another menu option is described with the following convention: /MAIN OPTION/ /SUBOPTION/. For example, menu option /MOVE/ under menu option /COMPONENTS/ is described as /COMPONENTS/ /MOVE/.
Menus and messages that appear in procedures are denoted by icons, as in the following examples:
/ DEFINE / DRAW / MERGE // RETURN / Sel element / Sel component / Ind pt / YN rectangle
Conditional messages and menus are presented in procedures using a table format, as in the following example:
If the selected field currently has:
The message reads:
An attribute defined
Select report field / YN reset
No attribute defined
Select report field
A reference to a type of model used or generated by CADEX is described with the name of that type of model followed by its find name enclosed in parentheses. For
example, CADEX generates an error model (err) and a documentation model (doc).
Command bar options and other buttons displayed in the CADEX system are represented with icons, such as or .
A procedure or step in a procedure that applies to only one of the CADEX application modes is flagged with an icon in the left margin. The icon used for the Electrical application is shown below. Related Publications CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Customization Guide
CADAM Drafting Installation Guide
CADAM Drafting User's Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 1. Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 11 What You Should Know About CADEX................................................................................................................ 11 Before You Use CADEX....................................................................................................................................... 16 Menu Structure of CADEX ................................................................................................................................... 19 Using the Panel Buttons....................................................................................................................................... 21 Scrolling Through a Panel .................................................................................................................................... 22 Chapter 2. The CADEX Process ............................................................................................................. 23 Task 2: Creating Component Sets ....................................................................................................................... 26 Task 4: Using External Data Bases to Attribute Component Sets ....................................................................... 36 Task 5: Creating Libraries of Component Sets .................................................................................................... 39 Task 6: Creating Icon Panels ............................................................................................................................... 42 Task 7: Placing and Manipulating Components................................................................................................... 44 Task 8: Creating and Using Hierarchical Drawings.............................................................................................. 45 Task 9: Connecting Components and Drawings.................................................................................................. 46 Task 10: Using the CADEX Utilities ..................................................................................................................... 49 Task 11: Using Relays in Wiring or Ladder Diagrams ......................................................................................... 52 Task 12: Preparing and Generating Reports Interactively ................................................................................... 54 Task 13: Submitting a CADEX Extraction Background Process and Viewing Its Results ................................... 57 Creating a Mechanical Design ............................................................................................................................. 61 Chapter 3. CADEX Quick Reference Guides ......................................................................................... 63 Creating Designs That Require Connectivity ....................................................................................................... 63 Creating Designs That Do Not Require Connectivity ........................................................................................... 64 Chapter 4. Establishing a User Profile................................................................................................... 65 What You Should Know About Establishing a User Profile.................................................................................. 65 Setting the Application mode................................................................................................................................ 70 Changing the Defaults.......................................................................................................................................... 72 Chapter 5. Creating Component Sets .................................................................................................... 77 What You Should Know About Creating Component Sets .................................................................................. 77 Drawing Component Set Geometry Using CATIA/CADAM Drafting.................................................................... 87 Drawing Component Set Geometry Using CADEX.............................................................................................. 89 Defining Components Sets: /DEFINE/ ............................................................................................................... 114 Nesting Component Sets: /MODIFY/ ................................................................................................................. 127 Traversing Nested Component Sets: /TRAVERSE/........................................................................................... 129 Adding Elements to a Nested Set Whose Geometry Has Been Deleted........................................................... 132 Displaying the Structure of a Nested Component Set: /LIST/ ............................................................................ 134 Copying Components to a Detail Page: /DEFINE/ /DETAIL/........................................................................ 137 Merging Component Sets: /MERGE/ ................................................................................................................ 138 Chapter 6. Attributing Component Sets and Elements...................................................................... 141 What You Should Know About Attributing Component Sets and Elements....................................................... 141 Creating or Modifying an Attribute ...................................................................................................................... 146 Deleting an Attribute From the Attribute List Panel ............................................................................................ 154 Creating, Modifying, and Displaying a Preset List of Attributes.......................................................................... 156 Adding Attributes to Components and Elements ............................................................................................... 160 Assigning an Inheritance Attribute...................................................................................................................... 166 Deleting Attributes From a Single Component................................................................................................... 168 Deleting Specified Attributes From Multiple Components.................................................................................. 171 Querying Attributes to See Where They Are Assigned ...................................................................................... 177 Querying Components or Elements to See What Attributes Are Assigned to Them ......................................... 182 Editing Attribute Data Values Attached to a Component or Element ................................................................. 184 Converting Attribute Data Values Into Notes...................................................................................................... 185 Logging in to an external data base ................................................................................................................... 187
Defining the Names Used to Query an external data base................................................................................ 188 Querying a Component With Attributes Stored in an external data base........................................................... 192 Querying by Attributes Stored in an external data base ..................................................................................... 194 Creating, Modifying, and Submitting SQL Queries to an external data base ..................................................... 199 Chapter 7. Creating and Modifying Component Libraries................................................................. 203 What You Should Know About Creating and Modifying Component Libraries................................................... 203 Creating a User Library ...................................................................................................................................... 208 Copying an NPI Page From a Library and Placing It on a Detail Page of a Drawing ......................................... 210 Creating Components for System Libraries by Creating or Modifying New Part Information for the Component......................................................................................................................................................... 213 Deleting an NPI Page......................................................................................................................................... 222 Chapter 8. Creating Icon Panels........................................................................................................... 225 What You Should Know About Creating Icon Panels......................................................................................... 225 Creating the Master Icon Panel.......................................................................................................................... 232 Specifying the Master Icon Panel in the Profile.................................................................................................. 235 Creating Lower-Level Icon Panels and Linking Them to Icons .......................................................................... 237 Creating Icon Panels Using the Host CADEX Method ....................................................................................... 241 Chapter 9. Manipulating Components................................................................................................. 245 What You Should Know About Manipulating Components ................................................................................ 245 Retrieving a Component From a Library and Placing It On a Drawing: /LISTS/ ............................................... 254 Retrieving a Component From an Icon Panel and Placing It On a Drawing: /PANEL/ ..................................... 264 Changing the Size of Components and Elements: /SCALE/............................................................................. 268 Moving Components and Elements: /MOVE/.................................................................................................... 273 Turning Components and Elements: /TURN/ ................................................................................................... 278 Flipping Components and Elements: /FLIP/...................................................................................................... 284 Copying Components and Elements: /COPY/.................................................................................................... 289 Copying Components to a Detail Page: /COMPONENTS/ /DETAIL/ ........................................................... 290 Attaching Components and Elements to a Ditto ................................................................................................ 293 Attaching a Ditto to Any Point in a Drawing........................................................................................................ 297 Deleting Components and Elements: /DELETE/............................................................................................... 299 Chapter 10. Creating Hierarchical Designs ......................................................................................... 303 What You Should Know About Creating Hierarchical Designs .......................................................................... 303 Defining a Hierarchy Attribute: /DEFINE/ ........................................................................................................... 309 Deleting a Hierarchy Attribute: /DELETE/ .......................................................................................................... 315 Moving Through a Hierarchy: /DOWN/, /UP/, and /TOP/ ................................................................................... 316 Showing Components and Elements With Hierarchy Attributes: /SHOW/........................................................ 318 Displaying a List of Hierarchy Levels and Moving to a Level in That List: /LIST/ ............................................... 319 Specifying Hierarchy Libraries on the Profile Panel ........................................................................................... 321 Chapter 11. Connecting Components ................................................................................................. 323 What You Should Know About Connecting Components .................................................................................. 323 Creating and Naming a Line............................................................................................................................... 329 Creating a Bus.................................................................................................................................................... 330 Extending an Existing Bus.................................................................................................................................. 342 Naming a Bus or a Line...................................................................................................................................... 346 Creating a Sheet Extension Component ............................................................................................................ 349 Using a Sheet Extension Component ................................................................................................................ 351 Creating a Shield or a Coax Component............................................................................................................ 353 Using a Shield or a Coax Component ................................................................................................................ 356 Creating a Twist or a Cable Component ............................................................................................................ 358 Using a Twist or a Cable Component ................................................................................................................ 360 Placing Individual Solder Dots............................................................................................................................ 361 Chapter 12. Using Utilities .................................................................................................................... 362 What You Should Know About Using Utilities .................................................................................................... 362 Creating a Part Number Replacement Table: /PART REPL TABLE/ .............................................................. 366 Creating a Zone Matrix: /ZONE/........................................................................................................................ 370 Flipping Misaligned Text: /TEXT FLIP/.............................................................................................................. 373
Placing Branch Components and Solder Dots: /BRANCH/............................................................................... 374 Creating a Ladder: /LADDER/ ........................................................................................................................... 379 Removing a Ladder: /LADDER/ ........................................................................................................................ 383 Chapter 13. Using Relays...................................................................................................................... 386 What You Should Know About Using Relays..................................................................................................... 386 Defining a Relay ................................................................................................................................................. 395 Creating a "Dummy" Relay................................................................................................................................. 399 Placing Relays in a Design................................................................................................................................. 401 Cross-Referencing Relay Components.............................................................................................................. 403 Creating or Modifying an NPI Page for Package Data ....................................................................................... 405 Packaging a Relay and Back-Annotating the Package Data ............................................................................. 412 Chapter 14. Generating Reports........................................................................................................... 416 What You Should Know About Generating Reports .......................................................................................... 416 Creating a Format for a New Report .................................................................................................................. 421 Editing an Existing Format for a Report ............................................................................................................. 422 Running a Report ............................................................................................................................................... 442 Deleting a Format for a Report........................................................................................................................... 445 Resetting Report Formats to the Installation Defaults........................................................................................ 446 What You Should Know About Submitting and Viewing the Results of Background Processes ....................... 447 Defining and Running a CADEX Extraction Background Process ..................................................................... 460 Running a Background Process That Converts a Host CADEX Design Into a Workstation CADEX Design ................................................................................................................................................................ 487 Running a Background Process That Converts a Workstation CADEX Design Into a Host CADEX Design ................................................................................................................................................................ 489 Viewing Reports Generated by a Background Process ..................................................................................... 492 Copying a Report Generated by a Background Process to a File...................................................................... 496 Viewing and Correcting Errors and Warnings Generated by a Background Process........................................ 498 Deleting All Reports, Errors, and Warnings Generated by a Background Process ........................................... 502 Appendix A. Messages .......................................................................................................................... 503 Design Error and Warning Messages ................................................................................................................ 503 System Messages .............................................................................................................................................. 510 Appendix B. CADEX Limits ................................................................................................................... 521 CADEX Limits..................................................................................................................................................... 521 Appendix C. CADEX Attribute Numbers .............................................................................................. 523 CADEX Attribute Numbers ................................................................................................................................. 523 Appendix D. Converting Host CADEX Designs to Workstation CADEX Format .............................. 525 What You Should Know About Converting Host CADEX Designs to Workstation CADEX Format .................. 525 Using Data Transfer to Move CADEX Designs From Host to Workstation........................................................ 526 Converting Data Transfer Information Into a Workstation CADEX Design........................................................ 527 How Workstation CADEX Matches Host CADEX .............................................................................................. 529 Appendix E. Intermediate Files............................................................................................................. 531 What You Should Know About Intermediate Files ............................................................................................. 531 Intermediate File 1.............................................................................................................................................. 535 Intermediate File 2.............................................................................................................................................. 537 Intermediate File 3.............................................................................................................................................. 539 Intermediate File 4.............................................................................................................................................. 541 Intermediate File 5.............................................................................................................................................. 543 Appendix F. Customizable Tables ....................................................................................................... 545 Customizable Tables.......................................................................................................................................... 545 Glossary................................................................................................................................................... 549
10
Chapter 1. Introduction
What You Should Know About CADEX
CATIA/CADAM Drafting: CADEX has two primary functions. It helps you create CADAM geometry for manufacturing and industrial design applications, and it allows you to extract information from your designs and compile it into reports. The CADEX interactive design functions help you quickly develop complex designs by creating parts and placing them in libraries, where they can be easily accessed and copied into CADAM drawings. Once parts are placed on a drawing, you can manipulate them and, if necessary, connect them (as in wiring diagrams). The CADEX reporting functions allow you to detect errors in a design, extract information from the design, and compile that information into lists. You can use some CADEX reporting functions interactively, while some operate as background processes. CADEX allows you to work in two application modes: Electrical and General. The Electrical mode allows you to rapidly create wiring diagrams and other electrical designs that use connectivity (in other words, that require parts to be connected together). The General mode allows you to create mechanical assemblies, facility layouts, architectural plans, and other designs not requiring connectivity. While CADEX is used mainly to create diagrams and schematic designs, many of its individual functions can increase your productivity with CATIA/CADAM Drafting . These include:
Defining groups of geometry as one entity (that is, as a part).
Adding non-graphical information to parts.
Establishing hierarchical relationships between parts or drawings or both.
Creating libraries for storing and retrieving parts.
11
Extracting part information (and connection information) from drawings and compiling it into user-definable reports.
Design Functions
The design functions of CADEX can be broadly classified into the following procedures:
Creating component sets

You can create component sets that represent parts in a design. A component set is a combination of elements organized into a group. These elements consist of CADAM geometry, system attributes, and user attributes. System attributes define how a component functions in CADEX. User attributes provide textual information describing a component. Any manipulations you perform on a component set affect all the elements in the set; CADEX treats all the elements as one entity. A component set can contain other component sets. You can store a component's attribute information in a separate data base, where it can be easily maintained and updated.
Creating libraries
You can store component sets in user or system libraries. Typically, you create and maintain your own user library, while a system administrator maintains the system library, which contains component sets used by many designers.
Copying components from libraries

Without exiting the current model, you can quickly retrieve copies of components from other models that serve as libraries and place the components on the current drawing. CADEX allows you to identify the desired component, review information about it, and place the component on a drawing.
Manipulating components to create a design

After retrieving components from libraries and placing them on a drawing, you can move, turn, flip, scale, copy, and delete them until they are positioned correctly. You can draw multilines to represent wires or pipelines that connect components. You can attach information to those lines
12
by placing notes on them and attributing those notes. You can connect multilines on one sheet to multilines on other sheets. You can also create hierarchical assemblies, which allow you to display another drawing by selecting a component.
13
Reporting Functions
The reporting functions of CADEX allow you to do the following:
Customize report formats

You can create report formats that are templates for listing the user and system attribute information assigned to components and connections in a design. You can have CADEX perform additional functions, such as mathematical operations that add or average attribute information. It can also use criteria that you define to determine what information is reported and how it is listed.
Generate reports
You can generate a report interactively or in a background process. When you generate a report interactively, you can use data from either the active model only or multiple models. To interactively generate a report on multiple models, you must first run a background process on those models. The background process extracts information from the models to create intermediate files that you can access when you generate a report interactively. You can also generate a report from the intermediate files as part of the background process. For both types of reports, CADEX extracts attribute information from all components and connections and compiles it according to a report format that you define. You can also instruct CADEX to extract and include in your report attribute information that is stored in a relational data base.
Examine and correct error and warning conditions

When you run a background process on a design, CADEX traces the design, examining and compiling information about each valid component and connection. A component is valid when it is defined using CADEX and is consistent with a set of diagnostic options you define when you submit the background process. A connection is valid when its connecting points are part of a component set, and the structure of the overall design is consistent with the diagnostics. If the background process detects invalid components and connections, CADEX creates models that flag all error and warning conditions in a design. The diagnostics you define
14
determine the error and warning conditions. You can interactively examine and correct any violations and then resubmit the background process until the design is entirely accurate. Examine reports and other documentation You can immediately view an interactively-generated report and copy it to a detail page or a file, if desired. If you generate a report in a background process, you can view the detail page that contains the report or copy it to a file. You can also view the documentation that describes the progress of the background process.
15
Before You Use CADEX

New CADEX users should be aware of the CADEX requirements described in the following sections.
CADEX Color Table

When CADEX is installed, the colors used in the panels can be customized (see "Appendix F"). When you press function key CADEX, the CADEX color table definitions override those set in the current CADAM color table. For example, if you have a color type (i.e., element, class, view, or model) active in a model, and its color number has a different definition in the CADEX color table, all of the elements of that type will change to the CADEX color when you press function key CADEX. When you leave function key CADEX, the current CADAM color table definitions are restored.
Grids
Before you create any CADEX geometry in a model, use function POINT to establish a grid for your drawing and lock it on.
Units of Measure
CADEX allows you to use either metric or U.S. measurement.
Methods for Naming the Sheets of a CADEX Design

You can use two methods to associate the many models that CADEX accesses during a session: overlay families and sequential numbering. In the overlay family method, the models you create containing geometry for your CADEX design are associated with an overlay parent model. In the sequential numbering method, the drawing IDs of the geometry models must have the same first 16 characters (known as the base name), and the last four characters (known as the find name) must follow the same numbering conventions. CADEX allows you to use either sXXa or XXXX as numbering conventions for the find name.
16
For example, if you choose the base name assembly, you can name sequential sheets in your design either assembly,s01a, assembly,s02a, assembly,s03a, etc., or assembly,0001, assembly,0002, assembly,0003, etc. When you run a CADEX background process, you can then process those models sequentially or non-sequentially. Processing Models Sequentially If you process the models in your design sequentially, CADEX attempts to trace the entire design, starting with the first model. All of the models in the design must have consecutively numbered find names, with no gaps in between. For example, a sequence like s01a, s02a, s04a is only partially traceable. The first two sheets, s01a and s02a, are traced, but s04a is out of sequence and is not traced. If CADEX encounters a correctly numbered sheet that is blank, it continues to trace the sheets. Processing Models Non-Sequentially To process models non-sequentially, you define the find names of the first and last sheets, and CADEX processes all of the sheets in that range, regardless of gaps between consecutive sheets.
Naming Conventions for CADEX Models

During a normal session, CADEX automatically creates several types of models which are identified by their find name. If you are using the overlay family naming method, CADEX creates a model, gives it the same base name as your overlay parent, and assigns it a find name according to what type of model it is. If you are using the sequential numbering method, CADEX creates a model, gives it the same base name as the rest of your design, and assigns it a find name according to what type of model it is. CADEX uses the following naming conventions for the models it creates:
Cadx model (cadx)

The cadx model (cadx) contains all the profile, attribute, and background process settings you define as you create a design. If a cadx model does not exist for your design, CADEX automatically creates one when you define attributes, a background process, or the profile.
Report model (rpt)
17
CADEX background processes generate a report model (rpt), which contains the reports generated by the most recent background process you have run for the design.
Documentation model (doc)

CADEX background processes generate a documentation model (doc). This model contains two reports: one is a statistical summary of each model analyzed by the background process; the other is a list of all the system messages generated by the background process.
Error and warning models (err and wrn)

CADEX background processes generate an error model (err) and a warning model (wrn) if CADEX detects any error or warning situations in your design. These models graphically flag each error and warning condition detected in the design.
Releasing the Network License

When you press function key CADEX, you activate the license for the CADEX product, and it remains active until you release it. This allows you to "reserve" the license as you use other function keys to create geometry for your design. If all CADEX licenses are in use when you attempt to return to the CADEX function key, an error message is displayed. For more information about network licenses, see your system administrator or the CATIA/CADAM Drafting User's Guide.
18
Menu Structure of CADEX

Menu Structure of CADEX
All of the capabilities of CADEX are available from the CADEX main menu line and the command bar. You access both by pressing function key CADEX. The CADEX main menu line appears as follows:
CADEX Main Menu Line

/ COMPONENTS / BUILD / ATTRIBUTE / HIERARCHY / UTILS / REPORTS /
The options in the main menu line do the following: Option /COMPONENTS/ Function Copies components from libraries and places them on drawings. Also positions, scales, copies, and deletes existing components. When you select /COMPONENTS/, the following menu is displayed:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE / / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW // ATTACH / MODIFY // RET /
/BUILD/
Provides tools for building and defining components. When you select /BUILD/, the following menu is displayed:
/ DEFINE / DRAW / MERGE // RETURN /
/ATTRIBUTE/
Creates attributes and allows you to add them to and delete them from components and connections. Allows you to perform queries to see where attributes are assigned. Also allows you to use a relational data base to perform queries on your design. When you select /ATTRIBUTE/, the following menu is displayed:
/ ADD / DELETE / QUERY / RDB LOGIN // RETURN /
19
/HIERARCHY/
Defines hierarchical structures and allows you to navigate through them. When you select /HIERARCHY/, the following menu is displayed:
/ DOWN / UP / TOP / LIST / DEFINE / DELETE / / SHOW // FILE / PARENT // RETURN /
Option /UTILS/
Function Provides assorted tools for creating CADEX designs. When you select /UTILS/, the following menu is displayed:
/ NEW PART / TEXT FLIP / PART REPL TABLE / ZONE / LADDER / BRANCH / BUS / / RETURN /
/REPORTS/
Defines the format in which attribute information is reported. Also allows you to generate reports interactively using either the active model or the intermediate files created in a background process. When you select /REPORTS/, the following menu is displayed:
/ RUN / ADD / EDIT / DELETE // ACTIVE MODEL / IFX FILES / RETURN /
CADEX Command Bar

The options in the command bar do the following: Option PROFILE Function Allows you to create a user profile.
BACKGROUND Allows you to submit a CADEX Extraction background process, which can analyze a design, extract information from it, and compile that information into reports. Also allows you to submit background processes used for making workstation CADEX designs compatible with host CADEX.
20
Using the Panel Buttons
Most CADEX panels have four standard buttons. The following three buttons are located at the bottom left of each panel.
Select this icon to move the panel.
Select this icon to change the size of the panel.
Use this icon to reorder the display priority of the displayed panels. If you select this icon on a panel that is above all other panels, it will be displayed at the bottom of the stack of panels. If you select this icon on a panel that is overlapped by other panels, it will be displayed on top of all the panels.
The following button is located at the top left of each panel.
Select this icon to remove from the display the body of the panel and expose the drawing or other panel that it overlapped. This icon and the panel name will remain displayed so that you can select the icon and redisplay the panel.
21
Scrolling Through a Panel

Scrolling Through a Panel
CADEX uses many panels, many of which display information stored in text files. You can scroll up and down through these files using scroll bars if the text extends beyond a single screen. If the text does not exceed one screen, the scroll bar elevator fills the entire scroll bar. The figure below shows a scroll panel.
Up arrow Scroll bar
Scroll bar elevator
Down arrow
Scroll Bar in a Panel To move through a panel, you can select or indicate within the scroll bar. In the panel, CADEX displays the text at the point in a file that you specify. The following table shows the effect of selecting or indicating within a scroll bar.
If you: Indicate at the up or down arrow Indicate in the slide bar Select the up or down arrow Select in the slide bar
The panel: Scrolls to the top or bottom of the text file Scrolls to the point in the text file where you have indicated. Scrolls up or down one line Scrolls up or down one screen
22
Chapter 2. The CADEX Process

Using CADEX is a process rather than a series of discrete actions. The process consists of many interrelated procedures which can be broadly grouped into tasks. This chapter describes each task by providing the following:
Basic concepts.
Illustrations showing a sample design being created according to the described task.
A sample design is provided with your CADEX installation. To view it on-line, call up the drawing named section_#3,all, which resides in the group called cadx and the user called sample. If you cannot call this drawing, see your system administrator. You can perform most procedures in any order. This chapter describes one possible order for using the procedures available in CADEX. It provides a general explanation of CADEX, not a step-by-step tutorial.
Creating Mechanical Applications

The last section of this chapter describes how to create a mechanical design. Although the process of creating a mechanical design requires many of the same tasks described on the following pages, it can also employ several tasks unique to mechanical applications. These are the tasks described in the last section. The sample mechanical design is provided with your CADEX installation. To view it on-line, call up the drawing named cursor, which resides in the group called cadx and the user called sample.
23
Task 1: Defining a Profile

Related Material in This Guide:
Defining a Profile
To define a profile, see Chapter 4. To create libraries, see Chapter 7. To create icon panels, see Chapter 8.
To create hierarchical designs, see Chapter 10.
Creating Components
CADEX simultaneously accesses many files during a typical session. By entering the names of all these related files into a user profile, you point to these files so that CADEX can access them. To create a user profile, select PROFILE, which displays the Profile panel. The settings you define there are stored in a separate model associated with the base name of your design. This separate model is called the cadx model (cadx). If one does not already exist, the system automatically creates a cadx model and associates it with the active model. If the active model is a member of an overlay family, the system associates the cadx model with the overlay parent. You can enter information into the following sections of the Profile panel: Panel Section Application Mode Purpose Sets the application mode to access different sets of interactive and processing features. General and Electrical modes are available in CADEX. The appearance of the Profile panel varies, depending on the application you select. The Figure on the following page shows the Profile panel for the General application. Panel Drawing Identifies the model that contains the master icon panel, which is the top level panel in an icon panel system. Identifies the models that comprise your user library. CADEX can access up to five separate models if you enter their drawing IDs here Identifies up to five groups and users in which CADEX can search for drawings called by hierarchy attributes.
Attributing Components
Using External Data Bases
Creating Libraries
Creating Icon Panels
Manipulating Components
Creating Hierarchies
Connecting Components
Using the CADEX Utilities
User Libraries
Using Relays
Generating Reports
Hierarchy Libraries
Submitting Background Processes
24
Panel Section Packaging Libraries
Purpose Identifies the models that contain packaging tables used to assign data to components such as relays that consist of various subcomponents. Sets the following default values: The type of wild card character used when displaying library parts lists or querying user attributes. The size of the icon panel. The character that replaces the line feed ($) when data from notes are displayed in CADEX reports and query panels. The size and type of graphic elements used for creating electrical designs (Electrical application only).
Defaults
25
Task 2: Creating Component Sets

Defining a Profile
Related Material in This Guide: To create geometry for a component set, see Chapter 5. To define system attributes for a component set, see Chapter 5. To create nested components sets, see Chapter 5.
Creating Components
Creating Libraries
The basic building block of CADEX is the component set. A component set is a group of CADAM geometric elements, system attributes, and user-defined textual attributes that CADEX treats as one unit. Component sets (frequently called components) usually represent real physical entities, such as chips in electrical schematics, valves in piping and instrumentation diagrams, or furniture in a facility diagram. You can create nested component sets by creating component sets that contain other component sets. You can also create specialpurpose components that do not represent physical entities; instead, they provide information about connections between components. Typically, when you create a component set, you do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Create the geometry necessary to depict it, including any text in the form of CADAM notes. Define the geometry as a component set (in other words, as a group). Assign system attributes to the component set. Assign user attributes (textual information such as size, color, or manufacturer) to the component set.
Using Relays
Generating Reports
26
You can use any CATIA/CADAM Drafting elements, such as points, lines, circles, splines, symbols, and text, to create component set geometry. Generally, the geometry of a component set consists of the following:
Geometry depicting the component.
Geometry for a typical component set
A CADAM note or two separate CADAM notes that will later be used as a reference designator and a part number for the component. Creating a note to depict a reference designator and a part number is optional, since you can also create a "hidden" part number and reference designator later when you define system attributes for the component set.
3A4 ABCDEFG
Reference designator Part number
Pivot
A point or a note that can function as a pivot.
27
Notes or points later defined as connection points. Connection points are called pins in the Electrical application. The pivot point of a note serves as the actual point of connection.
28
Defining Component Sets

After you have created geometry, you must specify to the CADEX system the geometry that is to be included in the component set. To do this, you can select geometry or use a trap polygon or rectangle. After you have specified the geometry, you must define the following system attributes: System Attribute Type Function Identifies a component as being either a schematic part, which represents a real object, or a special-purpose component, such as a sheet extension or a cable. A unique name given to each instance of a component used in a design. Usually, a generic reference designator is assigned to components stored in libraries. When the component is placed in a drawing, the reference designator is edited to make it unique. This distinguishes different parts with the same part number. A text string identifying a component stored in a library. Part numbers identify components with a Type set to Schematic Part. (All other types of components are identified by names instead of part numbers.) A text string that identifies all types of component sets except schematic parts. (Schematic parts are identified by a part number and reference designator). A reference point for moving a component. When you move a component to a new position, you are actually placing the component set's pivot in that position. The rest of the component set moves relative to the pivot. Each component set can have only one pivot. A connection point between a component and the line that links it to another component. In the Electrical application,
Reference Designator
Part Number
Name
Pivot
Pins
29
connection points are called pins. You can define both text strings and points as pins.
30
Creating Nested Component Sets

CADEX allows you to create nested sets - component sets that contain other component sets, with each component set retaining its individual attributes. Nesting allows you to design component sets that simulate the construction of a part; the nesting can reflect how parts can consist of other parts. Once you create a nested set, CADEX allows you to move up, down, and sideways through the hierarchy of the nested set, so that you can redefine or manipulate each component within the nested set. In a nested component set, the superior set is called the parent component set, and the subordinate sets are called children. Component sets that are all children of the same parent are called siblings. One parent component set can contain many children, which, in turn, can be parents of more component sets.
31
Task 3: Attributing Component Sets

Defining a Profile
Related Material in This Guide: To assign user attributes to component sets, see Chapter 6.
Creating Components
After you define a component, you can assign user attributes to it. User attributes are the information you ultimately want to extract from a design. For example, if you want to generate a report for a design that describes the color, size, and manufacturer's name of every part used, you must assign those user attributes to every component. To create the user attributes you want to assign and then to assign them to components and connections, use menu option /ATTRIBUTE/. A user attribute is actually a category of information, such as the color or cost of an object. For each attribute you assign to a component or element, you can also define a data value. When you assign a color attribute, for example, you can assign a data value of blue; for a cost you can assign a data value of $1.75. Generally, you assign data for every attribute you attach to an object. You can, however, assign attributes with no data values to notes. When you run a report, the note functions as the data value for that attribute.
Creating Libraries
Using Relays
Generating Reports
32
To create an attribute, you use the Attribute List panel, displayed when you select menu option /ATTRIBUTE/. This panel displays all the attributes associated with this design. The figure below shows the Attribute List panel for the sample design.
Attribute List Name

Building No. Color Cubicle ID Description Extension Manufacturer Material Model Monitor Type S/N Section ID Style Type
PRESET EDIT
33
On the Attribute List panel, you select EDIT to define a new attribute. This displays the Edit panel, which allows you to define the properties of the attribute. The figure below shows the Edit panel for the attribute named Building No.
Edit Name: Number: Category: Data Type: Data Length: Justification: Default Data: 170 Help Message: Number to identify this building uniquely within the site ACCEPT CANCEL DELETE Component ALPHA 16 Left Building No. 30000 Required: Protected: No No
You can define attributes as being applicable to only components or connections between components or to both. You can also define an attribute so that you can only assign numeric data values to it. You can use the PRESET option on the Attribute List panel to create pre-defined combinations of attributes. This allows you to easily display only the attributes pertinent to a certain type of component or connection.
Assigning an Attribute to a Component or Connection

To assign attributes, use menu options /ATTRIBUTE/ /ADD/, which allow you to select attributes from the Attribute List panel and assign them to selected components and elements. The attributes you select are displayed on the Add panel. For each attribute you select, you can also define a data value or use the default value, which is defined when you create the attribute. The figure below shows an Add panel used to assign attributes to a component in the sample design.
34
Add Name
Description Manufacturer Model Monitor Type
Data
EDIT DELETE
Sample Add Panel To attribute a connection, you assign attributes to multilines connecting components or to notes that provide information about the connection.
Deleting Attributes
Using menu options /ATTRIBUTE/ /DELETE/, you can delete attributes that have been assigned to components. You can select a component and then specify which of its attributes to delete, or you can select an attribute and then specify whether to delete it from all or selected components.
Querying Attributes
Using menu options /ATTRIBUTE/ /QUERY/, you can perform inquiries to determine how attributes have been assigned. You can query by attribute or by component. Querying by attribute shows all the components or connections that contain a specified combination of attributes and data values. Querying by component displays all the attributes assigned to a single component, note, or line.
35
Task 4: Using External Data Bases to Attribute Component Sets

Defining a Profile
Related Material in This Guide: To use an external data base in your design, see Chapter 6. To include attribute information from an external data base in a report generated using menu option /REPORTS/, see Chapter 14. When you attach attributes to components or other elements in a drawing, the attribute information is stored in the CADAM model that contains the component's geometry. In CADEX you can also use an external data base to associate textual information with elements in a design. Generally, you should consider what information is better stored in a data base instead of a CADAM model. Information that changes frequently, such as cost, should probably be stored in a data base. Otherwise, every time the cost of an item changes, you must change every instance of the cost attribute stored in a drawing. To associate attribute information with elements using an external data base, you set up tables within the data base. A table consists of rows and columns. Each column corresponds to an attribute. The entries in each column are the attribute data values that are assigned to elements in the design. Each row in the data base is a collection of attribute data values for a unique entity, such as a component.
Creating Components
Creating Libraries
Using Relays
Generating Reports
36
Querying Attributes Stored In a Data Base

Querying attribute information stored in a data base is much like a query you perform on any CADEX component set. You can use the same two approaches: querying by attribute or component. Querying by attribute searches for all the components or connections that contain a specified combination of attributes and data values. Querying by component shows all the attributes assigned to a single component. The figure below shows the results of a query by component that involves a data base. The top panel is a Query panel that shows attributes stored in the CADAM model. The bottom panel is a Query panel showing attribute information stored in a data base.
Query Name Cubicle ID Description Manufacturer Model Monitor Type S/N Storage Devices Type
ABCDEFG Data *A3 Workstation ACME; NY, NY T 19 Color RS6-XXX-0103 One 330 MB hard Equipment
EDIT Query RDB Columns Part_No Cost Availability Distributor Data
VISIBLE
ABCDEFG 9999.99 Variable Computer Weasels, Inc
Query Panels Displayed When Querying a Design That Uses a Data Base
37
Reporting Attributes Stored In a Data Base

You can access attribute information stored in a data base when you generate a report interactively using menu option /REPORTS/. You can specify whether or not a report includes attribute information from a data base when you define the report format.
Creating Command Statements That Operate on a Data Base

You can perform queries of an external data base using commands you write. If the external database is a relational database, these commands can be standard SQL queries. You can save these commands and submit them when necessary. CADEX passes these commands directly to the data base. The results of a query are displayed by highlighting matching components.
38
Task 5: Creating Libraries of Component Sets

Defining a Profile
Related Material in This Guide: To create a user library, see Chapter 7. To create components for system libraries, see Chapter 7. A CADEX library is a collection of models containing component information and geometry that you can access and copy at any time. CADEX allows you to review the components contained in a library and to place copies of these components into other drawings without actually calling the library models. When you copy a component from a library, CADEX automatically retrieves all component geometry and attribute information contained in the component set and places it in the active model, on either the current view or a detail page. Two types of libraries are available:
Creating Components
Creating Libraries
Type User Library
Description A collection of components common to all the designers in an organization. Typically, a system administrator maintains a system library. The contents of system libraries are defined in terms of their detail pages. For every component in a system library, a New Part Information (NPI) page must exist that defines that component. The NPI page associates a component's part number, specified on the NPI page, with a detail page of a model. That detail page can include any number of component sets. A collection of components in CADAM models that you maintain using the interactive tools of CADEX. A user library model may be a drawing you use specifically to store component sets you have created; or, it may simply be an old drawing that contains some components you need for your current design.
System Library
Using Relays
Generating Reports
The figure on the following page shows a typical NPI page and illustrates its relationship to the model that contains the component set information.
39
NEW PART INFORMATION

PART NUMBER = 5446A DESCRIPTION = BCD-TO-7 SEGMENT DECOD/DRIV APPLICATION NUMBER = 1
Typical NPI page USER
GROUP = ELEC DRAWING ID MENU NAME SCHEMATIC PART STORAGE
USER = DESIGN DET GRP 0000 3
PV
1 2 3
Detail pages
Component resides on detail page 3.
Model with a drawing ID of PART STORAGE, 0000
Relationship Between an NPI Page and the Model Containing the Component
Creating a User Library

To create a user library, you create the components you want to include and then specify to CADEX the names of the models containing these components. The contents of these models become the contents of a user library. To place models into your user library, use PROFILE to enter their drawing IDs on the User Libraries section of the Profile panel.
40
Creating a Component for a System Library

Creating a component for a system library consists of three procedures: 1. 2. 3. Defining a component. Assigning user attributes to the component. Creating a New Part Information (NPI) page for the component.
To create a component in a system library, you can either copy a component from the system library onto a detail page of the active model and modify it, or you can create a new component, just as you would when creating a component in a design or a user library. To create an NPI page for the component, you can copy another component's NPI page or a template NPI page onto a detail page of the active model and edit it to reflect the characteristics of the component you are creating. After you have created a component and its NPI page, your system administrator can add the new component to a system library by running an installation process.
41
Task 6: Creating Icon Panels

Defining a Profile
To create icon panels, see Chapter 8. To define hierarchy attributes, see Chapter 10. Icon panels are easily-accessed collections of components that you use frequently as you design. This collection is displayed in the form of a panel along the right side of the display or as a full-screen panel. The following figure shows an icon panel for the sample design. The panel contains icons representing components. When you select one of these icons, CADEX copies the component it represents from a system or user library. You can then place the copy in your design. On the icon panel you can also select icons that display other icon panels.
Creating Components
Creating Libraries
Using Relays
Generating Reports
42
In the Profile you must identify the location of the first icon panel displayed - called the master icon panel. All the panels below the master panel are linked by hierarchy attributes that you assign to icons. When you select an icon with one of these attributes, it displays another icon panel. This method of linking panels gives you complete flexibility in how you organize component information. You can create an unlimited number of icon panels, and you can organize them hierarchically, serially, or using a combination of both techniques. You can create icon panels that display as side panels, which do not obscure the active display. You can also create full-screen icon panels, which can display more icons, minimizing the need for navigating through an icon panel system.
43
Task 7: Placing and Manipulating Components

Defining a Profile
Related Material in This Guide: To copy components from libraries into drawings and then manipulate those components, see Chapter 9. To create a design, you place components in a model. Usually, you copy components contained in system libraries or a user library and place them into the active model. If your design requires unique components, you can create them in the active model. To copy a component from a library and place it into the active model, you use menu options /COMPONENTS/ /MOVE/. These options provide the following methods for retrieving components:
Creating Components
Creating Libraries
Keying in or selecting a part number from a list of the components available in each library.
Selecting an entry displayed in an icon panel.

When you select a component from the icon panel or a library list, that component becomes active. Before you place the active component in a design, you can optionally use a preview panel, which displays the component and information about the component. After you confirm that the active component is the part you want, you can copy it into the design, and all of the information associated with the component is copied with it. This procedure allows you to rapidly copy as many components as you need into a design. After placing a component in a design, you can use menu option /COMPONENTS/ to move, turn, and flip it to refine its position, and, if necessary, change its size, copy it on the drawing or onto a detail page, or delete it. You can also traverse the levels of any nested set to manipulate the active level of that component. The following figure shows some components after they have been copied from a library and correctly positioned on the sample design.
Using Relays
Generating Reports
44
Task 8: Creating and Using Hierarchical Drawings

Defining a Profile
Related Material in This Guide: To create and use hierarchical drawings, see Chapter 10. CADEX allows you to create a hierarchy of drawings and to move quickly between the levels of the hierarchy. You accomplish this by attaching hierarchy attributes to components and geometric elements. Each hierarchy attribute defines a drawing and a position on that drawing. When using the hierarchy function, you can select an object with a hierarchy attribute attached to it, and CADEX automatically files your current drawing and calls the drawing specified by the hierarchy attribute. Hierarchy attributes allow you to define several characteristics that identify the drawing to be called. You must identify the group, user, and drawing ID of a drawing, and you can optionally specify a particular view, detail page, screen layout configuration, and window setting of a drawing. You can also call drawings that are members of an overlay family.
Creating Components
Creating Libraries
Using Relays
Generating Reports
45
Task 9: Connecting Components and Drawings

Defining a Profile
To connect components on a design, see Chapter 11. After you have positioned components in a design, you can create connections between these components that a CADEX background process can trace. (If your design does not require connectivity, you can skip this task.) The following methods are available for connecting components:
Creating Components
Creating Libraries
To link a pin or a connection point on a component to a pin or connection point on another component, you can draw a multiline that represents a wire, a pipeline, or any other type of connecting media. After drawing lines, you can attach names to the lines. The names can be reported as wiredata in lists generated by a background process.
To connect a series of pins on one component to a series of pins on another component, you can create a bus using menu options /UTILS/ /BUS/. CADEX can trace and report all of the connections included in the bus. To link a pin on one component to a pin on another component on a different sheet, you can use components called sheet extensions. By placing a sheet extension at the end of each line that extends to another sheet and assigning matching names to the sheet extensions, you can trace those lines as though they were continuous.
CADEX can also cross-reference sheet extensions by generating a note that shows the sheet number and zone location of the corresponding sheet extension(s).
Using Relays
Generating Reports
To identify connections that perform special functions, you can create special-purpose components and place them on the affected connections. These special-purpose components can identify a cable, coax, shield, or twist.
The figure on the next page shows a sheet with components in the electrical portion of the sample design connected by busses. The figure on the following page shows another sheet of the design with components connected by multilines and special-purpose
46
components. The lines on both sheets are connected by matching sheet extension components.
Bus
AA 2-3F
Sheet extension with cross-reference note
Components Connected by a Bus and a Sheet Extension
47
Components Connected by a Line, a Sheet Extension, and a Special-purpose Component
48
Task 10: Using the CADEX Utilities

Defining a Profile
To create a new part for a system library, see Chapter 7. To define a zone matrix, see page Chapter 12. To create a ladder diagram, see page Chapter 12. To edit text in a design, see Chapter 12. To place solder dots and branch components, see Chapter 12. The tools available in menu option /UTILS/ allow you to perform assorted procedures that may be necessary to complete a design. These procedures are described below:
Creating Components
Creating new parts to add to a system library

Creating Libraries
Menu options /UTILS/ /NEW PART/ allow you to define a new part by editing part information on an existing NPI page or creating an entirely new NPI page. After you create the geometry for a component and fill out an NPI page for it, your system administrator can add the new component information to a system library by running an installation process.
Creating a part number replacement table

Menu options /UTILS/ /PART REPL TABLE/ allow you to create a table that associates reference designators assigned to components with their part numbers. Part number replacement tables are especially useful if your design calls for many of the same components and you want to uniquely identify each one on a design without displaying its part number. When you submit a CADEX Extraction background process and turn on part number replacement, the resulting report can display the correct part number for every reference designator entered in a part number replacement table.
Using Relays
Generating Reports
Defining a zone matrix

Menu options /UTILS/ /ZONE/ allow you to create a zone matrix that is displayed on your drawing and can be used for reporting the location of a part. To create a zone matrix, you specify its starting point and boundary and the range of characters you want to use for the vertical and horizontal axis. To report the zone location of a part when you generate a report, you
49
must define a zone field in the report format. Defining report format fields is described in Task 12.
Creating ladders
Menu options /UTILS/ /LADDER/ allow you to automatically create a vertical or horizontal ladder for wiring designs. After you place relays on a ladder diagram, a component cross-referencing background process can cross-reference the location of parts by rung number. Using relays is described in Chapter 13.
Flipping text so that it is oriented correctly

Menu options /UTILS/ /TEXT FLIP/ allow you to flip any text strings oriented within 91 and 270 degrees so that they read left to right. The figure below shows some text on the sample design before and after it is flipped.
BEFORE
AFTER
Text Before and After It Is Flipped
50
Finding and changing text strings and finding attribute information

After you place components in a drawing, you may want to edit the text used in the design. Menu options /TEXT FIND/ in FK NOTE provides a number of text editing tools that allow you to rapidly find and replace text strings. See FK NOTE for more details. The following figure shows some text on the sample design before and after it is edited.
BEFORE
AFTER
Text Before and After It Is Edited
Placing a branch component, solder dot, or one-pin component at every three-way intersection of connecting lines (only for designs that require connectivity)
In order for CADEX to correctly trace lines that intersect, you must place a branch component or solder dot at the intersection. Solder dots are placed at intersections in printed circuit board schematics. Branch components are used in wiring diagrams. Menu options /UTILS/ /BRANCH/ allow you to automatically place branch components, solder dots, or one-pin components at every intersection in a drawing where three lines form a T.
51
Task 11: Using Relays in Wiring or Ladder Diagrams

Defining a Profile
To create and use relays in a design, see Chapter 13. To create a ladder, see Chapter 12. CADEX allows you to use relays in wiring or ladder diagrams. The procedure for creating and using relays varies, depending on the type of diagram you are creating. (If your design does not require relays, you can skip this task.) The geometry you create to represent a relay can depict the complete relay or just a coil and a contact. You can later copy the coil and contact geometry into the drawing as many times as necessary to create a complete relay.
Creating Components
Creating Libraries
Using Relays
Generating Reports
52
Component CrossReferencing
In ladder diagrams, because the coil and contacts of a relay are usually drawn at different locations or on different sheets, CADEX allows you to cross-reference the relay components. To cross-reference relay components in a ladder diagram, you first create the relays, building separate component sets for each coil and contact. Each of these component sets must have a special crossreferencing attribute, which you can attach to a generic note. Using the cross-referencing option on the CADEX Extraction Options panel, you can then use a background process to place the location of each contact (i.e., its "address" on the diagram) next to the appropriate coil and the address of each corresponding coil location next to the contacts. You can also cross-reference the location of relay parts to a drawing of a relay by using a specially attributed "dummy" relay component in your design. Relay components can be stored in either a user or a system library. When you want to use these components in a drawing, you can retrieve them from a library and place them in a ladder diagram. You can automatically create a ladder using menu options /UTILS/ /LADDER/.
Component Packaging
When you run a background process to cross-reference components, you can also use CADEX to package relays or other components in your design that are made up of associated subcomponents. To package components, you must enter the necessary subcomponent definitions on a Packaging Data NPI page. The location of the Packaging Data NPI page must be listed in the Packaging Library section of the CADEX Profile for the model that you submit. When you run a background process with the crossreferencing option, CADEX also packages the components in your design. Each time you run the background process, package data is backannotated into the model. You can define an alternate output model ID, however, which you can use to detect discrepancies between the components in the model and the package data. After you correct any errors, you can back-annotate your original drawing with the accurate package data. The back-annotation process replaces each pin's logical name with a physical pin number.
53
Task 12: Preparing and Generating Reports Interactively

Defining a Profile
To prepare and submit a report, see Chapter 14. You can create reports that extract attribute information from a design and compile the information into your own customized format. In addition, you can query a relational data base for attribute information to include in your report. Menu option /REPORTS/ gives you complete flexibility in defining a report. You can generate any kind of list you want, including a parts list, bill of materials, and from-to list. The CADEX installation also provides you with several pre-defined reports. When you create a report format, you essentially create a template that consists of positions for attribute information to be reported for every component or connection in a model. To create a report format, you use menu options /REPORTS/ /ADD/. These options allow you to do the following to define a report format:
Creating Components
Creating Libraries
Assign a title, type, and description.
Specify whether or not to query a relational data base for additional attribute information.
Define fields by specifying which attributes are to be reported and where the information for each attribute is listed.
Define fields that perform arithmetic operations on two other fields.
Using Relays
Define criteria by which CADEX sorts entries.
Generating Reports
Define options by which CADEX groups entries.
Define rules for CADEX to determine if a component's information should be included in a report.
54
When you save a report format, its name is displayed on the Report List panel. The figure on the following page shows the Report List panel for the sample design. The figure on the following page shows a report extracted from the sample design.
Report List Title BOM Connection List Equipment List Furniture List Parts List Section Contents Type BOM From-to Parts list Parts list Parts list Parts list Description Counts parts Electrical connectivity Lists refdes, part number Inventory of furniture in Section #3 Lists x,y location Inventory of all parts in Section 3
RESET
Sample Report List Panel

List Furniture List IInventory of furniture in Secton #3 Qty 16 32 16 16 PartNo BOOKSHELF CHAIR TRASH CAN WALLS & DESK Description A shelf to hold books Typical low budget office chair Ejection-molded plastic wastebasket Pre-fab wall and desk unit
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------80
<----
--->
Furniture List for the Sample Design
55
After you create a report format with menu option /REPORTS/, you can use it in one of the following ways:
Interactively run a report on the active model.
Interactively run a report using the intermediate files from a previously run background process.
Generate a report as part of a background process. (Submitting background processes is described in Task 13)
56
Task 13: Submitting a CADEX Extraction Background Process and Viewing Its Results
Defining a Profile
Related Material in This Guide: To submit a CADEX Extraction background process, see Chapter 15. To define a report format, see Chapter 14. After completing a CADEX design, you can extract information from it by submitting a CADEX Extraction background process. To do this, use . The CADEX Extraction background process extracts attribute information assigned to components and connections in a design and stores that information in a set of intermediate files generated as part of the background process. These files are used to create any reports that you selected to run as part of the background process, and they can also be used to interactively generate reports using menu option /REPORTS/. Generating reports interactively is described in Task 12. In addition, a CADEX Extraction background process flags all of the situations in the design that generate errors and warnings. With the information it extracts from a design, CADEX generates the following models:
Creating Components
Creating Libraries
A report model (rpt) that contains any reports generated.
An error model (err) that flags every situation in the design that violates the error conditions you specified when you submitted the background process.
Using Relays
Generating Reports
A warning model (wrn) that flags every situation in the design that violates the warning conditions you specified when you submitted the background process.
A documentation model (doc) that provides a statistical summary for each model analyzed and lists all system messages and error messages generated by the background process.
57
When you run a CADEX Extraction background process, the models in your design must be either members of an overlay family or sequentially numbered sheets. CADEX processes members of an overlay family in the order they were added to the overlay family. If the sheets are sequentially numbered, you can process the entire design or a limited range of sheets. In either case, you can specify whether to process all views of each model or just the primary view.
58
Viewing the Results of a Background Process

After a background process is complete, you can view its results by selecting the process name on the Process Results panel, displayed when you select . The figure below illustrates this panel. When you select a name on the Process Results panel, CADEX displays a pop-up menu. By selecting options on this menu, you can display any reports generated by the background process, as well as the graphical error and warning models.
Process Results Process Title Extraction Extraction Extraction Extraction Submit Time 2/17/99 10:09:21 2/17/99 10:25:18 2/17/99 13:32:03 2/17/99 13:34:34 Output ID Status Complete Complete Complete Executing
UPDATE
Sample Process Results Panel
When a CADEX background process finds error and warning situations in a model, it creates an error model (err), a warning model (wrn), or both. When overlaid with the source drawings, these graphic models circle all the errors and warnings detected by the batch job. The types of errors and warnings that are flagged depend on the types of error and warning conditions you defined when you submitted the CADEX Extraction background process. As you display errors and warnings, you can correct violations, usually by altering the geometry of the design or redefining a component. You can then resubmit the background process. By repeatedly correcting errors and resubmitting the batch job, you can create a completely valid design. The figure below shows a warning generated by the sample design. For the error circled in this figure, a message reads: Unused pin. To
59
correct this violation, the circled pin must be connected to another pin.
sheet number 03
SHOW ALL ERASE ERROR DELETE RETURN
Panel Displaying a Warning Generated by a CADEX Extraction Background Process
60
Creating a Mechanical Design

When you generate an equipment list or a bill of materials for a design, CADEX normally counts all the parts in the drawing. In some cases, however, part geometry is not easily quantified. For example, a part may consist of many pieces that are difficult to delineate from other geometry and thus cannot be defined as a component. Or, a single part may be displayed in multiple views. In these cases, you may want to use a balloon or some other type of element as a vehicle to provide accurate information about a part, rather than defining the actual geometry of the part as a component set. Any reports you generate will report the attribute information you assign to the balloons.
Creating Components
To create a component set that provides information about parts in a drawing, you can create an element such as a balloon and then use menu options /BUILD/ /DEFINE/ to define that geometry as a component. The drawing below shows the balloon component used in the sample mechanical design. used in the sample mechanical design. After creating a balloon Each balloon component used in the design has the same user attributes as the part to which it points.
Attributing
xx
Components
Each balloon component also has a Quantity attribute assigned to it. Below left is the Add panel that was used to assign user attributes to the balloon component that points to the keycaps. Notice that the data value for the Quantity attribute is 4. This is the number of keycap components reported in the bill of materials.
61
Add Name Cost Description Material Quantity Data 2.00 Keycap DT, cursor Plastic 4
EDIT
DELETE
A CADEX report can also count instances of a component, rather than report a number assigned as a Quantity attribute. In the sample mechanical design, however, a count would not generate an accurate number for some components such as the keycaps, since the four cursor keycaps are displayed only twice (in the middle view).
Defining Selection Rules for a Report

For ease of use, some of the elements in the sample mechanical design, such as the keycaps, are defined as components and stored in libraries. These components are assigned the same attributes as their corresponding balloon components, except for the distinguishing Quantity attribute. To create a report that lists balloon components but no other components, you can define selection rules as part of the report format. If balloon components are the only components used in your drawing, you do not need to define selection rules to distinguish between balloons and other components, since CADEX will report only the balloons.
Generating a Report
When you use menu options /REPORTS/ /RUN/ to generate a report, CADEX generates the report. The report counts only those components with a Quantity attribute assigned to them. You can copy this report to a detail page and then ditto the detail onto the overall drawing.
62
Chapter 3. CADEX Quick Reference Guides

Creating Designs That Require Connectivity
Before You Design

Use PROFILE to set The application mode and default values
Creating a Design
Copy components from libraries into the drawing
Extracting Information From a Design

Define report formats and generate reports on single sheet designs
Create components
Attibute components
Connect components with multilines
Use BACKGROUND ttto define and run a ib t CADEX Extraction background process
Move components
Edit attributes on components and connections
Examine and correct errors and warnings in the design
Create an icon panel
Place in the dots or solder branch d i commponents at all intersecting lines
Examine reports generated by the background process
Start a drawing, determine a naming convention for it, and place a grid on it
63
Creating Designs That Do Not Require Connectivity

Before You Design
Use PROFILE to set the application mode and default values
Extracting Information From a Design

Define report formats and generate reports on single sheet designs
Create components
Creating a Design
Copy components from libraries into the drawing
Attribute components
Use BACKGROUND lto define and run a CADEX Extraction background process
Move components into libraries
Edit attributes on Examine components and and t errors d connections the in i d i
Examine and correct errors and warnings in the design
Create an icon panel
Examine reports generated by the background process
Start a drawing, determine a naming convention for it, and place a grid on it
64
Chapter 4. Establishing a User Profile

What You Should Know About Establishing a User Profile
Command bar option PROFILE allows you to define a user profile for each set of drawings that have the same base name (the same first 16 characters). Primarily, a user profile identifies models that CADEX must access simultaneously as you work. A user profile allows you to do the following:
Set the application mode.
Specify the models that contain the components that constitute your user library.
Specify the model that contains the top-level drawing for a system of icon panels.
Specify the groups and users that constitute a hierarchy library.
Set the size of the icon panel.
Define the wildcard character you use when you display library parts lists or query user attributes.
Define how attributed notes that contain line feed characters ($) are displayed in CADEX reports and attribute query panels. You can replace the line feed character with a blank or a null.
Set the default values for graphic elements you use as you create electrical designs.
CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide 65
When you select PROFILE, the Profile panel is displayed. You can select PROFILE at any time during the session. The settings in your profile are stored in a separate model associated with your design, called the cadx model (cadx). The system automatically creates a cadx model for the active model if one does not already exist. If the active model is a member of an overlay family, the cadx model is associated with the overlay parent model. The appearance of the Profile panel varies, depending on the application you select. The figure below illustrates the Profile panel for the Electrical application.
Profile
User Libraries Group User

1. 2. 3. 4. cadx sample -
Application Mode Drawing ID

section,lib Application Mode = General Electrical
Heirarchy Libraries Group

1. 2. 3. 4. cadx -
Defaults
Wildcard character = * Icon panel size = side Line feed replacement char = BLANK Pin text height = .1250 Pin stub length = .1 Refdes text height = .1250 Bus bit number height = .1000 Bus line width = .0500 Bus bit style = angled Bus bit spacing = 3 Minimum spacing between lines = 1 Bus name height = .1200 Solder dot radius = .0625 RESET ACCEPT CANCEL
User
sample -
Packaging LIbraries Group

1. 2. 3. 4. cadx -
User
sample -
Drawing ID
cursor -
User Libraries Group User

cadx sample
Drawing ID
section icon panel
Setting the Application Mode

The application mode section of the Profile panel allows you to set the application mode, which controls how some of the interactive features of CADEX function. The possible application modes are General and Electrical.
66
The principal differences between the General and Electrical modes are as follows:
The Electrical application allows you to set many default values for graphical elements you create in electrical schematics.
Components in the General application do not require connection points, while components in the Electrical application do.
Specifying User Libraries
The options available in the CADEX Extraction background process vary.
The user libraries section of the Profile panel allows you to specify the names of up to five models you want to include in a user library. The components in these models serve as the contents of your user library.
Specifying Hierarchy Libraries

The Hierarchy Libraries section of the Profile panel allows you to specify the groups and users where CADEX can search for drawings called by hierarchy attributes. You can specify up to five groups and users in the Hierarchy Libraries section.
Specifying Packaging Libraries

The user libraries section of the Profile panel allows you to specify the names of up to five models you want to include in a user library. The components in these models serve as the contents of your user library.
Specifying an Icon Panel Drawing

The Packaging Libraries section of the Profile panel allows you to specify the names of up to five models that contain tables for packaging components (Electrical Application only). If this section is not defined, you cannot package components in your design when you run a background process.
Changing the Defaults

The Defaults sections of the Profile panel allows you to set two default values common to the General and Electrical applications: wildcard character and icon panel size. In the Electrical application
67
you can also set a number of other defaults that control the size and style of graphics you create for electrical schematics. All of the defaults you can set are described in Table 2, below. Default Option Wildcard character Description The character you use as a wildcard when displaying a subset of the parts contained in a library or when querying or deleting user attributes. The size of the icon panel displayed when you select /COMPONENTS/ /PANEL/. The icon panel can be displayed over the full screen or as a side panel. The character that replaces line feed character symbols ($) in attributed notes when they appear in CADEX reports and attribute query panels. The options are BLANK (the default) and NULL. For example, an attributed note containing the text USER$DATA can be displayed as: USER DATA (Line feed char = BLANK) Or USERDATA (Line feed char = NULL) Pin text height The height of the text that is used to name and number component pins created when you use menu options /BUILD/ /DRAW/ to automatically create a component. The length of stubs that are automatically created when you use menu options /CHIP/ or /STUB/ under menu options /BUILD/ /DRAW/ to create a component. The height of text that is used for the generic reference designator and part number created when you use menu
Icon panel size
Line feed replacement character
Pin stub length
Refdes text height
68
options /CHIP/, /CONNECTOR/, or /STUB/ under menu options /BUILD/ /DRAW/. Bus bit number height Bus line width The height of the text used to name and number the bits on a bus. The height of the line drawn to depict a bus. The style use to fan bits into a bus. Straight means bits fan into busses on a right angle. Angled means bits fan into busses on an angle other than 90 degrees.
Bus bit style
Angled Bits Bus bit spacing
Straight Bits
The distance between bits when you fan them out from a bus but do not connect them to a series of pins. The minimum distance between bits when you extend them at a right angle. The height of the text used to name a bus. The radius of solder dots that are created when you place solder dots using menu options /UTILS/->/BRANCH/.
Minimum spacing between lines Bus name height Solder dot radius
69
Setting the Application mode

Use this procedure to set the application mode. The interactive functions of CADEX vary, depending on how you set the application mode.
Steps:
Select PROFILE. CADEX displays the Profile panel.

Message:
Select option
Select the type of application you want (General or Electrical) in the Application Mode section. The mode you select will be highlighted. The values displayed under Defaults vary, depending on the application mode.
Optional: To cancel any changes you have made to the Profile panel, do the following: a. Select CANCEL.
Message:
YN cancel
b.
Press YN.
Optional: To reset the Profile panel to its default settings, do the following: a. Select RESET.
Message:
YN reset all values from the installation profile
70
b.
Press YN.
To save your changes to the Profile panel, select ACCEPT or PROFILE. Your new settings are saved, and the Profile panel is no longer displayed.
71
Changing the Defaults

Use this procedure to change default values for CADEX. The possible default configurations on the Profile panel are shown below. General Application Wildcard character = * Icon panel size = side Line feed replacement char = BLANK Electrical Application Wildcard character = * Icon panel size = side Line feed replacement char = BLANK Pin text height = .1250 Pin stub length = 1 Refdes text height = .1250 Bus bit number height = .1000 Bus line width = .0500 Bus bit style = angled Bus bit spacing = 3 Minimum spacing between lines = 1 Bus name height = .1200 Solder dot radius = .0625
Steps:

Message:
Select option
Select the option in the Defaults section that you want to modify.
Message:
Select option / Key new value / YN default, toggle, or next
To change default values, do one of the following:
72
To change default values in the General application, do any of the following Default value Wildcard character Icon panel size Do the following
Key in a new character
Press YN. Pressing YN toggles between a full screen display and a side panel. Press YN. Pressing YN toggles between BLANK and NULL. NOTE: This option does not affect the way notes are displayed in your CADAM model.
To change default values in the Electrical application, do any of the following: Default value Wildcard character Icon panel size Do the following Key in a new character Press YN. Pressing YN toggles between a full screen display and a side panel. Press YN. Pressing YN toggles between BLANK and NULL. NOTE: This option does not affect the way notes are displayed in your CADAM model. Key in a new value. Key in a new value. Key in a new value.
Pin text height Pin stub length Refdes text height
73
Bus bit number height Bus line width Bus bit style
Key in a new value.
Key in a new value. Press YN. Pressing YN toggles between straight and angled. Key in a new value. Key in a new value.
Bus bit spacing Minimum spacing between lines Bus name height Solder dot radius
Key in a new value. Key in a new value.
Message:
YN cancel
c.
Press YN.
Message:
c.
Press YN.
74
75
76
Chapter 5. Creating Component Sets

What You Should Know About Creating Component Sets
A component set is a combination of CADAM geometric elements and information organized into a group. That information consists of system attributes, which you set, and user attributes, which you can optionally define. Any manipulations you perform on a component affect all the elements and information in the set; CADEX treats it all as one entity. You can use the tools available in menu option /BUILD/ to create component sets.
Menu Structure
When you select menu option /BUILD/, the following menu is displayed:
The Process for Creating a Component Set

Creating a component set consists of three basic processes: creating geometry, defining the geometry as a component set, and defining system attributes and user attributes for the component. Creating a component set consists of three basic processes: creating geometry, defining the geometry as a component set, and defining system attributes and user attributes for the component. System attributes provide essential information about a component set so that it can function correctly in the CADEX system. User attributes are units of alphanumeric information that describe the component, such as its color, cost, or size.
Drawing Geometry for a Component Set

You can use CATIA/CADAM Drafting to draw most of the geometry needed to depict components. CADEX also provides some special utilities for drawing rectangular components. These are primarily used for creating connectors and chips in the Electrical application. Generally, the geometry of a component set consists of the following:
77
Geometry depicting the component.
A CADAM note used as either a reference designator and part number or a component set name. You can also use two separate notes for the reference designator and the part number.
Using a CADAM note to depict a reference designator and part number or a name is optional, since you can also choose to define these for a component set later, when you define its system attributes.
A point or text that is later defined as a pivot.
Notes or points that are later defined as connection points called pins.
To create pins, you can create points or notes in a component set and later define them as pins. The pivot point of each note serves as the actual point of connection. Pins are used only in the Electrical application mode.
CADEX Utilities for Creating Component Set Geometry

CADEX provides utilities under menu options /BUILD/ /DRAW/ that allow you to create certain types of geometry quickly. These tools are particularly useful in the Electrical application for defining chips and connectors. The /DRAW/ utilities are described below: Utility Name: /BOX/ /NUMBER/ Description: Creates a rectangle. Numbers a text string or a series of text strings.
/CONNECTOR/ Defines a rectangle as a connector. /CHIP/ /STUB/ Defines a rectangle as a chip. Creates a pin stub.
Defining Geometry as a Component Set

After you create geometry, you can use menu options /BUILD/ /DEFINE/ to define that geometry as a component set. To identify
78
the geometry included in a component set, you can select individual elements or use a trap polygon or trap rectangle. To redefine an existing component set, you can select it or trap it.
Defining System Attributes for a Component Set

After defining the geometry of a component set, you can set system attributes for it. Selecting menu options /DEFINE/ /SYSTEM ATTRIB/ displays the following system attributes on the System Attributes panel: Type A type system attribute identifies a component as being either a schematic part, which represents a real object, or some other type of component, such as a shield, cable, or sheet extension. In the General application, the only type available is Schematic Part. Schematic part Ground Power Sheet extension Hierarchy Shield Twist Coax Cable Reference Designator A reference designator system attribute allows you to distinguish between components with the same part number. When you place more than one copy of the same component on a drawing, you may want to assign unique reference designators to these components, since they all have the same part number. You can define the reference designator of a component set either by selecting a note grouped with the component set or by keying in a text string. Keying in text strings creates "hidden" reference designators; they are not displayed on your drawing. Schematic parts allow both a reference designator and a part number. All other types of components require a name instead. Rules for creating reference designators:
79
Reference designators can be up to 72 alphanumeric characters.
A CADAM note grouped with the component set can be defined as the reference designator or as both a reference designator and a part number.
When you create a single note that you plan to define as both a reference designator and a part number, separate the two with one or more dollar signs ($). A dollar sign in a CADAM note causes the text following it to be displayed on the next line. The dollar sign is not displayed. For example, if you key in AB10$7401, the following is displayed:
AB10 7401
When you define this kind of note as a reference designator, CADEX considers everything before the dollar sign to be the reference designator and everything after the dollar sign to be the part number.
Reference designators need not be unique. If a reference designator is not unique, it must be represented by one or two alphanumeric characters followed by xx, such as Uxx or ICxx.
Although generic reference designators are generally used when creating a schematic design, you can use them for any purpose you want. When you use generic reference designators and you run a background process to produce a from-to list, CADEX assigns to each reference designator an ampersand followed by a unique number followed by an ampersand. In a from-to list, CADEX reports these reference designators as U&1&, U&2&, U&3&, etc. The system limit for the number of reference designators in a design is 3,000. Part Number A part number system attribute identifies unique component sets to the CADEX system. You must assign a part number to any component you want to retrieve from a library or any component that CADEX must list in a background process. You can define the part number of a component set by either selecting a note grouped with a component or by keying in a text string. Keying in text strings creates "hidden" part numbers; they are not displayed on your drawing. Rules for creating part numbers:
80
Part numbers can be 72 alphanumeric characters, although CADEX libraries only support part numbers of up to 16 characters.
Part numbers for different components must be unique.

Name A name system attribute identifies all types of component sets except schematic parts. You can define the name of a component set by either selecting a note grouped with a component or by keying in a text string. Keying in text strings creates "hidden" names; they are not displayed on the schematic drawing. Component names can be 72 alphanumeric characters, although CADEX libraries only support names of up to 16 characters. Pivot A pivot system attribute defines a reference point for moving a component. When you move a component to a new position, you are actually placing the component set's pivot at that position. The rest of the component set moves relative to the pivot. Creating pivot points is optional. If you move a component set that does not have a pivot point defined, the system chooses a point within the set as the pivot. Pins In the Electrical application, pin system attributes define connection points for component sets. You can assign a pin system attribute to a note or a point. Each component can have up to 256 pins associated with it. When you define text in a component as a pin, you may also want to define nodes. A node is a point, logically associated with a pin, which provides additional connection points for multilines. When a from-to list is generated, it lists any multilines connecting to a node as connecting to the pin associated with that node. If the design you are creating does not require connectivity, you do not have to define pins for component sets.
Noshowing and Showing Component Geometry

Throughout the component definition process, you can use menu options /DEFINE/ /SHOW/ to noshow all geometry on the display except the elements you have defined to be part of a component set. Selecting menu option /RESET/ displays everything that was noshown.
81
Modifying Component Sets

You can use menu options /DEFINE/ /MODIFY/ /ELEM/ to modify an existing component set by adding elements to or deleting elements from the set.
Creating Nested Component Sets

You can use menu options /DEFINE/ /MODIFY/ /SET/ to nest component sets. A nested set is a component set that contains other component sets, with each retaining its individual attributes. Nesting allows you to design component sets that simulate the construction of a part; the nesting can reflect how parts can consist of other parts that consist of other parts.
Parent
Children (siblings)
In a nested component set, the superior set is called the parent component set, and the subordinate sets are called children. Sets that are all children of the same parent are called siblings. One parent component set can contain many children which, in turn, can be parents of more component sets. For example, if you select one component set and add another component to it, you have created a nested component set. The first component set is the parent; the second component is the child of the parent. If you add another component set at this point, that component is the sibling of the second set and a child of the first set. Using menu option /ATTRIBUTE/, you can assign a special inheritance attribute to a nested component set. This attribute causes the current component to inherit attribute data from components further up in the nested set.
Traversing Nested Component Sets

You can use the menu options available under /TRAVERSE/ to navigate through the levels of a nested component set. Using /UP/ and /DOWN/, you can move up and down the levels of a nested set. Using /NEXT/ and /PREVIOUS/, you can move sideways through the siblings of a nested set.
82
As you traverse from one level of a nested set to another, that set becomes active and is highlighted. You can then use the tools available in menu option /BUILD/ to modify the active set. Depending on whether menu option /ALL/ is active, any modifications you perform on the set can affect either all the sets nested beneath the active set or only the active set.
83
Select the top level of the hierarchy. The entire nested set is highlighted. Select /DOWN/ to travel down one level. Only one set at that lower level (out of a possible three) is highlighted.
Select /DOWN/ to travel down another level.
Select /NEXT/ to travel sideways.
Select /PREVIOUS/ to travel sideways in the reverse direction.
Select /UP/ to travel up one level.
Traversing a Nested Component Set
84
You can use menu options /TRAVERSE/ /LIST/ to display the Traverse panel, which textually represents the hierarchy within a nested set. The panel can list the reference designator or part number of every set contained in the nested set; for each successive level in the nesting, the textual representations for the sets at that level are indented. The figure below illustrates a nested component set and the Traverse panel.
The nested component set shown below generates the component tree shown in the panel.
Traverse Component Tree Great Grandpa Jones Great Aunt Smith Aunt Jetson Cousin Leroy Cousin Wade Uncle Smith Cousin Ned Grandpa Jones Aunt Nelson Cousin Carl Dad Sister Sally Me
Aunt Jetson
Great Grandpa Jones
Grandpa Jones
Great Aunt Smith
Dad
Aunt Nelson
Uncle Smith
Me
Sister Sally
Cousin Carl
Cousin Ned
Cousin Leroy Cousin Wade
PARTNO REFDES
Traverse Panel Showing the Structure of a Nested Component Set
85
Copying a Component Set to a Detail Page

When you have completely defined a component set, you can use suboption /DETAIL/ under menu options /BUILD/ /DEFINE/ to transfer it to a detail page. After moving a copy of a component to a detail page, you can use function key DETAIL to create dittos from that component set or to move it into another model, such as a user library model. Another way to transfer a component set to a detail page is by using suboption /DETAIL/ under menu options /COMPONENTS/ /MOVE/. This suboption also allows you to transfer to a detail page multiple component sets, as well as geometry that has not been defined as a component set.
Merging Component Sets

Menu options /BUILD/ /MERGE/ allow you to merge two component sets, combining the geometry from both. CADEX retains the system attributes for the first set you select and uses them as the system attributes for the new, combined component set.
86
Drawing Component Set Geometry Using CATIA/CADAM Drafting

Use this procedure to create the geometry for a component set with CATIA/CADAM Drafting . See the CATIA/CADAM Drafting User's Guide for a more detailed description of the steps in this procedure. After you create your geometry, use menu option /DEFINE/ in function key CADEX to define it as a component set. You can also use menu options /BUILD/ /DRAW/ in function key CADEX to rapidly create geometry for rectangular components.
Before You Begin: Define a grid and lock it on using function key POINT.
Steps:
Create geometry to represent a component. You may use combinations of any type of CATIA/CADAM Drafting element to depict a component set.
If you want a reference designator, part number, or a name to be displayed as part of the geometry of a component set, create text for each using function key NOTE.
If you want points to serve as connection points (pins), create them at the appropriate locations using function key POINT.
If you want text strings to serve as connection points (pins), create them at the appropriate locations using function key NOTE.
87
If you want additional text to be included in the geometry of a component set, create the text using function key NOTE.
88
Drawing Component Set Geometry Using CADEX

Use the following subprocedures to create some of the more common geometric elements used in CADEX components. The tools available within menu options /BUILD/ /DRAW/ vary, depending on your application mode. In both the Electrical and General applications, you can rapidly create rectangles and assign numbers to series of text strings using the following subprocedures: Subprocedure: Creating a Rectangle: /BOX/ Assigning Pin Numbers: /NUMBER/ In the Electrical application, you can also use the following subprocedures to add pins to rectangles and define them as electrical connectors and chips: Subprocedure: Creating a Connector: /CONNECTOR/ Creating a Chip: /CHIP/ Creating a Stub: /STUB/ Adjusting the Position of a Pin Number: /POSN/ Component sets that are not rectangular require unique geometry. Use the tools available in the CATIA/CADAM Drafting to create this geometry. After you create your geometry, use menu option /DEFINE/ to define it as a component set.
89
Creating a Rectangle /BOX/

Use this procedure to rapidly create a rectangle. In the Electrical application the rectangle can represent a chip or connector.
Steps:
1
Menu:
Select /BUILD/.

Message:
Sel element / Sel component / Ind pt / YN rectangle
Select /DRAW/.
If the application mode is: General Electrical
The menu reads: / BOX / NUMBER // RETURN / / BOX / CONNECTOR / CHIP / STUB / NUMBER / / RETURN /
Message:
Sel menu
Select /BOX/.
Ind corner / Select rectangle to modify
Message:
To create the rectangle, do one of the following: To create a new rectangle, do the following: a. Indicate the location of the first corner of the rectangle.
Message:
Indicate opposite corner
90
b.
Message:
Indicate the opposite corner of the rectangle.
Redefine corner / Select rectangle
c.
Optional: Indicate near the corners of the rectangle to redefine its size.
To modify an existing rectangle, do the following: a.

Message:
Select a rectangle to modify.
Redefine corner / Select rectangle
b.
Indicate to redefine the corners of the rectangle.
91
Assigning Pin Numbers: /NUMBERS/

Use this procedure to assign numbers to pins by replacing their text strings with pin numbers. You can replace either a single text string or a series of text strings. To number a series of text strings, you must arrange them in either a vertical or a horizontal line. Although you can use menu option /NUMBER/ to number any type of text, this procedure is especially useful for numbering pins on chips and connectors. You can use menu option /NUMBER/ to number pins that are unnumbered (labeled with question marks) or to renumber existing pins on chips and connectors.
Steps:
1
Menu:
Select /BUILD/.

Message:
Select /DRAW/.
The menu reads: / BOX / NUMBER // RETURN / / BOX / CONNECTOR / CHIP / STUB / NUMBER / / RETURN /
Message:
Sel menu
Select /NUMBER/.
The menu reads: / BOX / NUMBER // AUTO NUMBER // RETURN / / BOX / CONNECTOR / CHIP / STUB / NUMBER / / AUTO NUMBER // RETURN /
92
Message:
Key pin # / Key @prefix / Sel element = 1 / YN auto assign
Optional: To create a pin number prefix, key in a text string preceded by an @. The prefix can be letters or numbers. For example, if you key in @a, the pins are numbered a1, a2, a3, etc. If you key in @DFG, the pins are numbered DFG1, DFG2, DFG3, etc.
Optional: To change the current pin number, key in a number. The value you key in becomes the current value and is displayed in the message line. When menu option /AUTO NUMBER/ is active (underlined), each time you select a text string, the pin number value is automatically incremented.
To number pins, do one of the following: To automatically number a series of text strings, do the following: a. Press YN.
Message:
Select starting element / Key increment
b.
Optional: Key in a new incremental value for assigning pin numbers. For example, an incremental value of 2 assigns consecutive pin numbers of 1,3,5,7, etc. The default value of 1 is used if you do not specify an increment.
c.
Message:
Select the first text string in the sequence.
Select ending element
d.
Select the last text string in the sequence.
93
The pin number values are assigned to the series of text strings you selected. To number pins one by one, do the following: a. b. Select menu option /AUTO NUMBER/ to deactivate it. Select the text string to be replaced by a pin number. The current pin number replaces that text string. c. To increment the next pin number, press YN or skip this step to assign the same number to all pins. The pin number in the message increases by one if you press YN. d. Continue to apply pin numbers to text strings by selecting each text string one by one.
94
Creating a Connector: /CONNECTOR/

Use this procedure to create a connector by automatically attaching pins to a rectangle representing a connector. The connector is automatically defined as a component set. When you add a pin to a connector, two node points are automatically created at the boundary of the connector. Each pair of node points is logically associated with a pin. When a from-to list is generated, any multilines connected to node points are treated as though they actually connect to the pin they are logically associated with. After you create your geometry, you can use menu option /DEFINE/ to define system attributes for the component set. CADEX automatically assigns a pin system attribute to each pin you create on a connector, so the pin total shown on the System Attributes panel includes all the pins in the component set. Before You Begin: Create a rectangle using menu option /BOX/ To adjust the size of the pin text and the reference designator and part number text you create with this procedure, use PROFILE.
Steps:
1
Menu:
Select /BUILD/.

Message:
2
Menu:
Select /DRAW/.
/ BOX / CONNECTOR / CHIP / STUB / NUMBER / / RETURN /

Message:
Sel menu
Select /CONNECTOR/.
Select connector
Message:
95
A grid must be defined before you can create a connector. Use function key POINT to define a grid. If you have not defined a grid for this model, a message reads: No grid defined.
Select a rectangle.
Key pin number / Key range I,J / Ind ref des / YN `?' pin
Message:
Optional: To add a generic reference designator and part number to the connector, indicate where you want them displayed. The following generic reference designator and part number are displayed and added to the component set:
Pxx Partno
You can also move the location of an existing reference designator by indicating at another location. To create a range of pins with numbers automatically assigned to those pins, do the following:
To create pins on the connector, do one of the following: a. Key in a range I,J for the pin numbers, where I and J are whole numbers.
Message:
Key increment = 1
b.
Key in a new incremental value for assigning pin numbers or press YN to accept the default value. For example, an incremental value of 2 assigns consecutive pin numbers of 1,3,5,7, etc.
Message:
Key grid spacing / Ind starting position / YN use entire connector
96
An information message provides the current grid spacing. Grid spacing is the number of grid points between each pin. c. Optional: To change the grid spacing, key in a new value. For example, if you want to space the connector pins .25 inches apart, and you are using a grid size of .125 inches, you must use change the grid spacing to 2. The default grid spacing is 4. d. To generate pins on the connector, do one of the following: Press YN to automatically generate pins, starting at the top of the connector. The grid spacing is automatically set so that the pins fill the entire rectangle evenly. Indicate a point on the connector where you want to start generating pins automatically. The specified number of pins is automatically generated and numbered. CADEX assigns pin numbers according to the increment you have specified.
Message:
Select connector / YN delete
e.
Optional: To delete all of the pins just
To create numbered pins one by one, do the following: generated on the connector, press YN. a.
Message:
Key in the number of the first pin.
Indicate position / Key increment
An information message provides the current pin number and increment value. b. Optional: Key in a new incremental value for assigning pin numbers.
97
For incremental value of 2 assigns consecutive pin numbers of 1,3,5,7, etc. The default value of 1 is used if you do not specify an increment. c. Indicate a location on the connector where you want to generate the first pin. A pin is generated and numbered using the current pin number. CADEX increases the current pin number by the increment you have specified.
Message:
Indicate position / Key pin number / YN delete
d.
Optional: Press YN to delete the pin just generated.
Message:
Indicate position / Key pin number
e.
Continue to create pins by indicating at the point where you want to generate each pin. Each pin generated is numbered using the current pin number. After you create each pin, the current pin number is increased by the increment you have specified.
To create pins that do not have numbers assigned to them, do the following: a.
Message:
Press YN.
Indicate position / Key pin count
b.
To create unnumbered pins one by one or to create a specific quantity of unnumbered pins, do one of the following: To create pins one by one, do the following: 1) Indicate a location on the connector where you want to generate an unnumbered pin. A pin is generated and a question mark (?) is used for its pin number.
98
Message:
Indicate position / Key pin count / YN delete
2)
Message:
3)
Continue to create unnumbered pins by indicating at the point where you want to generate each pin.
To create a set quantity of unnumbered pins, do the following: 1) Key in the number of pins you want to create.
Message:
Key grid spacing / Ind starting position / YN use entire connector
An information message provides the current grid spacing. Grid spacing is the number of grid points between each pin. 2) 3) Optional: To change the grid spacing, key in a new value. To generate unnumbered pins, do one of the following: Indicate a point on the connector where you want to start generating pins automatically. Press YN to generate pins automatically, starting at the top of the connector. The grid spacing is automatically set so that pins fill the entire rectangle evenly. The specified number of pins is automatically generated and numbered. A question mark (?) is used for each pin number.
99
Message:
Select connector / YN delete
4)
Optional: To delete all pins just generated on the connector, press YN. All of the pins just generated are deleted.
100
Creating a Chip: /CHIP/

Use this procedure to create a chip by automatically attaching pins to a previously defined rectangle that represents the perimeter of the chip. When you create a chip using this procedure, it is automatically defined as a component set. After you create your geometry, you can use menu option /DEFINE/ to define system attributes for the component set. CADEX automatically assigns a pin system attribute to each pin you create on a chip, so the pin total shown on the System Attributes panel includes all the pins in the component set.
Before You Begin: Create a rectangle using menu option /BOX/ To adjust the size of the pin text and the reference designator and part number text you create with this procedure, use PROFILE.
Steps:
1
Menu:
Select /BUILD/.

Message:
2
Menu:
Select /DRAW/.

Message:
Sel menu
Select /CHIP/.
101
Menu:
/ BOX / CONNECTOR / CHIP / STUB / NUMBER // RT / LT / TOP / BOT / POSN // INVERT // RETURN /
Message:
Select rectangle
A grid must be defined before you can create a chip. Use function key POINT to define a grid and lock it on. If you have not defined a grid for this model, a message reads: No grid defined.
Select a rectangle.
Key pin number / Key range I,J / Ind ref des / YN `?' pin
Message:
Optional: To add a generic reference designator and part number to the chip, indicate where you want them to be displayed. The following generic reference designator and part number are displayed and added to the component set:
Uxx Partno
You can also move the location of an existing reference designator by indicating.
To change the position of the pins you are creating, do one of the following: Change the edge of the chip where the pins will be drawn by selecting the appropriate menu option: /RT/, /LT/, /TOP/, or /BOT/. The right edge (/RT/) is the default edge. Invert pins when they are drawn by selecting menu option /INVERT/. The illustration below shows a normal pin and an inverted pin that were created with menu option /RT/ activated.
102
Normal Pin
Inverted Pin
To create pins on the chip, do one of the following: a To create a range of pins with pin numbers automatically assigned to them, do the following: a. Key in a range I,J for the pin numbers, where I and J are whole numbers.
Message:
Key increment = 1
b.
Key in a new incremental value for assigning pin numbers or press YN to accept the default value. For example, an incremental value of 2 assigns consecutive pin numbers of 1,3,5,7, etc.
Message:
Key grid spacing / Ind starting position / YN auto space
An information message provides the current grid spacing. Grid spacing is the number of grid points between each pin. c. Optional: To change the grid spacing, key in a new value. For example, if you want to space the chip pins .25 inches apart, and you are using a grid size of .125 inches, you must change the grid spacing to 2. The default grid spacing is 4. d. To generate pins on the chip, do one of the following: Press YN to automatically generate pins, starting at the top of the chip.
103
The grid spacing is automatically set so that the pins fill the entire rectangle evenly. Indicate where you want to start generating pins automatically. The specified number of pins is automatically generated and numbered. CADEX assigns pin numbers according to the increment you have specified.
Message:
Select rectangle / YN delete
e.
Optional: To delete all of the pins just generated, press YN.
To create numbered pins one by one, do the following: a.

Message:
Key in the number of the first pin.
An information message provides the current pin number and increment value. b. Key in a new incremental value for assigning pin numbers. For example, an incremental value of 2 assigns consecutive pin numbers of 1,3,5,7, etc. The default value of 1 is used if you do not specify an increment. c. Indicate where you want to generate the first pin. A pin is generated and numbered using the current pin number. CADEX increases the current pin number by the increment you specified.
Message:
d.
104
Message:
e.
Continue to create pins by indicating where you want to generate each pin. Each pin generated is numbered using the current pin number. After you create each pin, CADEX increases the current pin number by the increment you specified.
To create pins that do not have numbers assigned to them, do the following: a.
Message:
Press YN.
b.
To create unnumbered pins one by one or to create a set quantity of unnumbered pins, do one of the following: To create pins one by one, do the following: 1) Indicate where you want to generate an unnumbered pin. A pin is generated and a question mark (?) is used for its pin number.
Message:
Indicate position / Key pin count / YN delete
2)
Message:
3)
Continue to create unnumbered pins by indicating where you want to generate each pin.
To create a set quantity of unnumbered pins, do the following: 1) Key in the number of pins you want to create.
105
Message:
Key grid spacing / Ind starting position / YN auto space
An information message provides the current grid spacing. Grid spacing is the number of grid points between each pin. 2) 3) Optional: To change the grid spacing, key in a new value. To generate unnumbered pins, do one of the following: Press YN to automatically generate pins, starting at the top of the chip. The grid spacing is automatically set so that pins fill the entire rectangle evenly. Indicate where you want to start automatically generating pins. The specified number of pins is automatically generated and numbered. A question mark (?) is used for each pin number.
Message:
Select rectangle / YN delete
3)
Optional: To delete all pins just generated, press YN.
Creating a Stub: /STUB/

Use this procedure to create a stub for a pin or connection point. You may add a stub to any existing geometry. When stubs are included in geometry that you later define as a component set, CADEX automatically adds a pin or connection point system attribute to each stub.
Steps:
106
1
Menu:
Select /BUILD/.

Message:
2
Menu:
Select /DRAW/.

Message:
Sel menu
3
Menu:
Select /STUB/.
/ BOX / CONNECTOR / CHIP / STUB / NUMBER // RT / LT / TOP / BOT / POSN // INVERT // RETURN /
Message:
Select component / Key pin / YN `?' pin
A grid must be defined before you can create a stub. Use function key POINT to define a grid. If you have not defined a grid for this model, a message reads: No grid defined.
Select a component set.

Key pin / YN `?' pin / Ind ref des
Message:
Optional: To add a generic reference designator and part number to the chip, indicate where you want them to be displayed. The following generic reference designator and part number are displayed and added to the component set:
Uxx Partno
107
You can also move the location of an existing reference designator by indicating at a new location.
To change the position of the stubs you are creating, do one of the following: Change the edge of the chip where the pins will be drawn by selecting the appropriate menu option: /RT/, /LT/, /TOP/, or /BOT/. The right edge (/RT/) is the default. Invert the stubs by selecting /INVERT/. The illustration below shows a normal and an inverted stub that were placed with menu option /RT/ activated.
To create stubs, do one of the following:
?
Normal Stub
?
Inverted Stub
a.
Message:
Key in the number of the first pin stub.
An information message provides the current pin number and increment value. b. Optional: Key in a new incremental value for assigning pin numbers. For example, an incremental value of 2 assigns consecutive pin numbers of 1,3,5,7, etc. The default value of 1 is used if you do not specify an increment. c. Indicate where you want to generate the first stub.
108
A stub is generated and numbered using the current pin number. If you are adding stubs to a component set, the stub is added to the set.
Message:
d.
Optional: Press YN to delete the stub just generated. The stub is deleted.
Message:
e.
Continue to create stubs by indicating where you want to generate each stub. Each stub generated is numbered using the current pin number. After you create each stub, CADEX increases the current pin number by the increment you specified. If you want to establish a new pin number for each stub, return to step
To create stubs that do not have pin numbers, do the following: a. a.

Message:
Press YN.
Indicate position
b.
Indicate where you want to generate an unnumbered stub. A stub is generated and a question mark (?) is used for its pin number. If you are adding stubs to a component set, the stub is added to the set.
Message:
Indicate position / YN delete
c.
Optional: Press YN to delete the stub just generated. The stub is deleted.
109
Message:
Indicate position
d.
Continue to create unnumbered stubs by indicating where you want to generate each stub.
110
Adjusting the Position of a Pin Number: /POSN/

Use this procedure to adjust the position of the pin numbers created when you use menu options /CHIP/ or /STUB/. You can adjust the vertical and horizontal position of a pin number by altering its position in relation to its pivot point. Menu option /POSN/ also allows you to alter the justification used for the text of each pin number. The figure below illustrates how you can use positioning parameters to move a pin number text string in relation to its pivot point. The next figure illustrates how you can use the four justification parameters to affect the spacing of a pin number text string.
Adjusting the Position of a Pin Number Text String in Relation to Its Pivot Point
Four Types of Text Justification
111
Steps:
Select menu option /POSN/.

Menu:
/ X LT / LT / HORIZ CTR / RT / X RT // X BT / BT / VERT CTR / TP / X TP // LH / CTR / RH / FILL // RETURN /

Message:
Sel menu / Sel note to reposition
Define the horizontal position of the pin number by selecting one of the following options:
Option /X-LT/ /LT/ /HZ-CTR/ /RT/ /X-RT/
Resulting Position Extreme left; the left edge of the first character in the character string (the default). Left; the center of the first character in the character string. Horizontal center; the center of the longest line. Right; the center of the last character in the character string. Extreme right; the right edge of the last character in the character string.
Define the vertical position of the pin number by selecting one of the following options:
Option /X-BT/ /BT/ /VT-CTR/ /TP/ /X-TP/
Resulting Position Extreme bottom; the bottom edge of the bottom line. Bottom; the center of a character in the bottom line. Vertical center; halfway between the top and bottom lines (the default). Top; the center of a character in the top line. Extreme top; the top edge of the top line.
112
Define the justification of the pin number's text by selecting one of the following options:
Option /LH/ /CTR/ /RH/ /FILL/
Resulting Position The note is left justified and the first character of each line is vertically aligned (the default). The note is centered and the midpoint of each line is vertically aligned. The note is right justified and the last character of each line is vertically aligned. The shorter lines of the note are stretched to the length of the longest line.
Select the text of the pin number that you want to adjust. The pin moves according to the parameters you have defined above.
113
Defining Components Sets: /DEFINE/

Use the following subprocedures to define a CADEX component set. To define a component set you must first use menu option /DEFINE/ to specify the geometry to be included in the component. After you specify the geometry, use menu option /SYSTEM ATTRIB/ to set the system attributes of the component set or use menu option /MODIFY/ to add elements to or delete elements from the component set and nest other component sets under the active component. These subprocedures are listed below: Subprocedure: Defining the Geometry of a Component Set Defining System Attributes for a Component Set: /SYSTEM ATTRIB/ Modifying Component Sets: /MODIFY/ Nesting Component Sets: /MODIFY/ While you are defining a component set, you can also use menu option /SHOW/ to show only the geometry you have selected for any component set.
Defining the Geometry of a Component Set

Use this procedure to define the geometry that depicts a component set. To do this, you can select individual elements or trap a group of elements. You can define any CADAM element to be part of a component set. Before You Begin: Create the geometry for a component set using the Catia/CADAM Interactive Design or the options under menu option /DRAW/.
Steps:
1
Menu:
Select /BUILD/.
114
Message:
To specify the geometry that depicts a component set, do one of the following: To select an existing component or individual elements, do one of the following: Select an existing component set. Individually select geometric elements for the component set by doing the following: a. Select any element you want defined as part of the component set. You can select a symbol, point, text, or any other element. If you select an element already defined as part of another component set, CADEX highlights that entire component set and displays the system attributes for that set.
Message:
Select element / Ind point / YN accept
115
b. Continue to select elements until all the geometry you want to define is highlighted. If you select an element that is already a member of a component set, an error message reads: Element is already in a set. c. Press YN to accept the selected elements as the defined component set.
CADEX highlights the selected component set or elements.

Menu:
/ SYSTEM ATTRIB / MODIFY / DETAIL // SHOW / RESET // TRAVERSE // RETURN /
Message:
Select item from side panel / Select new component
Use a trap rectangle to specify the geometry by doing the following: To trap elements, do one of the following: a. Press YN to create a trap rectangle.
Menu:
/ DEFINE / DRAW / MERGE // TRAP IN / / RETURN /

Message:
Indicate corner point
b.
Message:
Indicate one corner of the trap rectangle.
c.
Indicate the opposite corner of the trap rectangle.
Message:
Redefine corner
116
d.
Optional: Redefine the trap rectangle to add or delete elements by indicating near a corner of the rectangle. CADEX moves the nearest corner of the rectangle to that point. Continue to redefine the rectangle until you are satisfied with the trap.
e.
Select /TRAP IN/.
Use a trap polygon to specify geometry by doing the following: a. Indicate the first point of a trap polygon.
Menu:
/ DEFINE / DRAW / MERGE // TRAP IN / / RETURN /

Message:
Sel point / Ind point / YN backup
b. c. d.
Indicate additional points for the trap polygon. Optional: Press YN to erase the most recently created side of the polygon. When you finish creating the trap polygon, trap the elements by selecting /TRAP IN/.
CADEX includes the trapped elements in a component set and highlights the component set.
Menu:
/ SYSTEM ATTRIB / MODIFY / DETAIL // SHOW / RESET // ELEM / SET // TRAVERSE // RETURN /
Message:
Select element to add or delete
Optional: To view only the geometric elements you have defined for the component set, do the following: a. Select /SHOW/.
117
CADEX noshows all geometry from the drawing except for the elements you selected for the component set. b. Select /RESET/ to display the geometry not shown. CADEX displays all the geometry of the drawing.
Continue to define a component by doing one of the following: Define system attributes for the component set. Modify the component set.
Defining System Attributes for a Component Set: /SYSTEM ATTRIB/ After you have defined the geometry of a component set, you can use this procedure to display the System Attributes panel, where you set the system attributes for the component. These attributes vary, depending on the application mode and component type. The differences are illustrated in the table below.
System Attribute
General Application Schematic Part
Electrical Application Schematic Part Yes Other Types of Components
Reference Designator and Part Number Name Pins
Yes
Yes
Pivot
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes (except twist and cable components) Yes
Attributes Available in the General and Electrical Application Modes
118
In the Electrical application, if you define text strings as pins, you may also want to create nodes for each pin. A node is logically associated with a pin and provides an alternative point with which to connect that pin to a multiline. When CADEX generates a from-to list, it lists the multilines connected to a node as connected to the pin associated with that node.
119
Steps:
Select /SYSTEM ATTRIB/ if it is not already underlined. The System Attributes panel is displayed.
SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES TYPE Refdes Partno Pins Pivot
WINDOW
PROFILE
BACKGROUND
System Attributes Panel for a Schematic Part in the Electrical Application
Menu:
/ SYSTEM ATTRIB / MODIFY / DETAIL // SHOW / RESET / / TRAVERSE // RETURN /

Message:
Select item from side panel / Select new component
To define a component set type, do the following: a. Select the Type option in the System Attribute panel.
120
The option is highlighted, and the Component Types panel is superimposed on the System Attributes panel, as shown below. b. Select the type of component you want. The type you select is displayed, and the Component Types panel is removed from the display. The appearance of the System Attributes panel varies, depending on the type of component you select. Schematic parts require you to define a reference designator and a part number, while all other types of components require a name instead of a reference designator and part number.
SYSTEM TYPE = Schematic Part
atic COMPONENT Part Schematic Ground Power Sheet Hierarch Shield Twist Coax Cable
Define the system attributes of the component by doing any of the following: To define a reference designator (refdes) for a schematic part, do the following: a. Select the Refdes option. Sel refdes / Key refdes b. Select the text that you want to define as a reference designator or key in a reference designator. The text you have specified is displayed in the Refdes option. If you key in a reference
Message:
121
designator, it is not displayed, although it is recognized by CADEX background processes. A reference designator can be a maximum of 72 characters. c. Optional: To delete the reference designator just created, select the refdes text. If you have created a refdes by keying in text, you can change it by keying in new text or delete it by keying in blanks. To define a part number for a schematic part, do the following: a. Select the Partno option.
Message:
Sel part number / Key part number
b.
Select the text that you want to be used as a part number or key in a part number. The text you specify is displayed in the Partno option. If you key in a part number, it is not displayed, although it is recognized by CADEX background processes. A part number can be a maximum of 72 characters, although the system and user library functions of CADEX can recognize only the first 16 characters.
c.
Optional: To delete the part number just created, select the part number text. If you have created a part number by keying in text, you can change it by keying in new text or delete it by keying in blanks.
To define a name for a component set other than a schematic part, do the following: a. Select the Name option.
Message:
Sel name / Key name
b.
Select the displayed text that you want to define as a name or key in a name.
122
The text you have specified is displayed in the Name option. If you key in a name, it is not displayed, although it is recognized by CADEX background processes. A name can be a maximum of 72 characters. c. Optional: To delete the name just created, select the name text. If you have created a name by keying in text, you can change it by keying in new text or delete it by keying in blanks. To define pins on the schematic part, do the following: a. Select the Pins option on the System Attributes panel. All existing pins in the component are highlighted or halloed.
Message:
Sel pin (text or point) / Indicate pin / YN add all text
b.
To specify pins one by one or all at once, do one of the following: To specify pins one by one, do one of the following: Select the text string or point in the component that you want to be a pin. The text string can any length, but only the first 16 characters are displayed in a CADEX Connection report. Indicate where you want a pin. A halloed point is displayed. As you define each pin, it is highlighted or halloed, and the Pins option increases the total number of pins. To classify all text strings in the component set as pins, press YN. Any text already defined as a reference designator or a part number is excluded.
123
All other text strings are defined as pins. The Pins option displays the total number of pins in the component set. When you add at least one pin to a component, a NODE button is displayed next to the Pins option, as shown in the drawing below.
SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES TYPE Refdes Partno Pins Pivot = Schematic Part = Gate = 5447 =3 Nodes = DEFINED
c.
Optional: To delete one of the pins just created, select that pin. The pin you select is deleted, and the Pins option displays the revised total number of pins.
d.
Optional: To define nodes for a text string defined as a pin, do the following: 1) Select NODES.
Message:
Sel pin for nodes
2)
Select the text of the pin that you want to have nodes. The text you select remains highlighted, while all the other pins are no longer highlighted.
Message:
Sel node point / Indicate node / Sel next pin for nodes
3)
Select a point or indicate a location that you want to be a node. A halloed point is displayed at the location you specify.
124
4)
Optional: To remove a node point, select the halloed node point. The point is no longer halloed.
5)
Continue to select points or indicate locations for additional nodes. All the node points you specify are displayed as halloed points.
To define the pivot point of the component set, do the following: a. Select the Pivot option.
Message:
Sel pivot (point or note) / Indicate pivot
b.
Select a point or indicate a location for a pivot. If you want text that is defined as a pin to be the pivot, select that text string. The Pivot option toggles from NOT DEFINED to DEFINED. The point you specify as the pivot is halloed. If you define text as the pivot, the text is highlighted. The pivot point of the text string functions as the pivot point of the component.
c.
Optional: To delete the pivot just created, select it.
125
Modifying Component Sets: /MODIFY/

Use this procedure to modify a component set by adding elements to or deleting elements from the set.
Steps:
Select /MODIFY/.
Menu:
/ SYSTEM ATTRIB / MODIFY / DETAIL // SHOW / RESET / / ELEM / SET // TRAVERSE // RETURN /
If the active menu option is: /ELEM/ /SET/
The message reads: Select element to add or delete Select set to add or delete
To add or delete elements, do the following: a. Select menu option /ELEM/ if it is not already underlined. Select an element on the drawing. CADEX highlights the element and adds it to the component set. Select the element again, and CADEX deletes it from the component set. CADEX does not allow you to select an element that is already a member of another component set. c. Continue to add or delete elements by selecting them. If you delete all the elements in a component set, the set structure itself is deleted, unless the component set is a parent of other component sets. To access an empty parent set, you must traverse up from one of the children.
b.
126
Nesting Component Sets: /MODIFY/

Use this procedure to modify a component set by adding on or more other component sets to it, creating a nested set. You can also use this procedure to delete component sets from an existing nested set. In a nested set, the superior set is called the parent component set and the subordinate sets it contains are called children. One parent component set can contain many children, which can in turn be parents of more component sets. A component set can also be the child of more than one parent set.
Steps:
Select /MODIFY/.
Menu:
/ SYSTEM ATTRIB / MODIFY / DETAIL // SHOW / RESET / / ELEM / SET // TRAVERSE // RETURN /
If the active menu option is: /ELEM/ /SET/
The message reads: Select element to add or delete Select set to add or delete
Optional: To move to another level of a nested set, use menu option /TRAVERSE/. Using menu option /TRAVERSE/.
To add or delete components sets to the existing component set, do one of following: To add a component set to the existing component set, do the following: a. Select /SET/.
Message:
Select set to add or delete
127
b.
Message:
Select any component set.
Select set / YN include subset
c.
Press YN to add the selected component set to the existing component set.
Message:
Select set to add or delete
CADEX nests the selected component set under the existing component set. The selected component set becomes a child of the existing component set (the parent). To delete a component set from the existing component set, do the following: a.
Message:
Select /SET/.
Sel set to add or delete
b.
Select any component set that is highlighted.
If you select: A child of the highlighted component set The highlighted component set itself (which is the parent)
The message reads: Select set / YN exclude subset Select set / YN delete set
c.
Press YN to delete the selected component set from the existing component set. CADEX removes the selected component set from the nested component set. If you selected the parent set, its nested component set structure is deleted, leaving all of its children without a parent (that is, orphaned).
128
Traversing Nested Component Sets: /TRAVERSE/

Use this procedure to traverse a nested component set. As you move through a nested set, the active level and all levels nested beneath it are highlighted. If you deactivate menu option /ALL/, only the active level of the component set is highlighted when you traverse through a nested component set.
Steps:
1
Menu:
Select /TRAVERSE/.
/ UP / DOWN / NEXT / PREVIOUS // LIST / ALL / CENTER // RETURN /

Message:
Sel menu
Optional: To highlight only the component set at the active level, select /ALL/. Menu option /ALL/ is deactivated (no longer underlined).
Optional: To center the highlighted component set in the display, select /CENTER/.
To move through the levels of a nested set, select any of the following options:
129
Parent
Jones Smith Nelson Johnson
Option: /UP/
Result: Highlights the parent of the active component set as well as all other sets nested within that parent.
component set is defined or when you use menu option /SETS/ in function key GROUP to create a set). When the Parent panel is displayed, the following message is also displayed:
Message:
Select parent to traverse to
Select from the Parent panel the parent component to which you want to move. If the active component has no parent, the following message is displayed:
Info:
Component has no parent
/DOWN/
Highlights a component set in the next lowest level of the nested set. If there is no level of components below the active component, the following message is displayed:
Info:
Component has no children
130
/NEXT/
Highlights a sibling component set. Selecting /NEXT/ highlights each of the siblings at that level one by one. If the active component has no siblings, the following message is displayed:
Info:
Component has no siblings
/PREVIOUS/ Highlights a sibling component set. Selecting /PREVIOUS/ highlights each of the siblings at that level one by one, and it highlights them in the order opposite to that of /NEXT/. If the active component has no siblings, the following message is displayed:
Info:
Component has no siblings
131
Adding Elements to a Nested Set Whose Geometry Has Been Deleted

Use this procedure to add elements to a component set whose geometry has been deleted. When you use menu options /UP/, /DOWN/, /NEXT/, and /PREVIOUS/ to traverse a nested component set, you may encounter a component whose geometry has been deleted, but which still contains component set information and has component sets nested beneath it. This procedure allows you to add elements to the component set, making operations easier to perform on the otherwise invisible component.
Steps:
Use function key NOTE to create a note or use other function keys to create a geometric element. For example, you can create a note that reads BAD SET, or you can create any geometric element.
Press function key CADEX.
Select /BUILD/.
Select the nested component set that contains the component without any geometry.
Select /TRAVERSE/.
Use menu options /UP/, /DOWN/, /NEXT/, and /PREVIOUS/ to traverse to the set that has no geometry. If you know the part number, set name, or set number of the component that has no geometry, you can use menu option /LIST/ to confirm that you have traversed to the correct component.
132
Select /RETURN/.
Select /MODIFY/
/ELEM/.
Select the note or geometry created in step 1. For example, if you created a note called BAD SET, select it. The note (or whatever geometry you created in step 1) is added to the component set. Now you can easily access this set by selecting its geometry.
133
Displaying the Structure of a Nested Component Set: /LIST/

Use this procedure to display a textual representation of the structure of a nested set. This textual representation is also known as a component tree. Once you have displayed a textual representation, you can select any text in the component tree, and the set represented by that text is highlighted. An indentation signifies each level of nesting. You have the option of displaying the reference designators or the part numbers of the components in the nested set. If no reference designator or part number exists, CADEX displays in the Parent panel the set name (created when the component set is defined or when you use menu option /SETS/ in function key GROUP to create a set).
Steps:
1
Menu:
Select /TRAVERSE/.
/ UP / DOWN / NEXT / PREVIOUS // LIST / ALL / CENTER // RETURN /

Message:
Select menu
134
Traverse Component Tree SECTION
PARTNO
REFDES
Select /LIST The Traverse panel, shown in the figure above, displays a textual representation of the nested component set. The active level of the component set is highlighted.
To specify the type of text displayed in the panel, do one of the following: To display the reference designators of the components in the nested set, select REFDES. To display the part numbers for the nested component set, select PARTNO.
Optional: To highlight a set listed in the Traverse panel, select the text representing that set. The text you select and the set represented by that text is highlighted.
135
Optional: To traverse the nested component set while the set structure is displayed, select /UP/, /DOWN/, /NEXT/, or /PREVIOUS/. The appropriate component set is highlighted, as well as the text that represents that set.
To remove the Traverse panel from the display, select /LIST/.
136
Copying Components to a Detail Page: /DEFINE/ /DETAIL/

Use this procedure to transfer a copy of a newly created component set to the next available detail page on a drawing. From a detail page, you can use function key DETAIL to transfer a component set to another model, such as a user library drawing. You can also copy a component set to a detail page using menu options /COMPONENTS/ /DETAIL/.
Steps:
Select /BUILD/
/DEFINE/.
Select an existing component or define a component.

Menu:
/ SYSTEM ATTRIB / MODIFY / DETAIL // SHOW / RESET / / TRAVERSE // RETURN /
Select /DETAIL/.
YN transfer to detail page
Message:
Press YN to transfer the component set to a detail page. CADEX transfers a copy of the defined component set to the next available detail page of the active drawing.
137
Merging Component Sets: /MERGE/

Use this procedure to merge two component sets, combining the geometry and user attributes from both. CADEX retains the system attributes for the first set you select and uses them as the system attributes for the new, combined set. When you merge component sets, you can traverse a nested component set to select the component or components in the nested structure that you want to merge. This allows you to merge any component in a nested set rather than merge only a parent component set to another parent component set.
Steps:
1
Menu:
Select menu options /BUILD/
/MERGE/.
/ DEFINE / DRAW / MERGE // TRAVERSE // RETURN /

Message:
Select first component to merge
Select a component set. CADEX highlights the component you select. This is the component whose system attributes you want retained for the new merged component set.
Message:
Select second component to merge
Optional: Use menu option /TRAVERSE/ to move to other levels of the highlighted component set. As you traverse the nested set, component sets at different levels of the nesting are highlighted. The component set that is highlighted is the component that CADEX will merge.
Select the second component set.
138
Message:
Select second component to merge / YN merge
Optional: Select another component set to merge with the first component set. CADEX highlights the new component set.
Press YN to merge the highlighted component sets. CADEX combines the geometry and user attributes of both component sets into one and retains the system attributes of the first component set.
Message:
Select first component to merge / YN restore
Optional: Select YN to restore the component sets to their original, separate configuration.
139
140
Chapter 6. Attributing Component Sets and Elements

What You Should Know About Attributing Component Sets and Elements
Menu option /ATTRIBUTE/ allows you to add user attributes to component sets and connections and to delete those attributes. It also allows you to query the attribute information assigned to the components and elements in a design, whether the attribute information is stored in the CADAM model or in external data bases.
Menu Structure
When you select menu option /ATTRIBUTE/, the following menu is displayed:
/ ADD / DELETE / QUERY // RDB LOGIN // RETURN /
If you have already logged in to the external data base during the current session, or your CADEX installation does not allow you to access an external data base, the following menu is displayed:
What Is a User Attribute?

A user attribute, often simply called an attribute, is a unit of alphanumeric information that you can associate with a component or a connection between components. For example, user attributes can describe an object's size, color, or manufacturer. CADEX background processes and interactive reports can extract this information from a design and compile it into textual reports.
/ ADD / DELETE / QUERY // RETURN /
User attributes differ from system attributes, which you can assign to components using menu option /BUILD/. System attributes are units of information, such as a component's reference designator or part number, that you define but which the CADEX system uses internally to allow a component set to function correctly. A user attribute is actually a category of information, such as the color or cost of an object. For each attribute you assign to a component or element, you can also define a data value. When you assign a color attribute, for example, you can assign a data value of blue; for a cost, you can assign a data value of $1.75. Generally, you assign a data value for every attribute that you attach to an object. You can, however, assign attributes with no data values
141
to notes. When you query a component or generate a report, the note functions as the data value for that attribute. When you assign a user attribute to a component or connection, that information is stored in a separate model called the cadx model (cadx), which is associated with the base name of your current design. The system automatically creates a cadx model if one does not already exist. For any design with the same base name, you can create up to 100 user attributes, unless you have set compatibility in your user profile under function key FILES to Visual or Structural. In that case, you can create only 50 attributes (the same limit as in the host version of CADEX). Inheritance Attributes For any attribute, you can assign a special type of data value called an inheritance attribute. When you assign an inheritance attribute to a component in a nested component set, that component inherits data for an attribute from the next highest component in the nested set that has data defined for the same attribute. For example, if you assign an inheritance attribute for the SIZE attribute to a component and the next highest component in the nested set has a data value of 20 for the SIZE attribute, the component that received the inheritance attribute will inherit a data value of 20 for SIZE. User Attributes Stored in an external data base You can associate user attribute information with components by means of an external data base. After you perform the manipulations in the data base necessary to associate information with a particular component, CADEX can interactively provide that part information in a query and extract and list that information in any reports you generate. You can also use a combination of techniques to associate attributes with components. Some attribute information can reside in a data base and some can reside in the CADAM model, where it is normally stored when you assign user attributes to components using the interactive tools available in CADEX. The information stored in a data base tends to be generalized (like the information in a parts catalog) rather than specific to each instance of a part as it is used in a design. Typically, you will create that kind of specific information using the interactive tools in CADEX.
The Attribute List Panel

When you create an attribute, CADEX displays the attribute's name on the Attribute List panel. All of the attributes defined in the active model or in the overlay family of which the active model is a member are displayed on this panel. Default attributes, which are defined by an installation procedure, are also displayed on this panel.
142
Creating of Modifying an Attribute

You create each attribute by defining its properties on the Edit panel, displayed when you select EDIT on the Attribute List panel. When you create a new attribute, its name is displayed on the Attribute List panel. You can define attributes as being applicable to only components, to the connections between components, or to both. You can assign connection attributes only to multilines or notes. Generally, you assign connection attributes to multilines that connect components or to notes placed on those multilines. Using the Edit panel, you can also define an attribute so that it accepts only numeric data values. Furthermore, you can specify an allowable range for numeric values. The Edit panel also allows you to define a default value for an attribute.
Preset Attributes
You can use the PRESET option on the Attribute List panel to save combinations of attributes and retrieve them by name. In any design, you may have several different types of components or connections, each with their own distinct set of attributes. You can use PRESET to display only the attributes pertinent to a certain type of component or connection.
Assigning Attributes
Menu options /ATTRIBUTE/ /ADD/ allow you to select attributes from the Attribute List panel and assign them to selected components and elements. The attributes you select are displayed on the Add panel. For each attribute you select, you can also define the data value you want to assign to it or use the default data value, which is defined when you create the attribute. When assigning attributes, you must specify whether you are assigning them to notes or elements. (In this case elements means any object other than a note, including component sets). If you specify that you are assigning attributes to notes, CADEX does not allow you to define data values for these attributes. When you generate reports, the note itself serves as the data value for the attribute. You can edit the data of the attributes displayed on the Add panel, delete attributes from the panel, and assign the attributes displayed there to components or elements you select.
Deleting Attributes
Menu options /ATTRIBUTE/ /QUERY/ allow you to perform inquiries to determine how attributes have been assigned. You can query by attribute or by component. Querying by attribute shows all
143
the components or connections that contain a specified combination of attributes and data values. Querying by component displays all the attributes assigned to a single component, note, or line.
144
Querying Attributes
Menu options /ATTRIBUTE/ /DELETE/ allow you to delete attributes that have been assigned to components. You can select a component and then specify which of its attributes to delete, or you can select an attribute and then specify whether to delete it from all or selected components. If you are querying by attribute, you can use wildcards to search for alphanumeric values. You can also specify numeric ranges when searching for numeric data values. When you query by attribute and CADEX finds one or more matches to your query, you can accentuate those matches by noshowing everything else in the model, displaying circles around the matches, or displaying a list of all objects having this combination of attributes. For components, this list displays part numbers and reference designators; for connections, it displays locations. As you query components, you can edit the data values for the attributes assigned to those components. You can also automatically display a data value as a note in the model.
External data base

An external data base consists of a set of tables, each made up of rows and columns. Each column corresponds to an attribute, with the entries in the column being the data values for that attribute. Each row in the data base is a collection of attribute data values for a unique entity, such as a component's part number. One or more attributes in a row can form a key for the table, uniquely identifying that row. A table may contain the following columns: part number, size, rating, color, and vendor. If you define the part number field as the key field, each row provides the attributes related to a unique part number. However, if you define the vendor as the key field, each row provides the attributes for certain vendors.
Preparing to Query an external data base

If your CADEX installation allows you to access an external data base, you can query information stored there by performing two procedures: logging in to the external data base and defining the names by which you query the data base. To log in to an external data base, use menu options /ATTRIBUTE/ /RDB LOGIN/ and key in your user ID and password. Menu option /RDB LOGIN/ is then no longer displayed for the rest of the session. If your CADEX installation does not allow you to access an external data base, menu option /RDB LOGIN/ is never displayed. To define the names by which you query an external data base, you must do the following on the RDB Tables panel:
145
Identify the name of the table in the external data base that you want to query.
Identify an attribute name in the model and a column name in the external data base which you want CADEX to correlate when you perform a query.
When you perform a query, CADEX determines the part number (PartNo) of any component that meets the criteria of the query and then correlates that part number with an item number (Item#) in an external data base table called NewProducts. Generally, you define the Model Key Attribute to be PartNo, but you can define any attribute as the Model Key Attribute, as long as its data values correspond to the data values listed in the column you specify in the external data base as the RDB Key Column.
Querying Attributes Stored in an external data base

Querying attribute information stored in an external data base is much like performing a normal query. You can use the same two approaches: querying by attribute or component. When you query a component, CADEX finds the data value for the Model Key Attribute you specified in the RDB Tables panel. It then looks in the table you specified on the RDB Tables panel for the corresponding data value in the RDB Key Column. CADEX then reports all information listed on the same row as that value.
Updating the RDB Tables Panel

You can use the UPDATE button on the RDB Tables panel to reset the Model Key Attribute and RDB Key Column to default values. Creating SQL Statements That Operate on an external
Creating SQL Statements That Operate on an external data base

You can perform queries of an external data base using your own SQL commands. CADEX passes these commands directly to the external data base without checking the syntax. The results of an SQL query are displayed through the highlighting of matching components or the display on a Query panel of all the attributes associated with a component.
Creating or Modifying an Attribute
146
Use this procedure to create a new attribute or modify the definition of an existing attribute. When you create a new attribute, CADEX displays its name on the Attribute List panel. As you create an attribute, you can define the attribute's category as Component, Connection, or All. If the category is set to Component, you can assign this attribute only to a component; if the category is set to Connection, you can assign this attribute only to lines connecting components or to notes. If the category is set to All, you can assign the attribute to a component or connection. You can also define the attribute's data type as ALPHA or NUMERIC. You can assign alphanumeric data to ALPHA attributes; you can assign only numeric data values for NUMERIC attributes. You can also limit the numeric values you can assign to a range of values.
Steps:
Select /ATTRIBUTE/. The Attribute List panel is displayed.

Menu:

Message:
Sel menu
On the Attribute List panel, select EDIT.

Message:
Select attribute / Key attribute name
Create a new attribute or modify an existing attribute by doing one of the following: To modify an existing attribute, select that attribute on the Attribute List panel. To create a new attribute, do the following: a. Key in the name of the new attribute. You can key in any name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters.
147
Message:
Key number for new attribute (name of new attribute) / YN auto-assign
b.
Press YN to automatically assign a number to the attribute, or key in the number you want to assign. Each attribute must have a unique attribute number. Some sites have internal standards by which they assign numbers to attributes. You can assign any unique number up to 32000.
Message:
Select an item from the pop-in panel / Select attribute list menu item
To define the category of the attribute, do the following: a. Select the Category option on the Edit panel.
Message:
YN next data value / Select another item
b.
Press YN to cycle between Component, Connection, and All.
To create an attribute that can accept either alphanumeric or numeric data values, do one of the following: To create an attribute that allows alphanumeric values, do the following: a. b. Select the Data Type option on the Edit panel. Press YN to toggle to ALPHA.
148
Category: Data Type: Data Length: Justification:
Component ALPHA 72 Left
Default Data: No data supplied yet.
The Edit panel at above shows the options available when the data type is set to ALPHA. c. Define a maximum data length by doing the following: 1) Select the Data Length option.
Message:
Key new data for active item / Select another item
2)
Key in a data length. The data length is the number of characters that can be used to report data for this attribute.
d.
To define a type of justification, do the following: 1) Select the Justification option.

Message:
YN next data value / Select another item
2)
Press YN to cycle through the available types of justification: Left, Center, or Right. The type of justification determines how CADEX justifies data for this attribute when it is listed in a report.
149
To create an attribute that allows only numeric values, do the following: a. b. Select the Data Type option on the Edit panel. Press YN to toggle to NUMERIC.
Category: Data Type: Precision: Lower Limit: Upper Limit: Default Data: 0.00
Component NUMERIC 2 0.00 10000.00
If the data type is set to NUMERIC, you can only assign numeric data to this attribute. The Edit panel at left shows the options available when the data type is set to NUMERIC. c. To define a level of precision, do the following: 1) Select the Precision option.
Message:
2)
Key in a level of precision from 0 to 9. The Precision option determines the degree of refinement you can use to define attribute data. For example, if you define the precision to be 2, you can create values with up to two places of precision, such as 3.14 or 2.54.
d.
To define limits for the numeric data values, do the following:
150
1) 2) 3) 4)
Select the Lower Limit option. Key in a value for the lower limit. Select the Upper Limit option. Key in a value for the upper limit.
If the value you key in for the Lower Limit is greater than the value of the Upper Limit, CADEX transposes the values and changes the Default Data value to a value within the range when you select ACCEPT to exit the panel.
To define default data for the attribute, do the following: a. Select the data listed under the Default Data option. When you select an attribute that you want to assign to a component, this default value is displayed on the input line.
Message:
b.
Key in a value for the default data. For an ALPHA attribute, you can key in an alphanumeric value. For a NUMERIC attribute, you can key in only a numeric value within the range specified in step 5.
To define a help message for the attribute, do the following: a. Select the information listed under the Help Message option.
b.
Key in a help message. Later, when you select an attribute that you want to assign to a component, this help message will be displayed as an information message.
151
To designate an attribute as required, do the following: a. b. Select the Required option. Press YN to toggle the option to Yes. When you run a background process and instruct the CADEX diagnostics process to flag components without a required attribute, CADEX will flag all components that do not have attributes assigned to them with the Required option set to Yes. Running diagnostics in background processes is described in a later chapter. All the possible diagnostic messages generated by background processes are described there.
To protect an attribute from being modified, do the following: a. b. Select the Protected option. Press YN to toggle to the option to Yes. When the Protected option is set to Yes, the default data for the attribute is always assigned to a component or connection element (other than a note), and this attribute cannot be modified. If you set the Protected option to No, you can modify this attribute when it is assigned to a component.
10 To finish defining the attribute, do one of the following: To accept the definition, select ACCEPT. The new attribute is displayed on the Attribute List panel. To cancel any changes to the definition, do the following: a. Select CANCEL. If you have not made any changes to the definition, the panel is no longer displayed. If
152
you have modified the definition, the following message is displayed:

Message:
YN cancel changes
b.
Press YN to cancel your changes to the definition.
To delete the newly created attribute, select DELETE on the Edit panel.
11 Select EDIT to return to the main /ATTRIBUTE/ menu.
153
Deleting an Attribute From the Attribute List Panel

Use this procedure to delete an attribute from the Attribute List panel.
Steps:
Select /ATTRIBUTE/. The Attribute List panel is displayed

Menu:

Message:
Sel menu
On the Attribute List panel, select EDIT.

Message:
Select attribute / Key attribute name
Select the attribute to delete. The Edit panel is displayed.

Message:
Select an item from the pop-in panel
On the Edit panel, select DELETE.
WARNING The attribute will be deleted from the Master Attribute List.
ACCEPT CANCEL
154
A confirmation panel is displayed, shown at above.
Select ACCEPT to confirm the deletion or CANCEL to cancel the deletion.
155
Creating, Modifying, and Displaying a Preset List of Attributes

Use this procedure to create preset lists of attributes, which you can display on the Attribute List panel. You create a preset list by assigning it a name and then selecting attributes from the Attribute List panel to be included on the list. An asterisk (*) denotes which preset group of attributes is currently displayed on the Attribute List panel. After you define a preset list, you can edit its contents or delete the entire list. CADEX provides three system-defined preset lists: Component, Connection, and All. These preset lists cannot be edited or deleted.
Steps:

Menu:

Message:
Sel menu
On the Attribute List panel, select PRESET.

Message:
Select preset to display
To create or modify a preset list of attributes, do one of the following: To create a new preset list, do the following: a. On the Preset panel, select CREATE.
Message:
Key name for new preset
156
b.
Key in the name of the preset list you want to create.

Message:
Select name on attribute list to add, on preset contents list to delete
A panel displays the name you key. The figure below shows an example of a panel for a preset list called Valves.
PRESET Valves
ACCEPT CANCEL
Panel Used to Define a Preset List To modify an existing preset list, do the following: a. On the Preset panel, select EDIT.
Message:
Select preset to edit
b.
Select the name of the preset list you want to modify. A panel displays the preset list you have selected.
Message:
Sel name on attribute list to add, on preset contents list to delete
157
Select the attributes you want included in this preset list from those displayed on the Attribute List panel.
Optional: To delete attributes from those in the preset list, select those attributes from the preset list.
To finish creating the preset list, select ACCEPT. If you want to cancel your changes to the preset list, select CANCEL.
Optional: To delete a preset list of attributes, do the following: a. On the Preset panel, select DELETE.
Message:
Select preset to delete
b.
Select the name of the preset list you want to delete.

Message:
YN delete preset
c.
Press YN.
Message:
Select preset to delete
The preset list you select is deleted.
To display on the Attribute List panel a preset list of attributes, do the following: a. On the Preset panel, select DISPLAY.
Message:
Select preset to display
b.
Select the name of the preset list you want to display.
158
The Attribute List panel displays the attributes that comprise the preset list you have selected.
To remove the Preset panel from the display, select PRESET on the Attribute List panel.
159
Adding Attributes to Components and Elements

Use this procedure to select attributes from the Attribute List panel and assign them to selected components and elements. When you select an attribute, it is displayed on the Add panel. You can edit the data of the attributes displayed on the Add panel, delete attributes from the panel, and finally assign the attributes displayed there to components you select. You can add attributes to notes or to certain types of elements, including component sets. If you add attributes to components and elements, you must define data values for those attributes. If you add attributes to notes, you cannot define data for those attributes. You can assign only one instance of an attribute to a component or element. For example, you cannot assign different color attributes to the same component.
Steps:

Menu:

Message:
Sel menu
Select /ADD/.
Message:
Select attribute / Select element / YN use preset
To display attributes to be added to components, do one of the following: To display a preset list of attributes, do the following: a. Press YN. A list of the available preset attributes is displayed.
160
Message:
Select preset to transfer
b.
Select the preset list you want to display on the Add panel. You cannot select a preset list of attributes that contains attributes defined as both Component and Connection attributes. If you select such a preset, a message reads: That preset contains conflicting attribute types.
To select individual attributes that you want to assign to components and elements or to notes, do one of the following: To assign attributes to notes, do the following: a. b. On the Add panel, select NOTE. Select the attributes you want to add from the Attribute List panel. CADEX displays these attributes on the Add panel. Since you are assigning these attributes to a note, you cannot define data for these attributes. To assign attributes to components or to any type of element other than a note, do the following: a. b. On the Add panel, select ELEMENT if it is not already active (highlighted). Select an attribute on the Attribute List panel. CADEX displays the attribute on the Add panel and the default value for the selected attribute on the input line. CADEX also displays the attribute's help message as an information message. Once any attribute has been displayed on the Add panel, the ELEMENT and NOTE buttons are no longer displayed. If NOTE is active when you display the first attribute on the panel, you can assign the attributes on the Add panel only to notes. If ELEMENT is active when you display the first attribute on the panel, you can assign the attributes on
the Add panel only to components or lines and not to notes.

Message:
Enter replacement data for (selected attribute) / YN display existing data
c.
Define a data value for the selected attribute by doing one of the following: Key in a new data value. The new data value is displayed on the Add panel. If you are keying in numeric information and the value you key in does not fall within the allowable range, the following message is displayed:
Info:
Data value must fall in the range (value) to (value)
Press ENTER to accept the default value. The default value is displayed as data on the Add panel. To select a data value from a list of existing data values, do the following: 1) Press YN. A panel displays the data values already defined for this attribute and assigned to components in the active drawing. 2) Select from this panel the data value you want for this attribute. If you do not want to select any data values from this panel, select CANCEL and begin step c again. d. To specify additional attributes, repeat steps b and c.
162
Message:
Select attribute / Select element
Optional: To edit the data values on the Add panel, do the following: a.
Message:
On the Add panel, select EDIT.
Select an attribute on the ADD panel to edit
b.
Select an attribute on the Add panel. CADEX displays the current data value for the selected attribute on the input line.
Message:
c.
Redefine the data for the selected attribute by doing one of the following: Key in a new data value. The new data value is displayed on the Add panel. Press ENTER to accept the default value. The default value is displayed as data on the Add panel. To select a data value from a list of existing data values, do the following: 1) Press YN. A panel displays the data values already defined for this attribute and assigned to components in the active drawing. 2) Select from this panel the data value you want for this attribute. If you do not want to select any data from this panel, select CANCEL and begin step c again.
163
d.
To terminate the editing process, select EDIT.

Message:
Optional: To delete an attribute from those listed on the Add panel, do the following: a. On the Add panel, select DELETE.
Message:
Select an attribute on the ADD panel to delete
b.
Select an attribute on the Add panel. CADEX deletes the attribute from the Add panel.
c.
To terminate the deletion process, select DELETE.

Message:
Select the components or elements to which you want to add the attributes displayed on the Add panel. The components and elements you select are highlighted. If ELEMENT was active when you displayed the first attribute on the Add panel (in step 3 on page 856), you can select components and multilines in this step. If NOTE was active, you can select notes. When you select a component or element, CADEX examines it to see if any of the attributes you are adding are already assigned to it. If so, a message reads: Warning: existing attribute data will be overwritten.
Message:
Select attribute / Select element / YN assign
Press YN.
164
CADEX assigns the specified attributes to the highlighted components and elements.
165
Assigning an Inheritance Attribute

Assigning an Inheritance Attribute
Use this procedure to assign an inheritance attribute to a component. When you do this, the component inherits the data value for this attribute from the next highest component in the nested component set that has a data value defined for this attribute. When you query this component, the inherited data is displayed, preceded by an asterisk (*) to show that it is inherited. If no component at a higher level in the nested component set has data defined for this attribute, CADEX displays only an asterisk in the data field.
Steps:
Select /ATTRIBUTE/.
Select /ADD/.
Select an attribute on the Attribute List panel.
Key in an asterisk (*) for the data value.
Select the components or elements to which you want to add the inheritance attributes.
Optional: To assign attributes to another component in a nested component set, do the following: a. b. Select /TRAVERSE/. Select the options necessary to traverse through the nested component. Select /RETURN/.
c.
166
Press YN. CADEX assigns the inheritance attribute to the highlighted components and elements.
167
Deleting Attributes From a Single Component

Use this procedure to delete attributes from a single component or element.
Steps:

Menu:

Message:
Sel menu
Select /DELETE/.
Message:
Select a component or element. The attributes assigned to the component or element are displayed on the Delete panel.
Menu:
/ ADD / DELETE / QUERY // RDB LOGIN // TRAVERSE / / RETURN /

Message:
Select attribute / Select element / YN delete from active element
Optional: To delete attributes from another level of a nested component set, do the following: a. b. Select /TRAVERSE/. Select the options necessary to traverse through the nested component.
168
c.
Select /RETURN/. The attributes for the component set you selected in step 3 are still displayed in the Delete panel.
Optional: To edit attribute data listed on the Delete panel, do the following: a. On the Delete panel, select EDIT.
Message:
Select an attribute on the DELETE panel to edit
b.
Select the attribute on the Delete panel you want to edit.

Message:
c.
Define new data value for this attribute by doing one of the following: Key in a data value. Select from data values that already exist in the drawing by doing the following: 1) Press YN. A panel displays the data values already defined for this attribute and assigned to components in the active drawing.
Message:
Select target data string
2)
Select from this panel the data value which you want to delete. If you do not want to select any data from this panel, select CANCEL and begin step c over.
To define no data for the attribute, key in the wildcard character (as defined in the Profile).
169
If you key in a wildcard, CADEX will delete this attribute from the component, no matter what its data value is.
Message:
d.
Select EDIT to stop editing attributes on the Delete panel.

Message:
Select attribute / Select element / YN delete from active elements
Optional: To remove an attribute from the Delete panel, do the following: a. On the Delete panel, select DELETE.
Message:
Select an attribute on the DELETE panel to delete
b.
Select the attribute on the Delete panel you want to remove. Select again to stop removing attributes from the Delete panel.
Message:
c.
Press YN. The attributes on the Delete panel are deleted from the active component.
170
Deleting Specified Attributes From Multiple Components

Use this procedure to delete specified attributes from selected components or from all the components and elements in the active model. To accomplish this, you must display the attributes (and their data values) you want to delete on the Delete panel and then specify the components from which you want these attributes deleted.
Steps:

Menu:

Message:
Sel menu
Select /DELETE/.
Message:
To display the attributes and their data that you want to delete, do one of the following: To display a preset list of attributes on the Delete panel, do the following: a. Press YN. A list of the available preset attributes is displayed.
Message:
Select preset to transfer
b.
Select the preset list you want to display on the Delete panel.
171
Message:
Select attribute / Select element / YN delete from all elements
To select individual attributes to be displayed on the Delete panel, do the following: a. Select an attribute from the Attribute List panel. The attribute name is displayed on the Delete panel.
Message:
b.
Define the data value for the attribute you want to delete by doing one of the following: Key in a data value. Select from data values that already exist in the drawing by doing the following: 1) Press YN. A panel displays the data values already defined for this attribute and assigned to components in the active drawing.
Message:
2)
Select from this panel the data value you want to delete. If you do not want to select a data value from this panel, select CANCEL and begin step b again.
To define no data value for the attribute, select another attribute from the Attribute List panel or key in the wildcard character (as defined in the Profile). If you define no data, CADEX will delete this attribute from all components, no matter what its data value is.
172
Message:
Optional: To edit attribute data listed on the Delete panel, do the following: a. On the Delete panel, select EDIT.
Message:
b.
Select the attribute on the Delete panel you want to edit.

Message:
c.
Define new data value for this attribute by doing one of the following: Key in a data value. Select from data values that already exist in the drawing by doing the following: 1) Press YN. A panel displays the data values already defined for this attribute and assigned to components in the active drawing.
Message:
2)
Select from this panel the data value you want to delete. If you do not want to select any data from this panel, select CANCEL and begin step c again.
To define no data for the attribute, key in the wildcard character (as defined in the Profile).
173
If you key in a wildcard, CADEX will delete this attribute from all components, no matter what its data value is.
Message:
d.
Select EDIT to stop editing attributes on the Delete panel.

Message:
Optional: To remove an attribute from the Delete panel, do the following: a. On the Delete panel, select DELETE.
Message:
Select an attribute on the DELETE panel to delete
c.
Select the attribute on the Delete panel you want to remove. Select DELETE again to stop removing attributes from the Delete panel.
Message:
d.
Delete attributes by doing one of the following: To delete all instances of attributes with the data values displayed on the Delete panel, do the following:
174
WARNING! The active attributes will be deleted from all elements
ACCEPT CANCEL
a.
Press YN. A confirmation panel is displayed, shown at left.

c.
Select ACCEPT to confirm the deletion.
If you do not want to confirm the deletion, select CANCEL and begin step 6 again. The attributes on the Delete panel are deleted from every component and element in the active model. To delete from specified components and elements instances of attributes with the data values displayed on the Delete panel, do the following: a. Select one or more components and elements.
Menu:
/ ADD / DELETE / QUERY // RDB LOGIN / / TRAVERSE // RETURN /
Message:
b.
Optional: To delete attributes from another level of a nested component set (if it is the component set most recently selected), do the following: 1) 2) 3) Select /TRAVERSE/. Select the options necessary to traverse through the nested component. Select /RETURN/.
175
The active level of the component set is highlighted. c. Press YN.
Attributes with the data values displayed on the Delete panel are deleted from every highlighted component and element in the model.
176
Querying Attributes to See Where They Are Assigned

Use this procedure to find components or elements that have a specified combination of attributes and data values assigned to them. When you are querying to find alphanumeric attributes, the data you define can be an alphanumeric string (which can include a wildcard character). When you query for numeric attributes, the data you define must be a numeric value or a range of numeric values. When your query is successful, you can noshow everything except the components and elements that have the attributes you have specified. You can also flag those components and elements with circles or display a panel listing the part number and reference designator of these components (or the location of connections).
Steps:

Menu:

Message:
Sel menu
Select /QUERY/.
Message:
Select either a numeric or an alphanumeric attribute from the Attribute List panel. The Query panel is displayed. The attribute you select is displayed on the Query panel and is highlighted.
177
If you select: A numeric attribute An alphanumeric attribute
The message reads: Key data or lower,upper limits / YN display existing data / Sel attribute Key target data string / YN display existing data / Sel attribute
Define a data value for the highlighted attribute by doing one of the following: Define data for an alphanumeric attribute by doing one of the following: Key in a data value. You can use wildcard queries by keying in the wildcard character (as defined in the Profile) either at the beginning or end of a text string or at the beginning and end of a text string. The following examples show how to use wildcards: Key in: target* Result: Matches data strings starting with target, such as targetA or targetBBB. Matches data strings ending with target, such as Atarget or BBBtarget. Matches data strings with target embedded in the string, such as Atargetxxx or BBBtargetyyy.
*target
*target*
Select from data values that already exist in the drawing by doing the following: a. Press YN. A panel displays the data values already defined for this attribute and assigned to components in the active drawing.
Message:
b.
Select from this panel the data value for which you want to search.
178
If you do not want to select any data from this panel, select CANCEL and begin step 4 over. To define no data for the selected attribute, select another attribute from the Attribute List panel or skip to step 8. The wildcard character (as defined in the Profile) is displayed as the data value for this attribute. Define numeric data values by doing one of the following: Key in a numeric data value. If you key in an alphabetic character, CADEX converts that character to 0. Key in an upper and lower limit for a numeric data value, separated by a comma. For example, if you key in a range of 0,10, the lower limit is 0 and the upper limit is 10. Key in only an upper or lower limit for a numeric data value by either preceding or following a number with a comma. For example, if you key in 0, the lower limit is 0 and there is no upper limit; or if you key in ,100, there is no lower limit and the upper limit is 100. Select upper and lower limits from data values that already exist in the drawing by doing the following: a. Press YN. A panel displays the data values already defined for this attribute and assigned to components in the active drawing.
Message:
Select lower limit
b.
Select from this panel the data value that you want to define as the lower limit.
179
If you do not want to select a lower limit from this panel, select CANCEL and begin step 4 over.
Message:
Select upper limit
c.
Select from the panel the data value that you want to define as the upper limit. If you do not want to select an upper limit from this panel, select CANCEL and begin step 4 over. To define no data for the selected attribute, select another attribute from the Attribute List panel or skip to step 8. The wildcard character (as defined in the Profile) is displayed as the data for this attribute.
Optional: To add more attributes to the Query panel, go back and repeat steps 3 and 4.
Optional: To edit existing data values for attributes already displayed on the Query panel, select the attribute names and redefine their data values. Defining data values is described in step 4.
Optional: To clear the attributes from the Query panel, select CLEAR. CADEX displays no attributes on the Query panel.
To perform a query for the attributes you have specified, select PERFORM QUERY. CADEX highlights the components and elements in the drawing that have the specified combination of attributes and data values assigned to them. An information message tells you how many matches CADEX finds.
180
Menu:
/ SHOW / CIRCLE / LIST // RETURN /

Message:
Select element
Optional: To noshow all the geometry in the model except the components and elements highlighted by the query, select /SHOW/. Selecting /SHOW/ again redisplays all geometry.
10 Optional: To display circles around all the components and elements highlighted by the query, select /CIRCLE/. Selecting /CIRCLE/ again removes the circles. Selecting one of the circles centers the display around that component or element.
11 Optional: To display a list of the part numbers and reference designators for all the components highlighted by the query, select /LIST/. CADEX displays the List panel, which lists the part number and reference designator of every component that matches the query. Selecting /LIST/ again removes the Query panel. Selecting one of the entries for a component in the panel centers the display around that component.
12 To terminate the querying process, select /RETURN/.
181
Querying Components or Elements to See What Attributes Are Assigned to Them

Use this procedure to query a component or element in order to display a panel listing the attributes and data assigned to it. If you are querying elements, you can select only lines or notes.
Steps:

Menu:

Message:
Sel menu
Select /QUERY/.
Message:
Select a component or element to query. The Query panel is displayed.

Menu:
/ ADD / DELETE / VISIBLE / QUERY // RDB LOGIN / / TRAVERSE // RETURN /
Optional: To query another level of a nested component set, do the following: a. b. Select /TRAVERSE/. Select the options necessary to traverse through the nested component. Select /RETURN/.
c.
182
The attributes for the active level of the component set are displayed in the Query panel.
183
Editing Attribute Data Values Attached to a Component or Element

Use this procedure to edit attribute information that has been assigned to a component or element. Before You Begin: Query a component or element. This procedure has been described previously in this chapter.
Steps:
On the Query panel, select EDIT.

Message:
Select attribute to edit / Select element
On the Query panel, select an attribute whose data value you want to edit.
Message:
Enter replacement data for (attribute name) / YN display existing data
Define a new data value for the attribute by doing one of the following: Key in a new data value. Select from data values that already exist in the drawing by doing the following: a. Press YN. A panel displays the data values already defined for this attribute and assigned to components in the active drawing.
Message:
b.
Select from this panel the data value for which you want to query.
184
If you do not want to select data from this panel, select CANCEL and begin step 3 over.
Converting Attribute Data Values Into Notes

Use this procedure to convert attribute data attached to a component or element into a note that you place on a drawing. This procedure also allows you to convert one of these notes back into "hidden" attribute data. Before You Begin: Query a component or element. This procedure has been previously described in this chapter.
Steps:
On the Query panel, select VISABLE.

Message:
Select attr to toggle / Select element
On the Query panel, select the attribute whose data you want to convert into a note.
Message:
Indicate location for new note
Indicate a location for the attribute data to be displayed as a note. The attribute data is displayed as a note.
Optional: Hide the attribute data that is displayed as a note by doing the following: a. On the Query panel, select the attribute whose data is displayed as a note.
Message:
YN make data invisible
b.
Press YN.
185
The attribute data is no longer displayed as a note and becomes "hidden" attribute data once again.
186
Logging in to an external data base

Use this procedure to access an external data base. After you perform this procedure, menu option /RDB LOGIN/ is no longer displayed, and you can access the external data base any time during the current session.
Steps:
Select /ATTRIBUTE/.
The Attribute List panel is displayed.

Menu:

Message:
Sel menu
Select /RDB LOGIN/.

Message:
Enter RDB user ID / Password
Key in your user ID for the external data base.

Message:
Enter RDB user password
Key in your external data base password. To protect your password, the text you key in is not displayed.
Info:
RDB login was successful
187
Defining the Names Used to Query an external data base

Use this procedure to define the names by which you query information stored in an external data base. You must identify the table in the external data base you want to query. You must also identify an attribute used in the model (typically the part number), which is called the Model Key Attribute. In addition, you must specify a corresponding column name in the external data base, which is called the RDB Key Column. Internally, CADEX first tries to find components with attributes that match the Model Key Attribute you define, then uses the values for each of its successful searches and looks in the table you specified for entries with that same value under the RDB Key Column name you defined.
Steps:

Menu:
/ ADD / DELETE / QUERY // RETURN /

Message:
Sel menu
Select /QUERY/.
If the following was selected most recently in this session: /MODEL/
The menu reads:
The message reads:
/RDB/
/ ADD / DELETE / QUERY / / MODEL / RDB / / RETURN / / ADD / DELETE / QUERY / / SQL / TABLES // MODEL / RDB // RETURN /
Select RDB column / Select element
188
Select /RDB/ if it is not already active (underlined).

RDB Columns Furniture
color date manufacturer medium rating size
The RDB Columns panel is displayed, as shown.
Select /TABLES/. CADEX displays the RDB Tables panel, which lists all the tables contained in the external data base. The figure below shows a typical RDB Tables panel.
RDB Tables Table Name Personnel Salaries Benefits Distribution Wholesalers Furniture Fixed assets Model Key Attr RDB Key Column
UPDATE
RDB Tables Panel
189
Message:
Select table
Select the name of the external data base table you want to query. The table name is highlighted, and its current values for the Model Key Attribute and RDB Key Column values are displayed.
WARNING!
Existing table mappings will be reset. Do you want to update the list anyway?
ACCEPT CANCEL
Optional: To update the attributes on the RDB Tables panel, do the following a. Select the UPDATE button. A confirmation panel is displayed, shown above. b. Select ACCEPT to update the RDB Tables panel or select CANCEL to cancel the update.
To change the Model Key Attribute for the selected table, do the following: a. Select the current Model Key Attribute displayed on the RDB Tables panel. CADEX displays a panel listing all available values for the Model Key Attribute. All the attributes that have been created on the Attribute List panel are listed as available Model Key Attributes. b. Select a new attribute or select CANCEL to not change the Model Key Attribute value.
190
Either action removes from the display the panel listing the available values.
To change the RDB Key Column value, do the following: a. Select the current RDB Key Column value displayed on the RDB Tables panel. CADEX displays a panel, listing the names of all the columns stored in the external data base. b. Select a new name or select CANCEL to not define a new RDB Key Column. Either action removes from the display the panel listing the available column names.
To complete your modifications to the RDB Tables panel, select ACCEPT.
WARNING! Table Mappings have been modified. Do you want to save the changes? ACCEPT CANCEL
A confirmation panel is displayed, shown above.
10 Respond to the confirmation panel by doing one of the following: Select ACCEPT to file your settings on the RDB Tables panel so that CADEX will use them in future sessions. Select CANCEL so that your settings are not filed and are used only in the current session.
191
Querying a Component With Attributes Stored in an external data base

Use this procedure to query a component or connection to see what attributes are assigned to it. This procedure displays attributes stored in both the CADAM model and in an external data base. Before You Begin: Log in to the external data base. This procedure has been previously described in this chapter. Use the RDB Tables panel to define the names by which you want to query the external data base.
Steps:
Select /ATTRIBUTE/
/QUERY/.
The menu reads:
The message reads:
/RDB/
Select a component or element. Two Query panels are displayed. The upper Query panel shows the attributes and data values stored in the model and assigned to the active component. If there are no attributes in the model, a message reads: No model data available. The lower Query panel shows attribute information for the same component stored in an external data base. If no data is matched to the Model Key Attribute, or if CADEX cannot access the external
192
data base, a message reads: No RDB data available.
Optional: To query another level of a nested component set, do the following: a. b. Select /TRAVERSE/. Select the options necessary to traverse through the nested component. Select /RETURN/. The attributes for the active level of the component set are displayed in the Query panel.
c.
193
Querying by Attributes Stored in an external data base

Use this procedure to find components that have a specified combination of attributes and data values assigned to them, including attributes stored in an external data base. If your query is successful, this procedure allows you to noshow everything except the components with the attributes you have specified. You can also flag those components with circles or display a panel that lists the component's part number and reference designator (or lists the location of connections). Before You Begin:
Log in to the external data base. This procedure was previously described in this chapter.
Use the RDB Tables panel to define the names by which you want to query the external data base. Steps:
Select /ATTRIBUTE/
/QUERY/.
The menu reads: The message reads:
/RDB/
Select /RDB/ if it is not already active (underlined). The RDB Columns panel is displayed.
Message:
194
Select a value from the RDB Columns panel by which you want to query the external data base.
If you selected: A numeric attribute An alphanumeric attribute
The message reads: Key data or lower,upper limits / YN display existing data / Sel RDB column Key target data string / YN display existing data / Sel RDB column
Define a data value for the highlighted attribute by doing one of the following: Define data for an alphanumeric attribute by doing one of the following: Key in a data value. You can use wildcard queries by keying in the wildcard character (as defined in the Profile) either at the beginning or end of a text string or at the beginning and end of a text string. The following examples show how to use wildcards: Key in: target* Result: Matches data strings starting with target, such as targetA or targetBBB. Matches data strings ending with target, such as Atarget or BBBtarget. Matches data strings with target embedded in the string, such as Atargetx or BBBtargetyyy.
*target
*target*
To define no data for the selected attribute, select another attribute from the Attribute List panel or skip to step 7. The wildcard character (as defined in the Profile) is displayed as the data value for this attribute. Select from data values that already exist in the data base by doing the following:
195
a.
Press YN. A panel displays the data values already defined for this attribute and listed under a column of the same name in the data base.
Message:
b.
Select from this panel the value for which you want to search. If you do not want to select data from this panel, select CANCEL and begin step 4 over.
Define numeric data values by doing one of the following: Key in a numeric data value. If you key in an alphabetic character, CADEX converts that character to 0. Key in an upper and lower limit for a numeric data value, separated by a comma. For example, if you key in a range of 0,10, the lower limit is 0 and the upper limit is 10. Key in only an upper or lower limit for a numeric data value by either preceding or following a number with a comma. For example, if you key in 0, the lower limit is 0 and there is no upper limit; or if you key in ,100, there is no lower limit and the upper limit is 100. To define no data for the selected attribute, select another attribute from the Attribute List panel or skip to step 7. The wildcard character is displayed as the data for this attribute. Select upper and lower limits from data values that already exist in the drawing by doing the following: a. Press YN.
196
A panel displays the data values already defined for this attribute and listed under a column of the same name in the data base.
Message:
Select lower limit
b.
Select from this panel the data value that you want to define as the lower limit. If you do not want to select a lower limit from this panel, select CANCEL and begin step 4 over.
Message:
Select upper limit
c.
Select from the panel the data value that you want to define as the upper limit. If you do not want to select an upper limit from this panel, select CANCEL and begin step 4 over.
To add more attributes to the Query panel, go back and repeat steps 3 and 4.
Optional: To clear the attributes from the Query panel, select CLEAR. CADEX displays no attributes on the Query panel.
To perform a query for the attributes you have specified, select PERFORM QUERY. CADEX highlights the components and elements that have the specified combination of attributes and data values assigned to them. An information message tells you how many matches CADEX finds.
Menu:

Message:
Select element
197
Optional: To noshow all the geometry in the model except the components and elements highlighted by the query, select /SHOW/. Selecting /SHOW/ again redisplays all geometry.
Optional: To display circles around all the components and elements highlighted by the query, select /CIRCLE/. Selecting /CIRCLE/ again removes the circles. Selecting one of the circles centers the display around that component or element.
10 Optional: To display a list of the part numbers and reference designators for all the components highlighted by the query, select /LIST/. The List panel is displayed. This panel lists the part number and reference designator of every component that matches the query, as well as every connection that matches the query and its location. Selecting /LIST/ again removes the Query panel. Selecting one of the entries for a component in the panel centers the display around that component.
198
Creating, Modifying, and Submitting SQL Queries to an external data base

Use this procedure to create SQL commands that query an external data base. You can save these commands, modify them if necessary, and submit them. CADEX supports only SQL commands that query an external data base. SQL commands that alter the data base are not executed. None of the SQL commands you perform with this procedure is checked for syntax. If your SQL command is a query and that query is successful, this procedure allows you to noshow everything except the components with the attributes you have specified. You can also flag those components with circles or display a panel that lists the part number and reference designator of the components. Before You Begin: Log in to the external data base. This procedure was previously described in this chapter. Use the RDB Tables panel to define the names by which you want to query the external data base.
Steps:
Select /ATTRIBUTE/
/QUERY/.
The menu reads: The message reads:
/RDB/
Select attribute / Select element Select RDB column / Select element
199
Select /RDB/ if it is not already active (underlined). The RDB Columns panel is displayed.
Message:
Select /SQL/. The SQL panel is displayed.

Message:
Key SQL command / Select SQL command
To create or modify an SQL command, do one of the following: To create a new SQL command, do the following: a. Key in an SQL command. CADEX displays the panel on which you can define your SQL command.
Message:
Select text from panel
b.
On the panel, select the line of text that you want to define. If you want to add text to a blank line, select the > sign. The line of text you select is highlighted and displayed on the input line.
Message:
Key replacement text
To modify an existing SQL command, select it on the SQL panel. CADEX displays a panel on which you can define your SQL command. The first line of text in this panel is highlighted and displayed on the input line.
Message:
Key replacement text
200
Key in text to replace the existing text.
Select more lines of text and key in modifications until the SQL command reads the way you want it.
Optional: To cancel the SQL command you are defining, select CANCEL. The panel for defining an SQL command is no longer displayed.
To save the command you have created, do the following: a. On the panel for defining the SQL command, select SAVE.
Message:
Key name for SQL command / YN same name
b.
Key in a new name for the SQL command or press YN to accept the existing name. The name is displayed on the SQL panel.
Optional: To delete a command from the SQL panel, do the following: a. On the SQL panel, select DELETE.
Message:
Select SQL command to delete
b.
Select the name of the command you want to delete.

Message:
YN delete SQL command
10 To submit the SQL command displayed on the panel, select SEND.
201
If the SQL command is a query, CADEX highlights any components or elements that satisfy the query. An information message tells you how many matches CADEX has found for your query.
Menu:

Message:
Select command / Select button / Key SQL command
11 Optional: To noshow all the geometry in the model except the components and elements highlighted by the query, select /SHOW/. Selecting /SHOW/ again redisplays all geometry.
12 Optional: To display circles around all the components and elements highlighted by the query, select /CIRCLE/. Selecting /CIRCLE/ again removes the circles. Selecting one of the circles centers the display around that component or element.
13 Optional: To display a list of the part numbers and reference designators for all the components highlighted by the query, select /LIST/. The Query panel is displayed. This panel lists the part number and reference designator of every component that matches the query. Selecting /LIST/ again removes the Query panel. Selecting one of the entries for a component in the panel centers the display around that component.
14 Select /SQL/ or any other menu option to terminate the modification of the SQL panel.
202
Chapter 7. Creating and Modifying Component Libraries

What You Should Know About Creating and Modifying Component Libraries
A CADEX library is a collection of models containing component information and geometry that you can easily access and copy. You can display a list of the components contained in a library and to copy them into other drawings without having to leave the current drawing. When you copy a component from a library, CADEX retrieves all of the geometry and information for the component set and places it into the active model, either in the primary view or on a detail page. The following types of libraries are available in CADEX: User Library A collection of components in CADAM models that you maintain using the interactive tools of CADEX. The contents of user libraries are defined in terms of component sets. For example, a user library model may be a drawing that you use specifically to store component sets that you have created; or, it may simply be an old drawing that contains parts you need for your current design. When you specify a part number to be retrieved, CADEX searches through all the component sets in the user library models. If it finds a component with a matching part number, CADEX copies everything in that component set into the active drawing. System Library A collection of components common to all the designers in an organization. Typically, a system administrator maintains a system library. The contents of system libraries are defined in terms of their detail pages. You can also retrieve components without part numbers by specifying their reference designators. For every component in a system library, a New Part Information (NPI) page must exist defining that component. The NPI page associates a component's part number with a detail page of a model. That detail page can include geometry and other information organized into any number of component sets.
203
When you specify a part number to be retrieved, CADEX first searches all user library models. If it does not find the part number there, it searches the part numbers contained in the system library's collection of NPI pages. When it finds the correct part number, it follows the pointer on the NPI page to the detail page of the model where that part resides. CADEX then copies everything on that detail page into the active drawing.

Creating a user library consists of two processes: creating the components that you want to include in the library and specifying to CADEX the names of the models that contain these components. The contents of the models you specify become the contents of the user library. Creating a component in a user library is no different than creating a component in a design. This procedure is described in Chapter 5. To specify which models comprise your user library, you can use PROFILE. With this option, you enter the drawing IDs of up to five user library models into a user profile. The profile essentially points to these models so that CADEX can access them as you work. When you use PROFILE to specify the names of the models that comprise your user library, CADEX stores the names in a model called drawing id,cadx, where drawing id is the base name of the active model or the overlay parent of the active model, and cadx is the find name. This model is called the cadx model (cadx). If a cadx model does not exist for a base name, CADEX automatically creates one. Using PROFILE, you can establish a separate user library for every design that has a unique base name. Your system administrator can set up default user libraries, which are automatically available for all drawing IDs. After you create a user library, you can use menu options /COMPONENTS/ /MOVE/ or /COMPONENTS/ /LISTS/ to retrieve components from the specified user library models and place them in drawings.
Creating Components for a System Library

You can create components that your system administrator can add to a system library. To do this, you define the component and complete an NPI page for it. The NPI page points to the model that contains the component geometry and other set information. It also contains textual information that describes the part, such as its part number and part description. Creating a component for a system library consists of the following basic process:
204
1. 2.
Creating geometry and defining it as a component. Completing an NPI page for the new component by doing one of the following: Copying an existing NPI page and editing it. Creating an entirely new NPI page.
3.
Moving the component information into a system library.
The following sections describe each of these steps. Creating a Component To create a component that will be stored in a system library, you can either copy a component from a library onto a detail page of the active model and modify it, or you can create a component from scratch. For additional information on creating components, see Chapter 5. Copying an Existing NPI Page for a Component Menu options /COMPONENTS/ /LISTS/ allow you to copy part information from libraries into the active model. To copy part information, you must make a part on the part list active by selecting it or keying in its number. When you make a part active, the Retrieval Options panel is displayed. The Retrieval Options panel allows you to copy into the active model any of the categories of part information listed on this panel. The default retrieval options are SCHEMATIC and NPI PAGE. The NPI PAGE retrieval option copies a part's NPI page from a library to a detail page of the active model. The SCHEMATIC retrieval option copies a component to a detail page.
205
The figure below shows a typical NPI page.

PART NUMBER = 54ls01,7401,5401 DESCRIPTION = QUAD 2-INPUT POS-1 NAND GATE W/OPEN COL APPLICATION NUMBER = 1
GROUP = ELEC
MENU NAME SCHEMATIC DRAWING ID IPC SCH
USER = DESIGN
DET GROUP USER 000 1
NPI Page The names you place in the MENU NAME column of the NPI page become your retrieval options. If you choose to create different categories of geometry for the same component, you would use the MENU NAME column to assign other names to these different categories. After the component is added to a system library, these names appear as additional options in the Retrieval Options panel for this component. Modifying an Existing NPI Page or Creating a New NPI Page Menu options /UTILS/ /NEW PART/ allow you to define a new part by editing part information on an existing NPI page or creating an entirely new NPI page. When you select menu option /NEW PART/ to perform this procedure, CADEX searches for NPI pages on the detail pages of the active model and displays a list of them. You can select the part you want to modify from this list. When you select a part, CADEX displays the part's NPI page, which identifies the location of the geometry for the part and provides additional textual information about it. You can edit this textual information, changing, for example, the part number. You can also alter existing geometry or create new geometry for the part, then use the NPI page to identify the location of that geometry to CADEX. Menu option /NEW PART/ also provides a facility for creating an entirely new NPI page. In this case, the NPI panel presents dummy information, which you can edit to define a new part. The information you can edit includes the location of the geometry for that part and other textual information, such as the part name and the part's description. Once you alter an NPI panel, you can use the Verify NPI Page utility to check the completeness and validity of the new information. Menu option /NEW PART/ also allows you to delete the NPI pages that exist in the active model. In addition, when you complete a procedure using /NEW PART/, you can choose to save all the part information you have modified or
206
abort the procedure, in which case your changes are not filed, although they remain in the active model. Moving Component Information Into the System Library After you have created the geometry of a component and you have filled out an NPI page for it, your system administrator can add the new component information to a system library by running an installation process. A file called cdx_libtable contains a list of the system libraries, including their UNIX paths, that you can access while using CADEX. These libraries have been built from collections of NPI pages. You can edit the library names in cdx_libtable, although typically a software installer or your system administrator does this. The CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Customization Guide describes this procedure. The cdx_libtable file resides in:
$CCD_ROOT/CADEX/TABLES
207

Use this procedure to create a user library. Most of this procedure involves creating components. After you create the models that contain components for a user library, you must use PROFILE to enter their names into the user profile. You can specify up to five user library models in the profile. More user library models, however, mean more searching time for the system when you retrieve a part. Generally, you should include only the models you need in a user library.
Steps:
Start or call a CADAM model.
Create as many components as you want in this model. You can create components on detail pages or anywhere on the primary view (PV). For a complete description of how to create a component, see Chapter 5.
Optional: Create up to four more CADAM models containing components that you want to be included in the user library. A maximum of five CADAM models can be included in a user library.
Select PROFILE.
Message:
Select option
In the User Libraries section, select the text of any group, user, or drawing ID already listed on the User Libraries panel. If no models are listed, select the dash that represents text.
208
Message:
Select option / Key new value / YN default, toggle or next
Key in the group, user, or drawing ID of a model containing components that you want CADEX to access. The group, user, and drawing ID you key in replace the currently selected text. You can key in the name of only one group or user or drawing ID at a time.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to identify all the models containing components for the user library. You can name up to five models on this panel.
Message:
YN cancel
b.
Press YN.
Message:
b.
Press YN.
10 To save your changes to the Profile panel, select ACCEPT or PROFILE. Your new settings are saved, and the Profile panel is no longer displayed.
209
Copying an NPI Page From a Library and Placing It on a Detail Page of a Drawing
Use this procedure to copy an NPI page from a system library and place it on a detail page of the active model.
Steps:
Select /COMPONENTS/.
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE // STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW // ATTACH / MODIFY // RET /
Message:
Sel component / Key part number / Ind point / YN rectangle
Select /LISTS/. Two panels are displayed. One shows a list of all available libraries, while another displays a list of all the parts in the active library. These panels are illustrated in the figure below.
210
USER LIBRARIES DIGITAL ANALOG
24ls63 24ls69 24ls91 24ls99 25ls09 25ls138 25ls139 28ls23 28ls78 37ld34 37ld78 37ld98 54s138 54ls138 56ll73 74s138 74ls138 78ll24
PROFILE
SUBLIST BACKGROUND
Available Libraries and the Parts Contained in the Currently Active Library
Message:
Sel comp / Sel from list / Key part number / Ind pt / YN rectangle The contents of the selected library are displayed.
Optional: To display the contents of a different library, select its name.
Select /PREVIEW/.
Select or key in the number of the part you want to retrieve. The number you specify is highlighted. This is the active component. Preview panels for that component are displayed, as shown in the figure below.
211
Retrieval Options SCHEMATIC NPI PAGE
Equivalent Parts nand/2 54h00 54ls00 54l00 54s00 24ls63 24ls69 24ls91 24ls99 25ls09 25ls138 25ls139 28ls23 28ls78 37ld34 37ld78 37ld98 54ls00 54s138 54ls138 56ll73 7400 74s138
Description Quad 2-input nand gate
WINDOW
PROFILE
SUBLIST BACKGROUND
Preview Panels Displayed for the Active Part
Message:
Ind pos / Sel pt / Sel comp / Key X, Y / Key part no / YN create detl
On the Retrieval Options panel, select NPI Page.
Press YN. An information message reports that a detail has been created. If CADEX cannot access the information that is supposed to be copied to a detail page, an error message reads: Part data not found.
212
Creating Components for System Libraries by Creating or Modifying New Part Information for the Component
Use this procedure to create an entirely new NPI page for a part or to modify an existing NPI page that you have already copied into the current set of drawings. To modify an existing NPI page, make that part active in the list of available NPI pages. The NPI panel for that part is displayed. You can then move through the fields of this panel, replacing any text that needs to be changed or adding and deleting entire lines. If you choose to create a new NPI page, CADEX displays a fresh NPI panel filled out with dummy data. You can enter new information directly into this panel by editing the dummy data.
Before You Begin: If you want to modify existing part information, the NPI page for that part should already exist on the detail pages of the current model.
Steps:
Select /UTILS/.
Message:
Sel menu
Menu:
/ NEW PART / TEXT FLIP / PART REPL TABLE / ZONE / LADDER / BRANCH / BUS // RETURN /
Select /NEW PART/. A panel displays a list of the parts whose NPI pages have been copied into the current model. Figure 204 on page 927The figure below shows an example of this list. An information message reports the total number of NPI pages contained on detail pages of the active model.
213
If no NPI pages exist on detail pages of the current model, the panel in the figure is still displayed, but it is blank.
Part numbers of the NPI pages that exist on detail pages of the current model
Part Number CONNA TESTPT 2n2222a 54ls01 54t172a 2732
Model cadex newlib cadex newlib cadex newlib cadex newlib cadex newlib cadex newlib
Det 6 5 4 3 2 1
START NPI PAGE DELETE NPI PAGE
Pop-up menu displayed when you select /NEW PART/
Panel Displaying a List of NPI Pages in the Active Model

Message:
Select part from list / Key part number
Specify the NPI page you want to modify or start an NPI page for a new part by doing one of the following: Make an NPI page on the part list active by keying in or selecting its part number. Key in the number of a new part for which you want to make an NPI page by doing the following:
214
a.
Select START NPI PAGE.

Message:
Key NPI part number
b.
Key in a number for the new part.
An NPI panel and some additional buttons are displayed, as illustrated in the figure below. If you specified the number of an existing part, the NPI panel for that part is displayed. If you keyed in a number for a new part, the panel is filled in with dummy data, as shown in the figure. For the name used in the DRAWING ID column, CADEX inserts the drawing ID of the current model and adds a find name of lib. The text of the active field in the NPI panel is highlighted and is also displayed in the input line at the bottom of the screen.
Message:
Select line to edit / Key new field / YN next line
215
Part Number Model

CONNA TESTPT 2n2222A 54ls01 54t172a 2732 cadex newlib cadex newlib cadex newlib cadex newlib cadex newlib cadex newlib
Detail
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 5 4 3 2 1
START NPI PAGE DELETE NPI PAGE VERIFY NPI PAGE WINDOW
DELETE FIELD INSERT LINE DELETE LINE PROFILE BACKGROUND

PART NUMBER = PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION = NEW PART APPLICATION NUMBER = 1
GROUP = ELEC
MENU NAME SCHEMATIC DRAWING ID cadex newlib
USER = DESIGN
DET GROUP USER lib 1
New Part Information Panel
216
To edit fields on an NPI panel, do the following: a. Move to the field you want to change by doing one of the following: Select the line of text. Press YN to move to the next line. Press ENTER to move to the next field. If the next field is empty, a small circle is displayed to denote the starting point for any string of text you key in. Moving to another field makes that field active. b. Key in text to replace the active field. The new text replaces the old text. c. Optional: To insert or delete lines or to delete a field, do one of the following: To insert a line, do the following:
Message:
Select line to insert after / YN insert before current
2)
Select a line or press YN. If you select a line, a line with the word NEW on it is inserted after that line. If you press YN, a line with the word NEW is inserted before the highlighted line.
To delete a line, do the following:
Message:
Select line to delete / YN delete current
2)
Select a line or press YN.
217
If you select a line, it is deleted. If you press YN, the currently highlighted line is deleted. When a line is deleted, all lines below it move up. To delete a field, do the following: 1) Select DELETE FIELD.
Message:
Select field to delete
2)
Select a field.
Message:
YN delete field
3)
Press YN to delete the selected field. The highlighted field is deleted.
To verify the completeness and validity of the part you have just edited, select VERIFY NPI PAGE. If the new part information is valid, a message reads: Part verifies. If the part information is not valid, an error message is displayed. In addition, the Verify NPI Error Report panel is superimposed on the parts list panel. This panel, illustrated in the figure below, contains detailed messages describing the part you have just verified.
218
Verify NPI Error Report WARNING: Assuming current group for 1 (SCHEMATIC) WARNING: Assuming current user for 1 (SCHEMATIC) NEW PART INFORMATION
START NPI PAGE DELETE NPI PAGE VERIFY NPI PAGE
DELETE FIELD INSERT LINE DELETE LINE
WINDOW
PROFILE
BACKGROUND
Panel Displaying Messages Generated by Verifying New Part Information When an error panel is displayed, the following message is also displayed:
Message:
YN continue editing
To continue editing the NPI panel, press YN. You can now correct any errors that were detected by the NPI verification.
To file the NPI page you have modified, do the following: a. Select /EXIT/. A panel displays the name of the active model. This panel is illustrated in the figure below.
219
Modified Override Models cadex newlib 0000 FILE
Select FILE to toggle the model to ABRT (for abort).
WINDOW
PROFILE BACKGROUND
Panel Displaying Modified Override Models

Menu:
/ ABORT /
Message:
Select model name to toggle / YN file designated models
b.
Optional: Select the name of the active model on the Modified Override Models panel if you do not want to save any modified parts. Selecting the name of the active model toggles its designation from FILE to ABRT (for abort). To save your modified override parts, skip this step.
c.
Optional: To abort this filing procedure, select /ABORT/ and skip step d. When you select /ABORT/, the new parts you have created are not filed, but they remain in the active model.
220
d.
Press YN. If the active model is designated with the word FILE beside its name, the modified parts on its detail pages are filed. If the active model on the list is designated with the word ABRT beside its name, no modified parts are filed.
221
Deleting an NPI Page

Use this procedure to delete an NPI page from the active model. Before You Begin: If you want to modify existing part information, the NPI page for that part should already exist on the detail pages of the current model. Copying NPI pages from a system library into the active model using menu options /COMPONENT/ /LISTS/ was previously described.
Steps:
Select /UTILS/.
Menu:
Message:
Sel menu
Select menu option /NEW PART/. A panel displays a list of the parts whose NPI pages have been copied into the current model. An information message reports the total number of NPI pages contained on detail pages of the active model.
Message:
Select part from list / Key part number
Select DELETE NPI PAGE.

Message:
Select part to delete / Key partno to delete
Select or key in the part number you want to delete.

Message:
YN delete part (part number you specified)
5
222
Press YN.
The NPI page for the part you have specified is removed from the detail pages of the active model.
Message:
Select part to delete / Key partno to delete
To delete other NPI pages, go back and repeat steps 3 through 5 for each of those parts.
To file the current model, do the following: a. Select /EXIT/. A panel displays the name of the active model.
Menu:
/ ABORT /
Message:
Select model name to toggle / YN file designated models
b.
Optional: To not file the active model and abandon all deletions you have made, select the name of the active model listed on the Modified Override Models panel. Selecting the name of the active model toggles its designation from FILE to ABRT (for abort). If you want to save the active model and thus delete some new parts, skip this step.
c.
Optional: To abort this filing procedure, select /ABORT/ and skip step d. When you select /ABORT/, the deletions you have performed are not filed, although they remain deleted in the active model.
d.
Press YN. If the active model on the list is designated with the word FILE beside its name, the NPI pages on its detail pages are filed, and the deletions take effect. If the active model on the list is designated with the word ABRT beside its name, no NPI pages are filed,
223
and any deletions you have performed do not take effect.
224
Chapter 8. Creating Icon Panels

What You Should Know About Creating Icon Panels
Icon panels are easily-accessed collections of components that you use frequently as you design. This collection is displayed in the form of a panel along the right side of the display or as a full-screen panel. The panel contains icons representing components. When you select one of these icons, CADEX copies the component it represents from a system or user library. You can then place the copy in your design. On the icon panel you can also select icons that display other icon panels. You can create an unlimited number of icon panels. Different panels are linked by hierarchy attributes that you assign to icons. This method of linking panels gives you complete flexibility in how you organize component information. You can organize panels hierarchically, serially, or using a combination of both techniques. You can create icon panels displayed as side panels, which do not obscure the active display. You can also create full-screen icon panels, which can display more icons, minimizing the need for navigating through an icon panel system to find the desired component. The figure below illustrates a hierarchically structured set of icon panels. The first panel is the main directory. From it, you can select four directories. Each of these displays lower-level panels containing icons representing parts and icons that display other panels, including the main directory panel.
225
Navigating Through Some Icon Panels by Selecting Icons
226

Creating an icon panel system requires many steps. These steps vary depending on whether the icon panel should be displayed over the full screen or as a side panel. The steps also vary depending on whether you are creating the first panel displayed when you access the icon panels - referred to as the master panel - or you are creating panels displayed subsequent to the master panel. Subsequent panels are known as lower-level panels. Creating the Master Panel When you create a master icon panel, you must decide whether the panel should be displayed as a side panel or full-screen. The figure below illustrates both options. You must place geometry for the master panel on the first detail page of a model. If you are creating a full-screen panel, you can place icons anywhere on the portion of that detail page that is displayed when the drawing is centered on the origin and sized to 1.0. If you are creating a side panel, you place icons in a specially designated region of a drawing.
Full-Screen P l
Side P l
Full-Screen and Side Display Icon Panels
227
Entering the Name of the Master Panel Into the Profile After you have created the master icon panel on the first detail page of a model, you must use PROFILE to identify this model in the Profile. There, you enter the group, user, and drawing ID of the master icon panel. Creating Lower-Level Icon Panels Displayed Subsequent to the Master Panel When you create a lower-level icon panel, you must decide whether the panel should be displayed as a side panel or a full-screen panel. Lower-level icon panels are displayed when you select an icon with a hierarchy attribute assigned to it. If you are creating a full-screen panel, you can place icons anywhere on the portion of the drawing that is displayed by the hierarchy attribute. If you are creating a side panel, you can place icons in the right quarter of the drawing, as it is displayed in the window by a hierarchy attribute. The figure below shows the portion of the screen you can use for side panel geometry.
Quarters of screen where geometry cannot be displayed in a side panel. Quarter of screen where you can place icon panel geometry so that it will be displayed in a side panel.
Zone for Creating Geometry in a Lower-Level Side Panel
228
Creating Icons on a Panel

To create icons, you place component sets or geometric objects on the icon panel. Icons can represent components that you can copy into the active drawing, or they can display other icon panels. To place a component on an icon panel, either create the component there using menu option /BUILD/ or move a copy of the component there using menu option /COMPONENTS/. The component set must have a part number defined. To place an element (rather than a component) on an icon panel, use CATIA/CADAM Drafting to create geometry that represents a component or another panel. Use menu option /ATTRIBUTE/ in function key GROUP to assign the element an attribute number of 32000. Assign attribute data to the element that equals the part number of the component that this element represents. For example, if an element represents a component with a part number of 12345, assign the element a 32000 attribute number and attribute data of 12345. If the element is a note and that note represents a part number, you do not have to assign it a 32000 attribute, since CADEX assumes that a note on an icon panel without an attribute number refers to a part number. When creating icons, you may want to create simple geometric elements to represent components. You can also create an icon in the form of a note that provides a component's part number. If you prefer, you can also place actual components on the icon panels. When you create an icon that consists of many elements, it is easier to define all these elements as one component set and assign the component the same part number as the component this icon represents. When you create icons that display other icon panels, you may want to create the icons in the form of notes that provide the names of those other panels.
Creating the Links Between Icons and Icon Panels

To create the links between an icon and the panel that is displayed when you select it, you assign a hierarchy attribute to a component or element. The hierarchy attribute can specify a group, user, drawing ID, view, detail number, and window setting. When you select a component or object with a hierarchy attribute attached to it, the new model is displayed at the window setting specified in the hierarchy attribute. If you are creating an icon panel system, you should remember to include on each panel in your system an icon with a hierarchy attribute assigned to it that returns you to the master panel. You may
229
also want to create an icon that returns you to the panel that was previously displayed. You can also arrange your icon panels so that you can navigate between panels by selecting FORWARD and BACK. In order to do this, you must place your icon panel drawings on sequential detail pages of the same model.
Accessing Icon Panels From a Drawing

To access icon panels from a drawing, you can select menu options /COMPONENTS/ /PANEL/, which displays the icon panel (either full-screen or as a side panel). Select icons in the panel to display lower-level panels. If you have created all your icon panel drawings on sequential detail pages of the same model, you can also select FORWARD and BACK to display the icon panel on the next or the previous detail page. After you display an icon panel, you can copy a component from it by selecting any the following:
Any component with a part number defined.
An icon with both a 32000 attribute number and attribute data assigned to it that equals the component's part number.
A note without an attribute number assigned to it. (CADEX assumes the text string equals the component's part number.)
When you select an object on an icon panel, CADEX determines the part number associated with that object (either the component's part number or attribute data or text equal to a part number). CADEX then searches the user and system libraries for a component with the same part number. When CADEX finds the component it is searching for, it makes a copy of the component, which you can then place in your drawing.
Using Icon Panel Drawings That Use Different UPIs

You can create icon panel drawings in either inches or millimeters. CADEX automatically converts the units per inch (UPI) of the drawings so that they are consistent with the active drawing. CATIA/CADAM CADEX (workstation CADEX) can also automatically
230
convert the UPI of any drawings created in CADAM CADEX (host CADEX) at Release 21.0 or later.
Using Icon Panels Created in Host CADEX

You can create an icon panel system using panel drawings created with host CADEX and then transferred to workstation CADEX. You can also create an icon panel system in workstation CADEX using the techniques available in host CADEX. In workstation CADEX, any icon panel system you create using this method can consist of up to 63 detail pages that reside in a single model. You must identify that model in the Profile panel. Using the host CADEX approach, you assign a name to each detail page that constitutes an icon panel. You can place icon geometry within certain boundaries on that detail page. Icons can access components stored in libraries, or they can display other icon panels. If you use the host CADEX system, the icons you place on panels must point to components stored in user or system libraries or to other icon panels. You can create these pointers using menu option /ATTRIBUTE/ in function key GROUP to assign attribute numbers and attribute data to icons. For icons representing components, assign an attribute number of 32000 and attribute data that equals a component's part number. For icons representing other icon panels, assign an attribute number of 32001 and attribute data equal to the name you have assigned to that panel. CADEX assumes any text string in an icon panel without an attribute number assigned to it refers to a part number, so you do not have to assign attribute information to such text strings.
231
Creating the Master Icon Panel

Use this procedure to create the master icon panel (that is, the panel displayed when you select menu options /COMPONENTS/ /PANEL/). When you create this panel, you must decide if the panel is to be displayed over the full screen or as a side panel. Depending on the type of panel you want to display, you must create icon panel geometry in different locations.
Steps:
Use function key FILES to start an icon panel model. You can assign any name to the model.
Use function key DETAIL to start a new detail page in the model. You must create the master icon panel on the first detail page of the model.
Use command bar option WINDOW to display a portion of the detail page by doing one of the following: To create a full-screen panel, center the window at the origin and size it to 1.0. The screen displays the portion of the detail page where you can place geometry for a full-screen master icon panel. To create a side panel, display the area delineated in the figure on the next page. You may want to create a box around this area to mark its boundaries. Note: The side panel dimensions specified in this procedure are compatible with the dimensions required for creating icon panels in the host version of CADEX. When use menu options /COMPONENTS/ /PANEL/ to display this panel, the size of the panel
232
can vary, depending on the size of the window in which you started your CADAM session.
X = 3.5 inches or 88.9 mm X = 5.97 inches or 151.63 mm Y = 5.46 inches or 138.36 mm
(0,0)
Patterned area shows the zone in which you can place icon panel geometry for a side panel
Y = -5.46 inches or -138.36 mm
Zone for Creating Geometry in the Side Panel Version of the Master Icon Panel
Use CATIA/CADAM Drafting to create the geometry that will function as icons, or use CADEX to place actual components on the detail page.
For any geometry that represents a component, do the following: a. Using menu option /ATTRIBUTE/ in function key GROUP, key in 32000 as the attribute number. For attribute data, key in the part number of the component that this geometry represents.
b.
233
c.
Apply this attribute information to any text element, symbol, component, or group of geometry in the panel. You do not have to add a 32000 attribute to a note that equals a part number, because CADEX assumes that all text strings without attribute numbers placed on icon panels refer to part numbers. You do not have to add any attribute information to component sets placed in icon panels, because CADEX uses the component's part number to copy the corresponding component from a user or system library.
Enter the master icon panel drawing ID and location into the Profile. Entering the master icon panel information into the Profile was previously described.
234
Specifying the Master Icon Panel in the Profile

Use this procedure to identify in the Profile the model that serves as the master panel in your icon panel system. Icon panel systems are constructed so that they branch down from the contents of this model.
Steps:

Message:
Select option
In the Panel Drawing section, select the Group option.

Message:
Key in the name of the group that contains the drawing you want to identify as the master icon panel.
In the Panel Drawing section, select the User option.
Key in the name of the user that contains the drawing you want to specify as the master icon panel.
In the Panel Drawing section, select the Drawing ID option.
Key in the drawing ID of the model that you want to serve as the master icon panel.
235
Message:
YN cancel
b.
Press YN.
236
Creating Lower-Level Icon Panels and Linking Them to Icons

Use this procedure to create lower-level icon panels (the panels that are displayed by selecting icons on an icon panel). This procedure also describes how to define what is displayed when you select an icon that accesses another panel. For lower-level icon panels, you can create icon geometry in any model and in any location in a model. How you position icon panel geometry in lower-level panels depends on the type of panel you want to display (either side panel or full-screen). Before You Begin:
Create a master icon panel. This procedure was previously described.
Enter the drawing ID and location of the master icon panel into the Profile. Steps:
Use function key FILES and WINDOW to display the portion of a model in which you want to create icon geometry.
Use WINDOW to define a window setting. Note the window setting number.
Use function key FILES to file the model.
Use function key FILES and WINDOW to display the panel that contains the icon that represents the panel you are creating (the panel defined in steps 1 and 2). This icon can be a component set or any other geometric object.
237
Using menu option /HIERARCHY/ in CADEX, define a hierarchy attribute for the icon that specifies the model and window setting defined in steps 1 and 2. The hierarchy attribute must include the group, user, drawing ID, and detail number or view of the model established in step 1. It must also include the window setting defined in step 2. Creating hierarchy attributes is described in Chapter 10.
Select /HIERARCHY/
/DOWN/.
Select the icon with the hierarchy attribute defined in step 5. CADEX displays the model and window setting defined in steps 1 and 2.
Use PROFESSIONAL CADAM Interactive Design or CADEX to create on this panel the geometry that will function as icons. If you are creating a side panel, you can place geometry only in the right quarter of the window. The figure below shows the right quarter of the screen. You may want to create a line to clearly mark this area's boundaries.
238
Shaded area shows the quarter of the screen where you can place icon panel geometry so that it will be displayed in a side panel.
Zone for Creating Geometry in a Lower-Level Side Icon Panel Using menu option /COMPONENTS/ to place components is described in Chapter 5.
For any geometry that represents a component, do the following: a. Using menu option /ATTRIBUTE/ in function key GROUP, key in 32000 as the attribute number. For attribute data, key in the part number of the component that this geometry represents. Apply this attribute information to any text element, symbol, component, or group of geometry in the panel. You do not have to add a 32000 attribute to a note that equals a part number, because CADEX assumes that all text strings placed on icon panels refer to part numbers. You do not have to add any attribute information to component sets placed in icon panels, because
b.
c.
239
CADEX uses the component's part number to copy the corresponding component from a user or system library.
10 Optional: To create other lower-level panels, go and repeat steps 1 through 9.
240
Creating Icon Panels Using the Host CADEX Method

Use this procedure to create an icon panel system using techniques consistent with the CADEX feature of the CADAM CADEX (host CADEX). The icons you create in these models can represent components in user or system libraries, or they can represent other detail pages that form icon panels. The icon panel system created with this method can contain up to 63 panel drawings in a single model. The attribute information you attach to notes and geometry in the icon panel model refers CADEX to specific panels or components. For components, you assign an attribute number of 32000 and a component's part number as the attribute data. For panels, you assign an attribute number of 32001 and a panel name as the attribute data.
Steps:
Use function key FILES to start an icon panel model. You can assign any name to the model.
Use function key DETAIL to start a new detail page in the icon panel model.
X = 3.5 inches or 88.9 mm X = 5.97 inches or 151.63 mm Y = 5.46 inches or 138.36 mm
Y = -5.46 inches or -138.36 mm
Create a rectangle at the coordinates shown above.
241
The area within the rectangle will contain your panel information. When use menu options /COMPONENTS/ /PANEL/ to display this panel, the size of the panel can vary, depending on the size of the window in which you started your CADAM session.
Place the following note anywhere on the detail page:

PANEL NAME = ANY NAME
The note you create, such as ANY NAME, is the exact panel drawing name, including any spaces. If you do not define a name for the panel, CADEX assigns a default PANEL n, where n is the detail page number.
Use CATIA/CADAM Interactive Design to create the geometry that will function as icons on the panel or use CADEX to place actual component sets on the panel. Place the icons in the rectangle you created in step 3.
Using function key GROUP and menu option

/ATTRIBUTE/, add attributes to elements and notes in
a panel by doing one of the following: Specify an element that you can select to display a panel. To accomplish this, do the following: a. b. Key in 32001 as the attribute number. Key in the name of the panel you want to display as attribute data. Make sure the name you enter matches a name you assigned to some other panel. (You assign panel names when you place a PANEL NAME = XXXX note on a detail page.) c. Apply this attribute information to a note or element that represents the panel you want to display.
242
Specify an element that you can select to copy a component from a system or user library. To accomplish this, do the following: a. Key in 32000 as the attribute number. Note: You do not have to add a 32000 attribute to a note that equals a part number, since CADEX assumes that all text strings placed on icon panels refer to part numbers. b. c. Key in the component's part number as the attribute data. Apply this attribute information to any text, element, symbol, component, or grouped geometry in the panel.
To create another detail page, go back and repeat steps 2 through 6.
Use function key FILES to file the icon panel model.
Enter the name and location of this icon panel model into the Profile.
243
244
Chapter 9. Manipulating Components

What You Should Know About Manipulating Components
Menu option /COMPONENTS/ provides tools for retrieving a copy of a component set from a user or system library and placing it into the active drawing. You can then move, turn, flip, scale, copy, and delete component sets, transfer component sets from a drawing to a detail page, and place dittos on a drawing. Together, these tools allow you to position all the component sets and other elements necessary for a design. Menu Structure When you select menu option /COMPONENTS/, the following menu is displayed:
Retrieving Copies of Components From Libraries and Placing Them on Drawings

CADEX provides the following methods for retrieving copies of components stored in libraries and placing them in the active model:
Copying components from libraries by selecting or keying in a part number.
Copying components from libraries by selecting from the icon panel.

Copying Components by Selecting Them From Library Lists To retrieve a copy of a component directly from a user or system library and place it on a drawing, you can use menu options /COMPONENTS/ /LISTS/. These options allow you to review the part numbers of the components contained in all available libraries, to designate one as the active component (that is, ready to be
245
retrieved), and to place a copy of the active component in the current model. If you do not need to view the contents of libraries, you can retrieve a component by just keying in its part number. To preview information about the active component before you place it in a drawing, you can use menu option /PREVIEW/. This displays three preview panels that show the geometry of the active component, list the part numbers of all equivalent components, and provide a description of the active component. One of the preview panels also provides retrieval options that allow you to copy alternative sources of geometry for a component and associate it with other part information for that part number. The retrieval options also allow you to copy the NPI page for a component from the system library into the active model. Copying Components by Selecting Them From the Icon Panel To retrieve a component directly from the icon panel and place it on a drawing, you can use menu options /COMPONENTS/ /PANEL/. These options allow you to review the contents of the icon panel, which contains representations of components stored in user and system libraries. These representations can be graphic or textual icons or the actual component itself. Often, icon panels consist of multiple panels, which you can arrange both sequentially and hierarchically. To find the correct component, you may have to browse through several icon panels. Selecting an element on the icon panel makes the component it represents active. You can preview the component using menu option /PREVIEW/ and then place the component in the active model.
Changing the Size of Elements on a Drawing

After you have placed a component or element on a drawing, you can scale it to a larger or smaller size using menu options /COMPONENTS/ /SCALE/. To do this, you select or trap one or more elements, component sets, or nested component sets, and key in a scale factor.
246
Moving, Copying, and Deleting Elements on a Drawing

Menu option /COMPONENTS/ provides menu options that allow you to change the position of components and geometric elements used in a design. These options are described below: Option /MOVE/ Description Moves elements, component sets, and nested component sets from one location to another. This option also allows you to retrieve component sets stored in user and system libraries and place copies of them in the active model. /TURN/ Turns elements, component sets, and nested component sets around their pivot point by a number of degrees that you specify. This option has two suboptions, /45/ and /90/, which allow you to turn elements by increments of 45 and 90 degrees.
/FLIP/
Flips elements, component sets, and nested component sets about the horizontal or vertical axis or around any other axis that you define. This option has two suboptions, /HZ/ and /VT/, which allow you to specify the horizontal or vertical axis.
/DELETE/
Deletes elements, component sets, and nested component sets.
/STRETCH/ Allows you to move or turn elements, component sets, and nested component sets that are already connected by multilines to other elements and component sets. When you move an object and this option is active (underlined), multilines actually stretch, leaving connections intact and preserving right angles on multilines. This option must be used in conjunction with menu options /MOVE/ or /TURN/. /COPY/ Leaves a copy of one or more elements, component sets, or nested component sets in
247
place when you change the location of those objects. If you use this option to copy nested sets, the hierarchical structure of the sets you copy is preserved. When this option is active (underlined), it can be used in conjunction with menu options /MOVE/, /TURN/, or /FLIP/. /DETAIL/ Copies one or more elements, component sets, or nested component sets from the current view or detail to a newly created detail page. If you use this option to transfer nested sets, the nested structure of the sets you transfer is preserved. This option must be used in conjunction with menu option /MOVE/. /ATTACH/ Allows you to display temporarily the points within a ditto. You can select any of these points as the pivot and then attach that pivot to any other point in a drawing, or you can select any of the points within the ditto as the destination for another element or component set that you are moving. This option must be used in conjunction with menu option /MOVE/.
In general, the process of moving components and elements in a drawing consists of the following: 1. 2. 3. Specifying the components and elements to be processed. Defining the pivot point for those components and elements. Designating the destination for the components and elements to be moved.
These three steps are described in detail in the following sections. Specifying Elements to be Processed You can specify the components and elements to be moved by selecting component sets and other types of elements one by one. After you select a single component or element, you can continue to select additional components or elements as long as menu option /MOD/ is active (underlined). Rather than select individual objects, you can use a trap rectangle or polygon to specify a group of components and elements. Any object you specify to be moved by selecting or trapping is highlighted.
248
When you retrieve a component from a library, it is also highlighted and can then be processed like any other element or component being moved. Defining the Pivot Point for the Elements to be Processed When you select a single element or component to be moved, CADEX automatically defines a temporary pivot for that object if a pivot system attribute has not yet been defined. If you are accumulating objects to be moved, CADEX recalculates the temporary pivot for them based on the component or element that was selected last. CADEX uses the pivot for the last object as the pivot for all the objects being accumulated. In some unusual cases, CADEX may not be able to automatically derive a pivot for an element being moved. In such cases, you must define the pivot yourself. If you specify objects to be moved by trapping them, you must define a pivot for those objects. Designating a Destination for the Elements to be Moved After you have defined a pivot point, you can use one of three ways to designate a destination for elements to be moved: you can select any point displayed in a drawing, indicate a location, or key in a distance for elements to move. When you designate a destination for elements that are highlighted, the pivot point moves to that location. All other highlighted elements move relative to that pivot point. If you use menu option /MOVE/ in conjunction with menu option /ATTACH/, you can attach the highlighted elements to any point temporarily displayed in a ditto.
Inserting Components Into Multilines

In many circumstances you can move a single component and insert it into a multiline. Placing a component into a multiline breaks the multiline into two multilines, and any attributes attached to the original multiline are copied to the new one. How the multiline relimits depends on the number and position of pins on the component and whether or not a pivot system attribute has been defined for the component; the multiline either breaks at a single point, relimits around the component to pins collinear with the multiline, or relimits to a single point. When you remove a component from a multiline, the multilines reconnect, and their attributes are combined. The following examples illustrate the possible results of placing a component into a multiline.
249
If you place a two-pin component without a pivot into a multiline and those two pins are collinear (on the same line) with the multiline, the multiline breaks and relimits to those two pins.
COMPONENT
Pins
If you place a component with a pivot into a multiline and other pins in the component are collinear with the multiline, the multiline breaks into two multilines, and each multiline relimits to the pin farthest away from the pivot.
COMPONENT Pins
Pivot
COMPONENT Pins
Pivot
If you place a multi-pin component with a pivot into an intersection of two or more multilines, any multilines that pass through both the pivot and a pin are relimited to the pins farthest from the pivot.
250
COMPONENT
Pivot
If you place a two-pin component into a multiline so that the multiline is collinear with the two pins but only one pin is on the multiline, the multiline relimits to that pin, as illustrated in the following examples.
251
COMPONENT
Pins
COMPONENT
Pins
COMPONENT
Pins
COMPONENT
Pins
If you place a component with a pivot into a multiline, the multiline breaks into two multilines at the point where the pivot intersects the original multiline, as shown in the following examples.
252
COMPONENT
Pivot
COMPONENT Pins
Pivot
Traversing Nested Component Sets

You can use the menu options available under /TRAV/ to navigate through the levels of a nested set as you manipulate components. Using /UP/ and /DOWN/, you can move up and down the levels of a nested set. Using /NEXT/ and /PREVIOUS/, you can move sideways through the siblings of a nested set. When you use the menu options available under /TRAV/ to move to another level of a nested set, that set becomes active and is highlighted. You can then use menu options /MOVE/, /TURN/, /FLIP/, /SCALE/, /COPY/, /DETAIL/, or /DELETE/ to operate on the active set. Depending on whether menu option /ALL/ is active, any operations you perform on the set can affect either all the sets nested beneath the active set or only the active set. You can use menu options /TRAV/ /LIST/ to display the Traverse panel, which textually represents the hierarchy within a nested set. The panel lists the reference designator or part number of every set contained in the nested set; for each successive level in the nesting, the reference designators for the sets at that level are indented.
253
Retrieving a Component From a Library and Placing It On a Drawing: /LISTS/

Use this procedure to retrieve a component from a user or system library and place it on the primary view or on a detail page of the active model. To retrieve a component, you can key in the component's part number or you can review lists of all the part numbers contained in the available libraries and select a number from those lists. When you select a component, you can use menu option /PREVIEW/ to view the component's geometry. If the component is stored in a system library, /PREVIEW/ also provides a description of the component and a list of all its equivalent components. If the component is stored in a user library, /PREVIEW/ provides the location of the user library drawing. The /PREVIEW/ menu option provides two retrieval options.
One retrieval option allows you to use more than one type of geometry for a single part number if the part is stored in a system library. You can select the geometry that you want to use for a component from a list of sources. (The libraries supplied with CADEX provide only one source of geometry. It is labeled SCHEMATIC on the Retrieval Options panel.)
When you place the component in a drawing, CADEX retrieves the component's geometry from that source and associates it with all other component information for that part number. In this way, you can create components with the same part information but different geometry.
Another retrieval option allows you to create new parts for a system library by copying the NPI page for a component from the system library into the active model.
Before You Begin:
To retrieve components from a user library, you must have already created a user library. For more information on establishing user libraries, see Chapter 5.
To define sublists of a parts list using a wild card character, you must have already defined a wild card character.
254
Steps:
Menu:
Message:
Optional: If you know the number of the part you want to place, key in that number and skip to step 11. An information message provides the active part number and the name of the active library.
Message:
Ind pos / Sel pt / Key X,Y / Key new part no / YN create detail
255
Select /LISTS/.
24ls63 24ls69 24ls91 24ls99 25ls09 25ls138 25ls139 28ls23 28ls78 37ld34 37ld78 37ld98 54s138 54ls138 56ll73 74s138 74ls138 78ll24
SUBLIST PROFILE BACKGROUND
Two panels are displayed. One shows a list of all available libraries, while the other displays a list of the components in the active library. The figure above illustrates these panels. The user library appears first on the list of available libraries, unless you have not previously established a user library for the current design.
Message:
Ind pos / Sel from list / Key part no / Sel new comp / YN rectangle
To display the contents of a library other than the one currently displayed, select the name of the other library. The contents of the selected library are displayed.
256
Optional: To display sublists of a parts list, do the following: Note: You can display sublists of parts in system libraries. You cannot display a sublist of the parts in a user library. a. To display a sublist based on common elements in part numbers or part descriptions, do one of the following: To display a sublist of a parts list by searching for common elements in part numbers, key in an alphanumeric string that includes a wild card character. You can use a wildcard character to display a sublist by keying in the wildcard character (as defined in the Profile) either at the beginning or end of a text string or at the beginning and end of a text string. The following examples show how to use wildcard characters: Key in: 757* *757 *757* Result: Matches part numbers starting with 757, such as 757A or 757BBB. Matches part numbers ending with 757, such as 10757 or A757. Matches part numbers with 757 embedded in the number, such as A75712 or 10757888.
CADEX displays a sublist of all parts whose numbers contain an alphanumeric string that matches the string you key in. To display a sublist of a parts list by searching for common elements in part descriptions, do the following: 1) Select SUBLIST.
257
Message:
Sel from list / Key description keyword
2)
Key in the text string you want to match against all part descriptions. CADEX displays a sublist of all parts whose part descriptions contain the alphanumeric string you key in. For example, if you key in nand-gate, the part description for every part in the active library is matched against nand-gate. A sublist is displayed of those parts whose descriptions contain the phrase nand-gate.
An information message shows the number of matches found. Two new buttons, MODIFY SUBLISTand EXIT, are displayed at the bottom of the parts list. b. Optional: To modify an existing sublist, do one of the following: To display a sublist of the existing sublist by searching for common elements in part numbers, key in an alphanumeric string that includes a wild card character. To display a sublist of a parts list by searching for common elements in part descriptions, do the following: 1) Select MODIFY SUBLIST.
Message:
Sel from list / Key description keyword
2)
Key in an alphanumeric string that is matched against the part descriptions of only those parts in the current sublist.
An information message shows the number of matches found. c. To exit a sublist and return to the full parts list of the active library, select EXIT.
258
Select /PREVIEW/ to display information about the component you make active in the next step.
Select or key in the number of the part that you want to retrieve. The number you specify is highlighted. Information messages provide the part number of the active component and the name of the library that contains it.
259
Retrieval Options SCHEMATIC NPI PAGE
Equivalent Parts nand/2 54h00 54ls00 54l00 54s00 24ls63 24ls69 24ls91 24ls99 25ls09 25ls138 25ls139 28ls23 28ls78 37ld34 37ld78 37ld98 54ls00 54s138 54ls138 56ll73 7400 74s138
Description Quad 2-input nand gate
Panels displayed when part is stored in a system library
WINDOW
PROFILE
SUBLIST BACKGROUND
Description group user drawing
Panels displayed when part is stored in the user library
24ls63 24ls69 24ls91 24ls99 25ls09 25ls138 25ls139 28ls23 28ls78 37ld34 37ld78 37ld98 54s138 54ls138 56ll73 7400 74s138 74ls138
WINDOW
PROFILE
SUBLIST BACKGROUND
Preview Panels Displayed When the Active Part is Stored in a System Library or a User Library
260
If the highlighted part is stored in a system library, these panels show a list of equivalent parts, a description of the selected part, retrieval options, and the geometry of the part. If the active part is stored in a user library, the preview panels show the geometry of the component and the group, user, and drawing ID of the user library model that contains the active component.
Message:
Ind pos / Sel pt / Key X, Y / Key new part no / YN create detail
Optional: To specify an alternate source of the geometry for the part being retrieved or to copy an NPI page for that part into the active model, select an option from the list in the Retrieval Options panel. The names appearing in the Retrieval Options panel are the names listed under MENU NAME on the active part's NPI page. They identify the different sources of geometry available for this part. If you select NPI PAGE, the NPI page for a component is copied from the system library into the active model. This is useful if you are creating new parts for a system library. If you select another name on the Retrieval Options panel, the geometry for the active part is retrieved from the model which that name on the NPI page points to. The geometry is associated with all other part information for that part number. In this way, you can create components with the same part information but different geometry.
Optional: To remove the preview panels from the display, select /PREVIEW/. The preview panels are removed from the display.
10 Optional: To remove the library list and parts list panels, select /LISTS/.
261
The library list and parts list panels are no longer displayed.
11 Optional: To copy the active part to an automatically created detail page, press YN. A new detail page is added to the active model. The selected part is copied to that detail page.
Info:
Detail page was created

Message:
Ind position / Sel pt / Sel new comp / Key X, Y / Key new part number
12 To place the retrieved part in the active model, do the following: a. To designate a location for the retrieved component, do one of the following: Indicate a location. Select a point. Key in X,Y coordinates. When you position a part, you actually position the pivot of the component set. If no pivot is defined, CADEX derives the centerpoint of the part. That is what you use to position the part.
Message:
Ind pos / Sel pt / Key DX,DY / Sel new comp / YN delete
b.
Optional: To delete the component you have just placed, press YN. The component is deleted, and the procedure is complete.
c.
Optional: To reposition the retrieved component, do one of the following: Indicate a location or select a point for the component.
262
Key in a DX,DY value that specifies how far you want to move the component. Key in DX and DY values individually by doing the following: 1) Key in a DX value.
Message:
Key DY / YN same DY
2)
Key in a DY value or press YN to accept the last value used for DY in an earlier procedure.
The pivot of the component moves to the location you have specified, and the rest of the component moves relative to the pivot. You can continue to adjust the new position of the component.
Message:
Ind pos / Sel pt / Key DX,DY / Sel new comp / YN same DX,DY
d.
Optional: To move the component by the same distance that you moved it in step c, press YN.
263
Retrieving a Component From an Icon Panel and Placing It On a Drawing: /PANEL/

Use this procedure to retrieve a component from an icon panel and place it on the primary view or on a detail page of the active model. When you select a component on an icon panel, you can use menu option /PREVIEW/ to display the component's geometry, a description of the active component, and a list of all components equivalent to it. Before You Begin:
To retrieve components from an icon panel, you must have already created an icon panel. For more information on creating icon panels, see Chapter 8.
Steps:
Menu:
Message:
Select /PANEL/. The icon panel is displayed on the right side of the screen.
Message:
Ind pos / Sel from panel / Key part no / Sel new comp / YN rectangle
Optional: To display a full-screen version of the icon panel, do the following: a. Select FULL.
264
If the icon panel was created using the host CADEX method, or if it is a master icon panel, CADEX shifts and resizes the panel to display it full screen.
Message:
Sel from panel / Key part number
b.
Optional: Exit the screen by doing one of the following: Select a part. Key in a part number. Select SIDE to redisplay the side panel version of the same icon panel.
Message:
Ind pos / Sel from panel / Key part no / Sel new comp / YN rectangle
Select /PREVIEW/ to display information about the component you make active in the next step.
Select the icon representing the component you want to retrieve. The component represented by the icon you select is active. Information messages provide the component's part number and the library in which it is stored. If you need to navigate through the icon panel system to find the correct component, select the icons that display other panels.
Message:
Ind pos / Sel pt / Key X, Y / Key new part no / YN create detail
Optional: To remove the side preview panels from the display, select /PREVIEW/. The preview panels are removed from the display.
265
Optional: To copy the active component to an automatically created detail page, press YN. A new detail page is added to the active model, and the selected component is copied to that detail page.
Info:

Message:
Ind position / Sel pt / Sel new comp / Key X, Y / Key new part number
To place the retrieved part in the active model, do the following: a. To designate a location for the retrieved component, do one of the following: Indicate a location. Select a point. Key in X,Y coordinates. When positioning a part, you are actually positioning the pivot of the component set. If no pivot is defined, CADEX derives the centerpoint of the part. That is what you use to position the part.
Message:
Ind pos / Key DX / Key DX,DY / Sel pt / Sel new comp / YN delete
b.
Optional: To delete the component you have just placed, press YN. The component is deleted, and the procedure is complete.
c.
Optional: To reposition the retrieved component, do one of the following: Indicate a location or select a point for the component. Key in a DX,DY value that specifies how far you want to move the component.
266
Key in DX and DY values individually by doing the following: 1) Key in a DX value.

Message:
Key DY / YN same DY
2)
The pivot of the component moves to the location you have specified, and the rest of the component moves relative to the pivot. You can continue to adjust the new position of the component.
Message:
d.
Optional: To move the component by the same distance that you moved it in step c, press YN.
267
Changing the Size of Components and Elements: /SCALE/

Use this procedure to change the size of components and elements on a drawing.
Steps:
Menu:
Message:
Select /SCALE/.
To specify the components or elements you want to scale, do one of the following: To select components or elements one by one, do the following: a. Select a component or element. You can select any component or element except a point that is not a member of a component set. The component or element you select is highlighted.
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE / / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW // MODIFY / TRAV // RET /
268
b.
Optional: To highlight another level of a nested component set, traverse to that level using
To trap one or more components or elements with a polygon, do the following: menu option /TRAV/. a. Indicate a point to start a trap polygon.
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE / / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW // TRAP IN // RET /
Message:
Ind point / YN back up
b.
Indicate additional points to create the sides of the trap polygon around the elements you want to move. Optional: Press YN to erase the most recently created side of the polygon. When you finish creating the polygon, select /TRAP IN/. The components and elements trapped by the polygon are highlighted.
Message:
c. d.
Sel pivot point / Ind pivot point
e.
Select or indicate a pivot point for the highlighted elements.
To trap one or more components or elements with a rectangle, do the following: a. Press YN to create a trap rectangle.
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE / / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW / / TRAP IN // RET /
269
Message:
Ind corner
b.
Indicate one corner of the trap rectangle. A rectangle is displayed at the location of your cursor.
Message:
Ind opposite corner
c.
Indicate the opposite corner of the trap rectangle. A trap rectangle is displayed.
Message:
Redefine corner
d.
Optional: To redefine the trap rectangle to add or delete elements, indicate near a corner of the rectangle. The nearest corner of the rectangle moves to that point. You can continue to redefine the rectangle until you are satisfied with the trap.
e.
Select /TRAP IN/. The elements trapped by the rectangle are highlighted.
Message:
f.

/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE // STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW // MODIFY / TRAV // RET /
Menu:
Message:
Ind pos / Key scale factor / Sel new comp / YN same scale
270
To specify additional components and elements to be scaled or to delete components and elements from those already specified, do the following: a. Select /MODIFY/ if it is not already underlined. If /MODIFY/ is already underlined, select /MODIFY/ twice.
Message:
Sel comp / Def pivot / YN end
b.
Select the components and elements you want to add or delete. Selecting a highlighted component or element dehighlights it and removes it from the group to be scaled; selecting an unhighlighted component or element highlights it and adds it to the group to be scaled.
c.
Press YN. CADEX uses the pivot for the last element added as the pivot for all the elements to be scaled.
Message:
Ind pos / Key scale factor / Sel new comp / YN same scale
Optional: To define a new pivot for the highlighted elements, do the following: a. Select /MODIFY/ if it is not already underlined. If /MODIFY/ is already underlined, select /MODIFY/ twice.
Message:
b. c.
Indicate a new pivot point. Press YN.
To specify the scale factor by which to enlarge or reduce the highlighted elements, do one of the following:
271
Key in a scale factor. Press YN to use the previously defined scale factor. The highlighted elements are scaled relative to the pivot point.
Optional: To scale the highlighted elements again by the same scale factor, press YN.
272
Moving Components and Elements: /MOVE/

Use this procedure to move components and elements on a drawing. You can specify a new location for components and elements by either selecting a point, indicating a location, or keying in a distance that they should move. Menu option /MOVE/ offers a feature called /STRETCH/, which allows you to move components that are connected by multilines to other components. The multilines stretch, leaving connections intact and preserving right angles on multilines.
Steps:
Menu:
Message:
Select /MOVE/ if it is not already underlined.
Optional: To stretch multilines when you move components, select menu option /STRETCH/ if it is not already underlined. Note: Multilines attached to components nested beneath other components will not stretch.
To specify the components or elements you want to move, do one of the following:
To select components or elements one by one, do the following: a. Select a component or element.
273
You can select any component or element except a point that is not a member of a component set. The component or element you select is highlighted.
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE / / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW // ATTACH / MOD / TRAV // RET /
Message:
Ind pos / Sel pt / Key DX, DY / Sel new comp / YN new pivot
b.
To highlight another level of a nested component set, traverse to that level using menu option /TRAV/.
To trap one or more components or elements with a polygon, do the following: a. Indicate a point to start a trap polygon.
Menu:
Message:
b.
Indicate additional points to create the sides of the trap polygon around the elements you want to move. Optional: Press YN to erase the most recently created side of the polygon. When you finish creating the polygon, select /TRAP IN/. The components and elements trapped by the polygon are highlighted.
c. d.
274
Message:
e.
Menu:
Message:
Ind corner
b.
Message:
Ind opposite corner
c.
Message:
Redefine corner
d.
Optional: To redefine the trap rectangle to add or delete elements, indicate near a corner of the rectangle. The nearest corner of the rectangle moves to that point. You can continue to redefine the rectangle until you are satisfied with the trap.
e.
Select /TRAP IN/. The elements trapped by the rectangle are highlighted.
275
Message:
f.

/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE // STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW // ATTACH / MOD / TRAV // RET /
Menu:
Message:
To specify additional components and elements to be moved or to delete components and elements from those already specified, do the following: a. Select /MOD/ if it is not already underlined. If /MOD/ is already underlined, select /MOD/ twice.
Message:
b.
Select the components and elements you want to add or delete. Selecting a highlighted component or element dehighlights it and removes it from the group to be moved; selecting an unhighlighted component or element highlights it and adds it to the group to be moved.
c.
Press YN. The pivot for the last element selected is the pivot for all the elements to be moved.
Message:
Optional: To define a new pivot for the highlighted elements, do the following: a. Press YN.
276
Message:
Sel pivot point / Ind pivot point / YN accept pivot
b.
Select or indicate a new pivot point or press YN to accept the current pivot.
Message:
To designate a new location for the highlighted components and elements, do one of the following: Indicate a location or select a point for the pivot of the highlighted elements. Key in a DX,DY value that specifies how far you want to move the pivot of the highlighted elements. Key in DX and DY values individually by doing the following: a. Key in a DX value.
Message:
Key DY / YN same DY
b.
The pivot of the highlighted elements moves to the location you have specified, and the highlighted components and elements move relative to it. You can continue to adjust the new position of the highlighted elements.
Message:
Optional: To move the highlighted elements by the same distance that you moved them in step 7, press YN.
277
Turning Components and Elements: /TURN/

Use this procedure to turn components and elements on a drawing. You can specify the number of degrees, minutes, and seconds by which to turn components and elements. You can also use suboptions /45/ and /90/ to rotate elements in 45-degree and 90-degree increments. In addition, suboption /STRETCH/ allows you to turn components that are connected by multilines to other components. The multilines stretch, leaving connections intact and preserving right angles.
Steps:
Menu:
Message:
Select /TURN/.
Optional: To stretch multilines when you turn components, select menu option /STRETCH/ if it is not already underlined. Note: Multilines attached to components nested beneath other components will not stretch.
To specify the components and elements you want to turn, do one of the following: To select components or elements one by one, do the following: a. Select a component or element.
278
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE / / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW // 45 / 90 / MOD / TRAV // RET /
Message:
Ind pos / Key angle in degrees / Sel new comp / YN same angle
b.
To highlight another level of a nested component set, traverse to that level using
To trap one or more components and elements with a trap polygon, do the following: menu option /TRAV/. a. Indicate a point to start a trap polygon.
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE/ SCALE / / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW // TRAP IN // RET /
Message:
b.
Indicate additional points to create the sides of the trap polygon around the elements you want to move. Optional: Press YN to erase the most recently created side of the polygon. When you finish creating the polygon, select /TRAP IN/.
c. d.
279
The components and elements trapped by the polygon are highlighted.

Message:
e.
Select or indicate a pivot point for the highlighted elements. You can select any geometry to define the pivot point.
To trap one or more components and elements with a trap rectangle, do the following:
a.
Press YN to create a trap rectangle.

Menu:
Message:
Ind corner
b.
Message:
Ind opposite corner
c.
Message:
Redefine corner
d.
Optional: To redefine the trap rectangle to add or delete elements, indicate near a corner of the rectangle.
280
The nearest corner of the rectangle moves to that point. You can continue to redefine the rectangle until you are satisfied with the trap. e. Select /TRAP IN/. The elements trapped by the rectangle are highlighted.
Message:
f.
Select or indicate a pivot point for the highlighted elements. You can select any geometry to define the pivot point.
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE // STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW // 45 / 90 / MOD / TRAV // RET /
Message:
Ind pos / Key angle in degrees / Sel new component / YN same angle
To specify additional components and elements to be turned or to delete components and elements from those already specified, do the following: a. Select /MOD/ if it is not already underlined. If /MOD/ is already underlined, select /MOD/ twice.
Message:
b.
Select the components and elements you want to add or delete. Selecting a highlighted component or element dehighlights it and removes it from the group to be turned; selecting an unhighlighted component or element highlights it and adds it to the group to be turned.
c.
Press YN.
281
CADEX uses the pivot for the last object selected as the pivot for all the objects to be moved.
Message:
Ind pos / Key angle in degrees / Sel new component / YN same angle
Optional: To define a new pivot for the highlighted elements, do the following: a. Select /MOD/ if it is not already underlined. If /MOD/ is already underlined, select /MOD/ twice.
Message:
b.
Indicate a new pivot point.
Optional: To rotate the highlighted elements, do one of the following by 90 degrees, select /90/. All the highlighted elements, including text elements, are rotated by 90 degrees.
Optional: To rotate the highlighted elements by 45 degrees, select /45/. All the highlighted elements, including text elements, are rotated by 45 degrees.
To turn the highlighted elements a specified amount, key in that amount in degrees, minutes, and seconds, separating each value with a comma. The highlighted elements turn counterclockwise around the pivot point by the number of degrees, minutes, and seconds you key in. To turn the highlighted elements clockwise, key in a negative value. If you press YN without keying in a value, the highlighted elements turn by the last value you keyed in during this session.
282
10 Optional: To turn the highlighted elements again by the same number of degrees, press YN. The highlighted elements turn by the same number of degrees established in step 9.
283
Flipping Components and Elements: /FLIP/

Use this procedure to flip components and elements on a drawing. You can flip elements about the horizontal or vertical axis or about any arbitrary axis, which you can define by selecting a line or multiline.
Steps:
If you want to flip components about any axis other than the horizontal or vertical axis, use function key LINE to create a line or multiline representing that axis. If you want to flip components about a horizontal or vertical axis, skip this step and go to step 3.
Menu:
Message:
Select /FLIP/.
Message:
Sel component / Ind point / YN rectangle
To specify the components and elements you want to flip, do one of the following: To select components or elements one by one, do the following: a. Select a component or element.
284
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE / / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW // HZ / VT / MOD / TRAV // RET /
If the following menu is underlined: /HZ/ /VT/
The message reads: Ind pos / Sel pt / Sel line / Sel new comp / YN flip about horizontal Ind pos / Sel pt / Sel line / Sel new comp / YN flip about vertical
To highlight another level of a nested component set, traverse to that level using menu option /TRAV/. Trap one or more components and elements with a trap polygon by doing the following: a. Indicate a point to start a trap polygon.
Menu:
b.
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW / TRAP IN // RET /
Message:
Ind point / YN backup
b.
c.
Indicate additional points to create the sides of the trap polygon around the elements you want to move. You can press YN to erase the most recently created side of the polygon. When you finish creating the polygon, select /TRAP IN/. The components and elements trapped by the polygon are highlighted.
Menu:
285
Message:
Sel pivot pt / Ind pivot pt
Trap in one or more components and elements with a trap rectangle by doing the following: a. Press YN.
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE / / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW / TRAP IN // RET /
Message:
Ind corner
b.
Indicate one corner of the trap rectangle. A point is displayed representing one corner of the trap rectangle. Indicate the opposite corner of the trap rectangle. A trap rectangle is displayed. Optional: To redefine the trap rectangle to add or delete elements, indicate near a corner of the rectangle. The nearest corner of the rectangle moves to that point. You can continue to redefine the rectangle until you are satisfied with the trap. Select /TRAP IN/. The elements trapped by the rectangle are highlighted.
Menu:
Message:
Ind opposite corner
c.
Message:
Redefine corner
d.
e.
Message:
Sel pivot pt / Ind pivot pt
Select or indicate a pivot point for the highlighted elements. The pivot point you define is haloed.
If the following menu is underlined: /HZ/ The message reads: Ind pos / Sel pt / Sel line / Sel new comp / YN flip about horizontal
286
/VT/
Ind pos / Sel pt / Sel line / Sel new comp / YN flip about vertical
To specify additional components and elements to be flipped or to delete components and elements from those already specified, do the following: a. Select /MOD/ if it is not already underlined. If /MOD/ is already underlined, select /MOD/ twice.
Message:
b.
c.
Select the components and elements you want to add or delete. Selecting a highlighted component or element dehighlights it and removes it from the group to be flipped; selecting an unhighlighted component or element highlights it and adds it to the group to be flipped. Press YN. CADEX uses the pivot for the last object selected as the pivot for all the objects to be moved.
If the following menu is underlined: /HZ/ /VT/
The message reads: Ind pos / Sel pt / Sel line / Sel new comp / YN flip about horizontal Ind pos / Sel pt / Sel line / Sel new comp / YN flip about vertical
Optional: To define a new pivot for the highlighted elements, do the following: a. Select /MOD/ if it is not already underlined. If /MOD/ is already underlined, select /MOD/ twice.
Message:
b.
Indicate a new pivot point.

If the following menu is underlined: /HZ/ /VT/ The message reads: Ind pos / Sel pt / Sel line / Sel new comp / YN flip about horizontal Ind pos / Sel pt / Sel line / Sel new comp / YN flip about vertical
287
Flip the selected elements about an axis by doing one of the following: To flip the selected elements on their pivot about the horizontal or vertical axis, do the following: a. Select /HZ/ (for horizontal) or /VT/ (for vertical) if the correct option is not already underlined. b. Press YN. To flip the selected elements about an axis represented by a line on the drawing, select that line. (This is the line created in step 1.) The selected elements are flipped.
10 Optional: To flip the selected elements back, press YN. The selected elements flip back to their original position.
288
Copying Components and Elements: /COPY/

Use this procedure to move a copy of one or more components or elements to a new location on a drawing without changing the position of the original. If menu option /COPY/ is active (underlined), you can copy elements when you perform a /MOVE/, /TURN/, or /FLIP/ operation.
Steps:
Menu:
Message:
Select /COPY/.
Perform one of the following procedures: Procedure: Moving Components and Elements: /MOVE/ Turning Components and Elements: /TURN/ Flipping Components and Elements: /FLIP/
289
Copying Components to a Detail Page: /COMPONENTS/ /DETAIL/

Use this procedure to copy to the next available detail page one or more component sets, as well as geometry that has not been defined as a component set. After you copy a component set or element to a detail page, you can use function key DETAIL to transfer it to another model, such as a user library model, or to create dittos of it in your drawing.
Steps:
Menu:
Message:
Select /DETAIL/.
To select components or elements one by one, do the following: 3 To specify the or elements you want to copy to a detail page, do one of the following: a. Select a component or element. The component or element you select is highlighted.
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE / / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW // ATTACH / MOD / TRAV // RET /
Message:
b.
290
To trap one or more components or elements with a polygon, do the following:
a.
Indicate a point to start a trap polygon.

Menu:
Message:
b.
c.
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE / / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW / / ATTACH / MOD / TRAV // RET /
Message:
Select or indicate a pivot point for the highlighted elements. To trap one or more components or elements with a rectangle, do the following: a. Press YN to create a trap rectangle.
Menu:
d.
Message:
Ind corner
b.
Message:
Ind opposite corner
c.
Message:
Redefine corner
d.
Optional: To redefine the trap rectangle to add or delete elements, indicate near a corner of the rectangle.
291
e.
The nearest corner of the rectangle moves to that point. You can continue to redefine the rectangle until you are satisfied with the trap. Select /TRAP IN/. The elements trapped by the rectangle are highlighted.
Menu:
Message:
f.

Ind pos / Sel pt / Key DX, DY / Sel new comp / YN create detail
Message:
To specify additional elements to be copied to a detail page or to deselect highlighted elements, do the following: a. Select /MOD/ if it is not already underlined. If /MOD/ is already underlined, select /MOD/ twice.
Message:
b.
c.
Select the component sets or elements you want to add or deselect. Selecting a highlighted component or element dehighlights it and removes it from the group to be copied; selecting an unhighlighted component or element highlights it and adds it to the group to be copied. Press YN.
Message:
Ind pos / Sel pt / Key DX, DY / Sel new comp / YN create detail
Press YN to transfer the highlighted elements to the next available detail page. The highlighted elements are copied to a newly created detail page in the active model.
Info:
292
Attaching Components and Elements to a Ditto

Use this procedure to attach components and elements to a point in a ditto. This procedure requires you to use menu option /ATTACH/ in conjunction with menu option /MOVE/. You specify the objects to be moved just as you do in an ordinary /MOVE/ procedure.
Steps:
Menu:
Message:
Optional: To stretch multilines when you move components, select menu option /STRETCH/ if it is not already underlined.
To select components or elements one by one, do the following: 4 To specify the components or elements you want to move, do one of the following: a. Select a component or element. You can select any component or element except a point that is not a member of a component set. The component or element you select is highlighted.
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE / / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS
293
/ PREVIEW // ATTACH / MOD / TRAV // RET /

Message:
b.
To trap one or more components or elements with a polygon, do the following: a. Indicate a point to start a trap polygon.
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE/ SCALE / / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW // TRAP IN // RET /
Message:
b.
c.
Menu:
Message:
d.
Menu:
Message:
Ind corner
b.
294
Message:
Ind opposite corner
c.
Message:
Redefine corner
d.
e. f.
Optional: To redefine the trap rectangle to add or delete elements, indicate near a corner of the rectangle. The nearest corner of the rectangle moves to that point. You can continue to redefine the rectangle until you are satisfied with the trap. Select /TRAP IN/. The elements trapped by the rectangle are highlighted.
Menu:
Message:
g.
Message:

To attach the highlighted components and elements to a ditto, do the following: a. Select /ATTACH/.
Message:
Sel attach pt or ditto / Ind pos / Key DX, DY / YN same DX, DY
b.
Select the ditto to which you want to attach the highlighted elements. The ditto you select is highlighted. Its pivot point is halloed. All other points on the detail of the ditto are also displayed and halloed.
Message:
Ind pos / Sel attach point / YN accept
c.
Define an attachment point by doing one of the following: Select a point on the ditto. Press YN to use the halloed destination pivot. The pivot of the highlighted objects moves to the point you specified in the ditto.
Message:
295
Optional: To move the highlighted elements by the same distance that you moved them in step 5, press YN.
296
Attaching a Ditto to Any Point in a Drawing

Use this procedure to attach a ditto to any point in the drawing. You can attach the pivot of the ditto to any point, or you can define a new pivot for the ditto and attach that to any point. This procedure requires you to use menu option /ATTACH/ in conjunction with menu option /MOVE/.
Steps:
1 Select /COMPONENTS/.
Menu:
Message:
Select /ATTACH/.
Select a ditto. The ditto you select is highlighted. Its pivot point is halloed. All other attachment points on the ditto are also displayed and halloed.
Message:
Sel attach pt or ditto / Ind pos / Key DX, DY / YN new pivot
To define a new pivot for the ditto, do the following: a. Press YN.
Message:
Sel pivot point / Ind pivot point / YN accept pivot
b.
Select or indicate a new pivot point or press YN to accept the current pivot.
Message:
Sel attach pt or ditto / Ind pos / Key DX, DY / YN new pivot
297
Select any point in the drawing to which you want to attach the ditto. The pivot of the ditto attaches to the point you have specified.
Message:
Optional: To move the ditto by the same distance that you moved it in step 6, press YN.
298
Deleting Components and Elements: /DELETE/

Use this procedure to delete a component set, nested component set, or element. If you delete from a multiline a 1-pin or multi-pin component or any component with a pivot point defined, the multiline automatically reconnects. If you delete a component set that is part of a nested set, CADEX updates the parent set. If you delete all the children of a parent set, CADEX no longer considers the parent set to be a nested set.
Steps:
Menu:
Message:
Select /DELETE/.
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE // STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL / LISTS / PREVIEW // MODIFY / / RET /
Message:
Sel component / Ind point / YN rectangle
To specify the components and elements you want to To select components or elements one by one, do the following: delete, do one of the following: a. Select a component or element. You can select any component or element except a point that is not a member of a component set. The component or element you select is highlighted.
Menu:
/ MOVE / TURN / FLIP / DELETE / SCALE / / STRETCH / COPY / DETAIL / PANEL /
299
LISTS / PREVIEW // MODIFY / TRAV // RET /
b. c.
Sel new component / YN delete To highlight another level of a nested component set, traverse to that level using menu option /TRAV/. Select any additional components or elements to be deleted. You can select additional components or elements as long as menu option /MODIFY/ is
d.
To trap one or more components and elements with a trap polygon, do the following: active (underlined). a. Indicate a point to start a trap polygon.
Menu:
Message:
b.
c.
Indicate additional points to create the sides of the trap polygon around the elements you want to move. You can press YN to erase the most recently created side of the polygon. When you finish creating the polygon, select /TRAP IN/.
Menu:
The components and elements trapped by the polygon are highlighted. To trap one or more components and elements with a trap rectangle, do the following: a. Press YN to create a trap rectangle.
Menu:
Message:
Ind corner
b.
Message:
Ind opposite corner
300
c.
Message:
Redefine corner
d.
e.
Optional: To redefine the trap rectangle to add or delete elements, indicate near a corner of the rectangle. The nearest corner of the rectangle moves to that point. You can continue to redefine the rectangle until you are satisfied with the trap. Select /TRAP IN/.
Menu:
The elements trapped by the rectangle are highlighted.

Message:
Sel new component / YN delete
To delete the highlighted elements, press YN. The highlighted elements are deleted.
Message:
Sel new component / YN restore
Optional: To restore the deleted elements, press YN.
301
302
Chapter 10. Creating Hierarchical Designs

What You Should Know About Creating Hierarchical Designs
CADEX allows you to create a hierarchy of drawings and to move quickly between its levels. You accomplish this by attaching hierarchy attributes to components or geometric elements. Each hierarchy attribute defines a drawing and a position in that drawing. When using the hierarchy function in CADEX, you can select an object with a hierarchy attribute attached to it, and CADEX automatically files your current drawing and calls the drawing specified by the hierarchy attribute. The figure on the next page shows an example of a mechanical design that uses a top-down hierarchy. Hierarchy attributes allow you to define the drawing to be called in several ways. You must identify the group, user, and drawing ID of a drawing, and you can optionally specify a particular view, detail page, screen layout configuration, and window setting of that drawing. You can also call drawings that are members of an overlay family. When you use the hierarchy function to call other levels of a hierarchy, you have the option of filing or not filing the active drawing, the overlay parent, or both. Hierarchies can only be used to connect drawings so that they can be displayed interactively. CADEX cannot trace connections or extract attribute information across hierarchical drawings. Menu Structure When you select menu option /HIERARCHY/, the following menu is displayed:
/ DOWN / UP / TOP / LIST / DEFINE / DELETE // SHOW // FILE /PARENT / RETURN /
303
Selecting this object displays an exploded view of the pieces in the object
Selecting one of the pieces displays an orthographic view of the piece.
Sample Hierarchical Drawing
304
Filing the Active Drawing and the Overlay Parent When You Move to Another Level in a Hierarchy
When you move to another level in a hierarchy, CADEX automatically files your current drawing and calls the drawing for the other level, even if that level is actually just a different location in the same model. If the current model has an overlay parent, CADEX automatically files it too. You can deactivate the filing of the current model and any overlay parent by selecting menu option /FILE/. This option is a toggle; if the option is underlined, it is active. When you deactivate /FILE/, you also deactivate menu option /PARENT/, which controls the filing of any overlay parents. You can deactivate the filing of only the overlay parent (allowing the active model to be filed) by selecting menu option /PARENT/ and not selecting menu option /FILE/. Menu option /PARENT/ is a toggle; if the option is underlined, it is active.
Defining a Hierarchy Attribute

Using menu options /HIERARCHY/ /DEFINE/, you can assign a hierarchy attribute to a component or geometric element. The information you can include in a hierarchy attribute is listed below: Group User Drawing ID Drawing ID of the overlay parent Detail page View ID Screen layout configuration number Window setting When you define a hierarchy attribute, you can specify the group and user that contains the drawing, or you can instruct CADEX to look for the drawing in the groups and users listed in the Hierarchy Libraries section of your Profile. After you have defined a hierarchy attribute for a component or element, you can display the drawing specified in the attribute by using menu options /DOWN/ or /LIST/.
Deleting a Hierarchy Attribute
305
After attaching a hierarchy attribute to a component or element, you can delete that attribute using menu options /HIERARCHY/ /DELETE/.
Displaying a List of the Hierarchy Levels

Using menu options /HIERARCHY/ /LIST/, you can display a list of the drawings contained in a hierarchical structure. This list displays the hierarchy drawings (including detail numbers, view names and window settings), starting at the top of the hierarchical chain and extending down to all the possible drawings one step below the active level. The hierarchy attributes attached to objects in the active drawing determine which drawings are one step below the active drawing.
Moving Through a Hierarchy

CADEX provides you with the following methods of moving through a hierarchy: Moving down When menu option /DOWN/ is active, you can select a component or element with a hierarchy attribute attached to it, and CADEX displays the drawing that is the next level down in the hierarchy, as defined in that attribute. When you select menu option /UP/, CADEX displays the drawing that is the next highest level in the hierarchy, unless the active drawing is the top level in the hierarchy. When you select menu option /TOP/, CADEX displays the drawing that is the highest level in the hierarchy. When you display a hierarchy list, you can select any level on that list and CADEX displays it.
Moving up
Moving to the top
Moving to a level on a hierarchy list
Showing Components and Elements With Hierarchy Attributes

You can show everything in a drawing that has a hierarchy attribute attached to it by selecting menu options /HIERARCHY/ /SHOW/. This noshows everything that does not have a hierarchy attribute attached to it. Selecting /SHOW/ again redisplays everything that is
306
noshown. Menu option /SHOW/ is a toggle; if the option is underlined, it is active.
307
Defining a Hierarchy Library on the Profile Panel

You can define hierarchy libraries on the Profile panel. Hierarchy libraries list up to five groups and users where CADEX can search for drawings called by hierarchy attributes.
308
Defining a Hierarchy Attribute: /DEFINE/
Use this procedure to attach a hierarchy attribute to a component or geometric element. A hierarchy attribute defines another drawing or another position on a drawing as being one level down in the hierarchy. Once this is defined, you can select an object with a hierarchy attribute, and CADEX files your current drawing and calls the drawing specified in the hierarchy attribute, moving you down one level in the hierarchy.
Steps:
Select /HIERARCHY/.
Menu:
/ DOWN / UP / TOP / LIST / DEFINE / DELETE // SHOW / / FILE / PARENT / RETURN /

Message:
Select component / Select element / Key part number
Select /DEFINE.
Message:
Select component or element to define attribute
Select the object that receives a hierarchy attribute. The Hierarchy Attribute panel is displayed. If the object you select already has a hierarchy attribute attached to it, that attribute information is displayed on the Hierarchy Attribute panel.
If the object: Already has a hierarchy attribute defined Does not have a hierarchy attribute defined
The message reads: Select any item to define No attribute defined. Select any item to define.
309
To define the group and user of the hierarchy attribute, do the following: a. Select the Group option.
Message:
Key group (Blank to use Profile) / YN current
b.
To specify the group name, do one of the following: Key in the name. Press YN to specify the current group. Press RETURN. Pressing RETURN instructs CADEX to search first for a drawing in the current group and user and then in all the groups specified in the Hierarchy Libraries section of the Profile. For information on establishing a hierarchy library, see Chapter 10.
c.
Select the User option.

Message:
Key user (Blank to use Profile) / YN current
d.
To specify the user name, do one of the following: Key in the name. Press YN to specify the current user. Press RETURN. Pressing RETURN instructs CADEX to search first for a drawing in the current group and user and then in all the users specified in the Hierarchy Libraries section of the Profile. For information on establishing a hierarchy library, see Chapter 10.
To define the drawing ID of the hierarchy attribute, do the following:
310
a.
Select the Drawing ID option.
311
If the selected object is: A component A text string Any type of element other than a text string
The message reads: Key drawing ID / YN use part number Key drawing ID / YN use text characters Key drawing ID
b.
To specify the drawing ID, do one of the following: Key in the drawing ID. Press YN to use the part number of the selected component or the characters of the text string (if the object you selected in step 3 was a text string).
Optional: To define an overlay parent ID for the hierarchy attribute, do the following: a. Select the Overlay parent ID option.
Message:
Key parent drawing ID
b.
Key in the drawing ID of the overlay parent for the drawing that the hierarchy attribute points to.
Optional: To define a detail number or a view for the hierarchy attribute, do one of the following:
Note: You cannot define both a detail and a view. They are mutually exclusive.
To define a detail number, do the following: a. Select the Detail number option.
Message:
Key detail number
b.
Key in the number of a detail page.
312
To define a view for the hierarchy attribute, do the following: a. Select the View ID option.
Message:
Key view ID
b.
Key in a view ID.

FULL SCREEN
1
LAYOUTS
3 5
2 4 6
POP-WINDOW
Optional: To define a screen layout number for the hierarchy attribute, do the following:
Optional: To define a screen layout number for the hierarchy attribute, do the following: a. Select the Screen layout no. option.
Message:
Key screen layout configuration number
b.
Key in a screen layout configuration number. The drawing at left shows the possible screen layouts available under WINDOW and their layout numbers.
313
10 Optional: To define a window setting number for the hierarchy attribute, do the following: a. Select the Window set no. option.
Message:
Key window set number
b.
Key in a window setting number.
11 Optional: To cancel all changes you have made to the Hierarchy Definition panel, select CANCEL. Selecting CANCEL terminates this procedure.
12 To save your new hierarchy attribute information, select ACCEPT. Your new settings are saved, and the Hierarchy Attribute panel is no longer displayed.
314
Deleting a Hierarchy Attribute: /DELETE/

Use this procedure to delete a hierarchy attribute already attached to a component or element.
Before You Begin: A hierarchy attribute must already be attached to a
component or element
Steps:
Select /HIERARCHY/.
Menu:

Message:
Select /DELETE/.
Message:
Select component or element to delete attribute
Select the component or element from which you want to delete a hierarchy attribute. The hierarchy attribute is deleted.
Message:
Select component or element to delete attribute / YN restore
Optional: To restore the hierarchy attribute, press YN
315
Moving Through a Hierarchy: /DOWN/, /UP/, and /TOP/

Use these procedures to move to different levels in a hierarchy. You can move up or down one level at a time or move to the top of a hierarchy. You can also move to any level displayed on a hierarchy list. If you do not want the current model and the current overlay parent model filed when you move to another level in the hierarchy, select /FILE/ before you begin any of the following procedures. Selecting /FILE/ deactivates the filing of all models. If you want to file the current model when you change hierarchy levels, but you do not want to file the overlay parent model, you can select menu option /PARENT/. This deactivates only the filing of the overlay parent model.
Moving Down Steps:
Select /HIERARCHY/
Menu:
/DOWN/.

Message:
Select component / Select element / Key drawing id
Do one of the following: Select a component or element with a hierarchy attribute attached. CADEX displays the drawing or position on a drawing specified in the hierarchy attribute as being the next level down. Key in the drawing ID of any drawing in the hierarchy structure in the current group and user. The drawing you key in is displayed.
316
Moving Up
Before You Begin:
Select menu option /HIERARCHY/ and travel down at least one level in a pre-defined hierarchy. Steps:
Select /UP/. CADEX displays the drawing or position on a drawing that is one level up in the hierarchy.
Moving to the Top

Before You Begin:
Select menu option /HIERARCHY/ and travel down at least one level in a pre-defined hierarchy.1. Steps:
Select /TOP/. CADEX displays the drawing or place on a drawing that is the highest level in the hierarchy.
317
Showing Components and Elements With Hierarchy Attributes: /SHOW/

Use this procedure to show components and elements with hierarchy attributes.
Steps:
Select /HIERARCHY/.
Menu:

Message:
Select /SHOW/. Everything is removed from the display except those components and elements with hierarchy attributes attached. Menu option /SHOW/ is underlined, indicating that it is active.
To display all noshown elements, select /SHOW/. All noshown elements are redisplayed.
318
Displaying a List of Hierarchy Levels and Moving to a Level in That List: /LIST/
Use this procedure to display the Hierarchy List panel, which shows the levels of the hierarchy that include the active drawing. A hierarchy list displays the active drawing, all the levels above the active drawing, and those drawings that are one level down. Once you have displayed a hierarchy list, you can move to any level on the list by selecting that level. If you do not want the current model and the current overlay parent model filed when you move to another level in the hierarchy, select /FILE/ before you begin any of the following procedures. Selecting /FILE/ deactivates the filing of all models. If you want to file the current model when you change hierarchy levels but you do not want to file the overlay parent model, you can select menu option /PARENT/. This deactivates only the filing of the overlay parent model.
Before You Begin: A hierarchy must already be defined.
Steps:
Select /HIERARCHY/.
Menu:

Message:
Select /LIST/. The Hierarchy List panel is displayed.

Message:
Select level to activate
319
To display one of the levels in the hierarchy list, select that level. The drawing is displayed.
320
Specifying Hierarchy Libraries on the Profile Panel

Use this procedure to specify hierarchy libraries on the Profile panel. These libraries list up to five groups and users where CADEX can search for drawings called by hierarchy attributes.
Steps:
Select PROFILE. The Profile panel is displayed.

Message:
Select option
In the Hierarchy Libraries section of the Profile panel, select the text of any group and user listed. If no group and user is listed, select a dash that represents text. The selected text is highlighted.
Message:
Key in a group or user where CADEX can search for a hierarchical drawing. The group or user you key in replaces the selected text. You can key in the name of only one group or user at a time.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to identify up to five groups and users that can contain hierarchical drawings.
Message:
YN cancel
321
b.
Press YN.
Message:
b.
Press YN. The Profile is reset to the values defined in your CADEX installation.
322
Chapter 11. Connecting Components

What You Should Know About Connecting Components
CADEX provides an array of tools that you can use to connect components in a design. At the most basic level, you can create multilines to connect components. These multilines can represent wires, signals, pipes, or any other type of connection you want. You can create busses to connect a series of pins on a component to a series of pins on another component. You can also use other special-purpose components available in CADEX to connect multilines across sheets and make other specialized types of connections. The figure below illustrates lines, busses, and sheet extensions connecting components. None of the procedures in this chapter is normally used with the General application, because it does not provide for connectivity.
Sheet extension
Line
Bus
Lines, Busses, and Sheet Extensions
323
Creating a Line
To create a multiline that connects one pin on a component to another pin on another component, use function key LINE. Since multilines are traceable, they create valid pin-to-pin connections.
Creating a bus
To connect multiple pins on a component to multiple pins on another component, you can create a bus using menu options /UTILS/ /BUS/ /CREATE/. When you create a bus, you specify which pins on a component feed into a bus. The connecting lines between the pins and the bus are called bits. You can fan these bits into a bus, numbering each bit. Optionally, you can also assign a name in the form of a prefix to each numbered bit. You can extend a bus through a drawing, fanning out some or all of the bits or connecting the entire bus to a one-pin component, such as a sheet extension. CADEX preserves the connectivity information of each bit in a bus. If you set compatibility in your user profile in function key FILES to Visual or Structural, you cannot create or modify busses. If your user profile is set in this way and you select menu option /BUS/, nothing happens.
Setting Bus Defaults

Using PROFILE, you can set the following default values that control how CADEX draws busses: Bus bit number height Bus line width Bus bit style Bus bit spacing Minimum spacing between lines Bus name height For a description of how to change bus default values, see Chapter 4.
Extending an Existing Bus

To extend an existing bus, use menu options /UTILS/ /BUS/ /EXTEND/. You can select any of the vertexes of the existing bus and extend a bus from that vertex. You can also break the bus at any point and extend the bus from the break point.
Naming a Line or Bus

After you create a line that connects two pins, you can assign it a name. To do this, use function key NOTE to create a note of up to
324
72 alphanumeric characters and place the pivot point of that note on the multiline you want to name. (An alternate method of placing a name on a line is to use menu options /UTILS/ /BUS/ /NAME/.) When you run a CADEX background process, any name placed on a line can be listed as wiredata in a report After you create a bus, you can name it using menu options /UTILS/ /BUS/ /NAME/. When you run a CADEX extraction process, any name assigned to a bus can be reported as wiredata for each connection contained in that bus. The bus name appears in a report, followed in parentheses by a bit name or number, such as Busname(Bit1) or Busname(Bit3). If you do not assign a bus name, then any name assigned to a bit feeding into the bus is reported as the name for the connection represented by that bit. If neither the bus nor the bit has a name, then the number for that bit is reported as the name for the connection represented by the bit.
Assigning Attribute Information to a Connection

You can use menu options /ATTRIBUTE/ attributes to connections. /ADD/ to assign
CADEX allows you to connect lines or busses that extend from one sheet of a design to another. To do this, you first create a specialpurpose component called a sheet extension. A sheet extension component consists of geometry and the following system attributes: type, name, pin, and, optionally, pivot point. Next, you place the sheet extension component at the endpoint of a line or bus that extends across sheets. Place another sheet extension component on the corresponding line or bus of a second sheet, and edit the names so that they match. The names of the lines they are placed on must also match. CADEX can then trace the line or bus as though it were continuous. The figure on the next page shows how you can use sheet extensions to connect lines across sheets.
325
Two Examples of Matching Sheet Extensions When you use sheet extensions to connect lines across sheets of a design, you can optionally cross-reference the sheet extension components. You can control the positioning of the cross-reference notes or let CADEX generate and position them for you automatically.
Cross-Referencing Sheet Extensions

To control the positioning of the cross-reference notes, you create in each sheet extension component set a generic cross-reference note with a user attribute called sheet xref. You then set the Generate Sheet Cross Reference Notes option to Yes on the CADEX Extraction Options panel. When you run a CADEX Extraction background process, CADEX replaces the text in the note with the sheet number of the corresponding sheet extension and its zone coordinates, if a zone has been established. If no zone has been established, each cross-reference note reads "No Zone." If there is no corresponding sheet extension, the crossreference note reads "Unused." If there is more than one corresponding sheet extension, you can specify whether the note identifies all of them or just the previous one and the next one. If you set the cross-reference option to Yes on the CADEX Extraction Options panel but do not create and attribute cross-reference notes, CADEX can still provide sheet extension cross-referencing. To do this, the background process identifies the sheet extensions in your design, generates the attributed cross-reference notes, and positions them near the sheet extension components. The placement of
326
automatically generated cross-reference notes might not be ideal, however, relative to the other elements in your design. The figure below shows sheet extensions with cross-reference notes.
Zone location Sheet number
Sheet Extensions With Cross-Reference Notes
Placing Individual Solder Dots

If you create lines that intersect at three-way (T) or crossed-line (+) intersections and you want all the lines at the intersection to be traced, you must place a branch component or solder dot there. You can use a dot symbol as a solder dot. Usually, a designer does not place individual solder dots on a design. Instead, CADEX provides a more automated procedure that uses menu options /UTILS/ /BRANCH/.
Using Special Purpose Electrical Components

You can create components that identify connections as performing a special purpose. Each of these special-purpose components consists of some geometry and the following system attributes: a type, a name, and a pivot point. Shields and coaxes also have a pin attribute. Each of the special-purpose components is described below: Component Cable Coax Shield Twist Function Reports two or more lines as being cabled or harnessed together. Reports lines as being part of a coaxial cable. Reports one or more lines as being a group of lines that is shielded. Reports two or more lines as being twisted together.
327
Drawing Lines Using Different Line Types

CADEX allows you to use different types of lines, such as solid or dashed, to connect components in a drawing. The advantage of using different line types is that when CADEX analyzes drawings during a background process, you can instruct it to ignore certain types of lines. This allows you to exclude portions of a drawing from final reports. For example, some designers place instrument loops in P&ID drawings on dashed lines so that CADEX distinguishes instrument loops from main pipeline networks. CADEX recognizes the following line types (available under menu option /STYLE1/ in function key TYPE): Solid (heavy, medium, and light) Dashed Center Phantom NC
328
Creating and Naming a Line

Use this procedure to create and name a line that connects a pin on one component to a pin on another component. A CADEX background process can report any lines created with this procedure as wiredata. If a line has more than one name, or if the same name is associated with more than one line, CADEX reports an error when you run a background process. Menu options /BUS/ /NAME/ provide an alternate method of attaching a name to either a wire or bus.
Steps:
Use menu option /MULTI/ in function key LINE to create a multiline that connects a pin on one component to a pin on another component. The multiline must terminate at the point defined as a pin.
To name a line, use function key NOTE to perform the following steps: a. b. Place the pivot point of the note on the multiline. Create a note of up to 72 alphanumeric characters.
329
Creating a Bus
Use this procedure to create a bus. This procedure allows you to specify which pins on a component feed into a bus. The connecting lines between the pins and the bus are called bits. You can fan bits into a bus, numbering each bit. You can also name all the bits. (That name becomes the default name for the entire bus.) Finally, you can extend the bus through a drawing, fanning out some or all of the bits from the bus. You can also connect the entire bus to a single pin, if necessary. Typically, you only connect a bus to a single pin when that pin is part of a sheet extension component. If you set compatibility in your user profile in function key FILES to Visual or Structural, you cannot create or modify busses. If your user profile is set in this way and you select menu option /BUS/, nothing happens.
Before You Begin: Define a grid and lock it on using function key POINT. Use PROFILE to set default values for busses.
Steps:
Select /UTILS/
/BUS/.
/ CREATE / EXTEND / NAME // EXIT / Select first pin
Menu: Message:
Select /CREATE/ if it is not already underlined.
Select the first pin in a component that you want to connect to a bus.
Select last pin / Indicate direction
Message:
330
Optional: To create a bus that extends from the first pin, do the following:
a. Indicate the direction you want to extend the bus.

A bus extends from the first pin to where you indicate.
Message: Ind pt / Sel pin / YN backup
At any time during this operation, you can press YN to back up the bus one segment. b. Continue to indicate where necessary. The bus extends to where you indicate. c. Select the pin you want connected to the bus. The bus connects to that pin. The procedure is complete.
Select the last pin in the series of component pins that you want to connect to a bus. A halo is displayed around the first pin you select. This halo serves as a reference aid while you create the remainder of the bus. An information message tells how many component pins connect to the bus.
Message:
Ind pt / Sel pin
To extend the bits away from the component pins, indicate away from the component. Bits extend away from the component, as shown in the following drawing.
331
*
1 2 3 4 5 6
Indicate away from the component. Reference halo
*
1 2 3 4 5 6 The bits extend to a point even with the location you indicated.
BEFORE
AFTER
Menu: Message:
/ CREATE / EXTEND / NAME // TURN / FAN IN // EXIT / Ind pt / Sel pin / YN backup
To continue extending bits, do one of the following: The bits extend to a point even with where you indicate. If you are extending bits horizontally, only the horizontal location of where you indicate matters. If you are extending bits vertically, only the vertical location of where you indicate matters. The following illustration demonstrates the effect of indicating.
332
1 2 3 4 5 6
Indicate to extend bits in one direction.
1 2 3 4 5 6
The bits extend to a point even with the location you indicated.
BEFORE
AFTER
To extend all the bits at a right angle, select menu option /TURN/ and do one of the following:
Message: Indicate first point / Select first pin
To extend the bits at a right angle without connecting them to any pins, do the following: a. Indicate a point where the haloed bit stops after it makes a right angle turn. The last bit included on the bus is haloed.
Message: Indicate second point
b.
Indicate where the last bit (the currently haloed bit) stops after it makes a right angle turn.
The bits make a right angle turn, as demonstrated in the following illustration.
333
1 2 3 4 5 6
* *
Indicate where the haloed first bit will be after making the turn.
Indicate where the last bit will be after making the turn.
BEFORE
1 2 3 4 5 6 All bits stop on a line even with the first location indicated.
AFTER
When you try to turn a series of bits and that turn requires spacing that is less than the default minimum space between lines (set using the Profile), the first bit is placed at your first indicate, and the other bits are spaced toward your second indicate according to the default minimum spacing. To extend the bits at a right angle and connect them to a series of pins without fanning into a bus, do the following: a. Select the pin that you want to connect to the first bit in the series (the haloed bit). The last bit included on the bus is haloed.
Message: Select last pin
334
b.
Select the pin that you want to connect to the last bit in the series. The series of bits connects to the series of component pins you select.
Message:
Sel first pin / YN back up
c.
Message:
Optional: To back up or continue extending bits, press YN.
Ind pt / Sel pin / YN backup
Optional: To back the bits up, do one of the following: To back the bits up an entire multiline segment, press YN. The most recently created multiline segment is deleted. To back the bits up less than a multiline segment, indicate where you want the bits to stop. The bits are redrawn so that they stop at a point even with where you indicate.
To fan some or all bits into the bus, do the following: a. Select /FAN IN/.
Message:
Indicate side to fan towards
b.
Message:
Indicate the side you want the bits to fan toward.
Sel, key bit number / Key @Bus name / Key bit number range = A,B
The bit number range A,B is the default range of bits connecting to the bus. This range is determined by the pins you select in steps 3 and 5. c. To name or number the bits fanning into a bus, do one of the following: To assign each bit a number, key in a number or select some text anywhere on the drawing. The number you key in or the text you select is applied to the haloed bit. After one bit is named,
335
the next bit in the series is haloed. Repeat this step to number each bit fanning into a bus. To number all bits, key in the numbers of the first and last bits in that range or press YN to accept the default. For example, if you want to fan all six bits into a bus, key in 1,6. Six bits are fanned into the bus and are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. To assign both a name and a number to the bits fanning into a bus, do the following: 1) 2) Key in @ followed by the name. Key in the range of bits you want to number, or press YN to accept the default range of bits. For example, if you key in @mast in step 1) and press YN, six bits are fanned into the bus and are numbered mast1, mast2, mast3, mast4, mast5, mast6. The bits are fanned into a bus, as shown in the following illustration at left.
336
1 2 3 4 5 6
Bits with names and sequential numbering fanning into a bus
Menu: Message:
/ CREATE / EXTEND / NAME // FAN OUT // EXIT / Ind pt / Sel pin / YN back up
10 To extend the bus, indicate where you want the bus to go. The haloed end of the bus extends to a point even with where you indicate, as shown in the following illustration at left.
337
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
*
Indicate where you want the bus to extend.
*
The bus extends to a point even with where you indicate.
BEFORE
AFTER
Message:
Ind pt / Sel pin / YN back up
11 Optional: To connect the bus to a single pin, select that pin. The bus extends to the pin you select.
12 Optional: To back the bus up one multiline segment, press YN. The most recently created multiline segment is deleted. You can continue to back the bus up until all that remains is the segment of the bus that was originally created when you fanned bits into it.
13 Continue extending the bus to a point where you want to fan bits out from the bus.
14 To fan some or all the bits out from the bus, do the following: a.
Message:
Select /FAN OUT/.
Indicate side to fan towards
338
b.
Message:
Indicate the side you want to fan the bits toward.
Key no. of bits to fan out = 6 / Select first pin
c.
To fan out bits, do one of the following:
Fan out bits and connect them them directly to pins

To fan out bits by connecting them directly to pins, do the following: 1)
Message:
Select the pin that you want to connect to the first bit.
Sel last pin
2)
Select the pin that you want to connect to the last bit. The range of pins that you specify by selecting a first and last pin determines how many bits fan out from the bus.
Message:
Sel, key bit number / Key @Bus name / Key bit number range = A,B
The bit number range A,B is the default range of bits connecting to the bus. This range is determined by the pins you select in step 3 and step 5. 3) To name or number the bits fanning out of the bus, do one of the following: To assign each bit a number, key in a number or select some text anywhere on the drawing. To number a range of bits, key in the range of bits you want to number or press YN to accept the default. To assign both a name and a number to the bits fanning out of the bus, do the following: a) b) Key in @ followed by the name. Key in the range of bits you want to number or press YN to accept the default.
The bits that fan out are named and numbered sequentially, as shown in the following illustration at left. They
339
connect directly to the range of pins you specified in the previous steps 1) and 2).
1 2 3 4 5 6
The bits are named and numbered sequentially.
6 5 4 3 2 1
Fan out bits without directly Connecting them to pins

To fan out bits without directly connecting them to pins, do the following: 1) Key in the number of bits you want to fan out.
Message: Sel, key bit number / Key @Bus name / Key bit number range = A,B
2)
To name or number the bits fanning out of the bus, do one of the following: To assign each bit a number, key in a number or select some text anywhere on the drawing. To number a range of bits, key in the range of bits you want to number or press YN to accept the default. To assign both a name and number to the bits fanning out of the bus, do the following:
340
c) d)
Key in @ followed by the name. Key in the range of bits you want to number or press YN to accept the default.
The bits you have specified are numbered and fanned out of the bus.
3)
Optional: To extend the bits farther, indicate where you want to extend them. The bits extend to a point even with where you indicate.
4)
To connect these bits to pins, select the first pin that you want connected to the first bit.
Message: Sel last pin
5)
Select the pin that you want connected to the last bit. The fanned out bits are connected to the pins you select.
15 Continue to extend the bus and fan bits out from it as necessary.
341
Extending an Existing Bus

Use this procedure to extend an existing bus. You can select any of the vertexes of the existing bus and extend the bus from that vertex. You can also break the bus at any point and extend the bus from that break point. If you set compatibility in your user profile in function key FILES to Visual or Structural, you cannot create or modify busses. If your user profile is set in this way and you select menu option /BUS/, nothing happens.
Before You Begin: A bus must already exist. For a description of how to create a bus, see Chapter 11. Use PROFILE to set default values for busses.
Steps:
1 Select /UTILS/
Menu Message:
/BUS/.
/ CREATE / EXTEND / NAME // EXIT / Sel first pin
Select /EXTEND/.
Message: Select bus to extend
Select the bus that you want to extend. Halos are displayed around the endpoints and all intermediate vertexes of the bus.
Message: Select starting point / Indicate point to break line
To specify the point where you want to begin extending the bus, do one of the following:
342
To extend the bus from an endpoint of the line or one of the vertexes on the line, select the halo at that point. Only the halo you select remains displayed. To break the bus and extend the bus from that break point, indicate where you want to break the line. A gap appears in the bus where you indicate, and a halo is displayed around that gap.
Message: Ind pt / Sel pin
To extend the bus, indicate where you want the bus to go. The bus extends to that point.
Menu: / CREATE / EXTEND / NAME // FAN OUT // EXIT / Ind pt / Sel pin / YN backup
Message:
Optional: To back the bus up one multiline segment, press YN. The most recently created multiline segment is deleted.
Optional: To connect the bus to a single pin, select that pin. The bus is connected to that pin.
To fan some or all of the bits out from the bus, do the following: a. Select /FAN OUT/.
Message: Indicate side to fan towards
b.
Indicate on the side you want the bits to fan toward.

Message: Key no. of bits to fan out = 6 / Select first pin
343
c.
To fan out bits, do one of the following:
Fan out bits and connect them directly to pins

To fan out bits by connecting them directly to pins, do the following: 1) Select the pin that you want to connect to the first bit.
2)
Select the pin that you want to connect to the last bit. The range of pins that you specify by selecting a first and last pin determines how many bits fan out from the bus.
The bit number range A,B is the default range of bits connecting to the bus. 3) To name or number the bits fanning out of the bus, do one of the following: To assign each bit a number, key in a number or select some text anywhere on the drawing. To number a range of bits, key in the range of bits you want to number or press YN to accept the default. To assign both a name and a number to the bits fanning out of the bus, do the following: e) f) Key in @ followed by the name. Key in the range of bits you want to number or press YN to accept the default.
The bits that fan out are named and numbered sequentially. They connect directly to the range of pins you specified in steps 1) and 2) above.
Fan out bits without directly Connecting them to pins

To fan out bits without directly connecting them to pins, do the following:
344
1)
Key in the number of bits you want to fan out.

2)
To name or number the bits fanning out of the bus, do one of the following: To assign each bit a number, key in a number or select some text anywhere on the drawing. To number a range of bits, key in the range of bits you want to number or press YN to accept the default. To assign both a name and number to the bits fanning out of the bus, do the following: g) h) Key in @ followed by the name. Key in the range of bits you want to number or press YN to accept the default.
The bits you have specified are numbered and fanned out of the bus.
3)
Optional: To extend the bits farther, indicate where you want to extend them. Bits extend to a point even with where you indicate.
4)
To connect these bits to pins, select the first pin that you want connected to the first bit.
5)
Select the pin that you want connected to the last bit. The fanned out bits are connected to the pins you select.
Continue to extend the bus and fan out bits from it as necessary.
345
Naming a Bus or a Line

Use this procedure to attach a name to an existing bus or a line representing a connection. This method of naming a connection is an alternative to placing a note created with function key NOTE onto a line. When you use this procedure to name a bus, you must also specify the range of bits included on that bus. The resulting bus name includes that bit range. For example, if you apply the name ABUS to a bus and you specify that the bus includes six bits, the bus name is displayed as ABUS (1 : 6). In a connection report, the name assigned to a bus is also reported as the name for each connection contained in that bus. The individual bit numbers follow the name and appear in parentheses, such as ABUS (3) or ABUS (6). If you set compatibility in your user profile in function key FILES to Visual or Structural, you cannot create or modify busses. If your user profile is set in this way and you select menu option /BUS/, nothing happens.
Before You Begin: A bus must already exist. For a description of how to create a bus, see Chapter 11.
Steps:
Select /UTILS/
Menu: Message:
/BUS/.
/ CREATE / EXTEND / NAME // EXIT / Sel first pin
Select /NAME/.
Message: Select bus or wire
To name a bus or a line, do one of the following: To name a bus, do the following: a. Select a bus.
346
Message:
Sel, key name = xxx
The name xxx is the prefix (if any) assigned to the bits fanning into a bus. b. Select or key in the bus name.
Message: Key bit number range = A,B
The bit number range A,B is the default range of bits. This range is determined by the number of bits connected to the bus. c. Key in the range of bits to which you want this name assigned or press YN to accept the default. If you create a bit in your design whose bit number is outside the range specified by the bus name, a CADEX extraction program reports this as an error. To name a line, do the following: a. b.
Message:
Select the line to be named. Select or key in the line name.

Indicate position for name
Horizontal orientation
Vertical orientation
347
Indicate a location to place the name. The name is displayed on the segment of the bus or line you have selected. If you indicate near a vertical line segment, the name is oriented vertically. If you indicate near a horizontal line segment, the name is oriented horizontally. The different orientations are shown in the drawing to the left.
Message: Indicate new position / Sel new bus or wire / YN delete
Optional: To reposition the name on the line segment, indicate a new location. The name is moved to the new location. If the name is displayed on a vertical line, only the vertical location of your indicate matters. If the name is displayed on a horizontal line, only the horizontal location of your indicate matters.
Optional: To delete the name just created, press YN.
348
Creating a Sheet Extension Component

Use this procedure to create a generic sheet extension component that can connect lines or busses extending across one or more sheets. A sheet extension component consists of geometry that depicts the sheet extension, a pin, a point defined as a pivot, and some generic text that you later replace with a sheet extension name. You can optionally include a second line of generic text to use as a cross-reference note in a sheet extension component. When you run a background process, you can then replace the cross-reference note with the location of the corresponding sheet extension component.
Steps:
Use PROFESSIONAL CADAM Interactive Design to create geometry that will depict the sheet extension.
Use function key POINT to define a point that will function as the pivot of the component set.
Use function key NOTE to create some generic text that you will later replace with the sheet extension name.
Optional: To create a sheet extension component that you can later cross-reference, do the following: a. Use function key NOTE to create some generic text below or near the note you created in step 3. Keep in mind that this note can later expand vertically or horizontally, depending on the number of cross-references displayed and the number of entries you specify per line. Be sure to place the cross-reference note where it does not interfere with other elements in your design. b. Use menu option /ATTRIBUTE/ in function key CADEX to create a user attribute named sheet xref
349
with the category Component. The attribute can have any valid attribute number. Creating users attributes is described in Chapter 6. c. Using menu options /ATTRIBUTE/ /ADD/ in function key CADEX, attach a sheet xref user attribute to the note you created in step 4b.
Using menu options /BUILD/ /DEFINE/ in function key CADEX, define the sheet extension component set by doing the following: a. b. Define the geometry, the point, and the note(s) as elements in a component set. Using the System Attributes panel, do the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) Assign a Type system attribute of Sheet Extension. Define the generic text created in step 3 as the name. Define the point created in step 2 as the pivot. Define the pivot, the name, or some other point or text string as a pin.
Defining a component set is described Chapter 5.
Place the generic sheet extension component in your user library. By storing a sheet extension component in a library, you can easily copy one into a drawing when you need it.
350
Using a Sheet Extension Component

Use this procedure to place sheet extensions so that they connect lines extending across sheets. If the pivot point of the text used as a sheet extension name is placed on a line, that text can be reported as wiredata for that line. Use the /SPAN/ option in function key NOTE to move the pivot point of a note in relation to its text. If the pivot point of the text does not lie on the line but is still part of the component set, CADEX reports the connection between the lines but does not report the text. When placing sheet extensions in a design, follow these rules:
Place sheet extensions so that each line extending onto another sheet terminates at the pin of the sheet extension component. Assign matching names to each sheet extension component placed on connecting lines. Assign a name of up to 72 alphanumeric characters to each sheet extension component. Do not exceed a maximum of 5,000 sheet extensions per design. Steps:
Use menu options /COMPONENTS/ /MOVE/ to place the pin of a sheet extension component at the endpoint of a wire.
Use function key NOTE to edit the name of the sheet extension component. The name you assign can be up to 72 alphanumeric characters. For example, if the sheet extension is named xx, you can replace that with a unique name, such as 1001. CADEX treats this as the name of the component set.
351
An alternate method of renaming the component is to redefine its system attributes using /BUILD/ /DEFINE/.
Use function key FILES to display the sheet containing a second wire that connects to the first wire.
Use menu options /COMPONENTS/ /MOVE/ to place the pin of a second sheet extension component at the endpoint of the second wire.
Use function key NOTE to edit the name of the second sheet extension component so that it matches the first. If the sheet extension names match but the names of those lines they are placed on do not match, CADEX will successfully trace the connection but will report an error when you run a background process.
352
Creating a Shield or a Coax Component

Use this procedure to create a generic shield component or coax component. You can use a shield component on wiring diagrams to report one or more wires as being shielded. Coax components report one or more wires as being part of a coaxial cable. A shield component or a coax component consists of geometry that depicts a shield or a coax, a point defined as a pivot, and some generic text that you later replace when you use the component in a design. If you want to connect lines to the component, you should also create pins for those lines to connect to. Figure 35. The figure below shows an example of shielding and coax cable.
SHIELD COMPONENT Shield component
COAX COMPONENT
P1
Name of the shield component
P2
P1
Coax component Name of the coax component
P2
1 2 3
SHLDA
SHLDB DB
1 2 3
1 2 3
CXA
CXB
1 2 3
Shading shows shielded lines
Shading shows lines included in the cable
Shielding Lines and Coaxial Cable
353
Steps:
Use CATIA/CADAM Drafting to create the geometry that will depict the shield or the coax. Note: Do not use symbols to depict a special purpose component, since CADEX cannot recognize any symbol geometry as intersecting a line except for the symbol pivot.
Use function key POINT to define one or more points that will function as pins.
Use function key NOTE to create some generic text that you will later replace with the shield name or coax name.
Using menu options /BUILD/ /DEFINE/ in function key CADEX, define the component set by doing the following: a. b. Define the geometry, the note, and the points as elements in a component set. Using the System Attributes panel, do the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) Assign a Type system attribute of Shield or Coax. Define the generic text created in step 4 as the name. Define the point created in step 2 as the pivot. Define the points created in step 4 as pins.
Place the generic component in your user library.
354
By storing a component in a library, you can easily copy one into a drawing when you need it.
355
Using a Shield or a Coax Component

Use this procedure to place a shield component or a coax component on a wiring diagram so that CADEX reports the lines it intersects as being shielded or part of a coaxial cable. When placing shield or coax components on a wiring diagram, follow these rules:
Place and size the component so that it intersects each line you want shielded or included in the coax. CADEX internally creates a box around the component. Any lines that pass through the box are considered shielded or part of a coax.
Replace the generic name of the component with a unique name.
Do not exceed a maximum of 2,000 shield components or coax components per design.
You can place a different shield component or coax component at each end of a connection. If you do this, the different components can be reported as "from" and "to" entries in a from-to list.
Steps:
Use menu options /COMPONENTS/ /MOVE/ to move a copy of a generic shield or coax component to a position where it intersects the lines you want shielded or included in the coax.
If necessary, adjust the size or position of the component so that it intersects the lines you want shielded or included in the coax.
If you want to connect wires to the shield or coax component, use function key LINE to create multilines that connect to the pins on the component.
356
Use function key NOTE to edit the name of the component. The name you assign can be up to 72 alphanumeric characters. If you do not assign a name, CADEX assigns to the shield a name of SHLDn, where n represents the number of each different shield component. CADEX assigns to the coax a name of CXn, where n represents the number of each different coax component.
357
Creating a Twist or a Cable Component

Use this procedure to create a generic twist component or cable component. You can use twist components on wiring diagrams to report two or more wires as being twisted together. Cable components report two or more wires as being cabled or harnessed together. A twist or a cable component consists of geometry that depicts the twist or cable, a point defined as a pivot, and some generic text that you later replace when you place the component in a design. Figure 36. The figure below shows an example of a twist component and a cable component.
TWISTED COMPONENT Twist component CABLE COMPONENT Cable component
P1
Name of the twist component
P2
P1
XYZ
P2
1 2 3
TWTA
TWTB
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
Shading shows twisted lines
Shading shows cabled lines
Twisted Line and Cabled Lines
Steps:
Use CATIA/CADAM Drafting to create the geometry that will depict the twist component or the cable component. Note: Do not use symbols to depict a special purpose component, since CADEX cannot recognize any symbol geometry as intersecting a line except for the symbol pivot.
358
Use function key NOTE to create some generic text that you will later replace with the twist name or the cable name.
Using menu options /BUILD/ /DEFINE/ in function key CADEX, define the component set by doing the following: a. b. Define the geometry, the note, and the point as elements in a component set. Using the System Attributes panel, do the following: 1) 2) 3) Assign a Type system attribute of Twist or Cable. Define the generic text created in step 3 as the name. Define the point created in step 2 as the pivot.
Place the generic component in your user library. By storing a component in a library, you can easily copy one into a drawing when you need it.
359
Using a Twist or a Cable Component

Use this procedure to place a twist component or a cable component on a wiring diagram so that CADEX reports the lines it intersects as being twisted or cabled together. When placing twist or cable components on a wiring diagram, follow these rules:
Place the component so that it intersects each line to be twisted or cabled together. CADEX internally creates a box around the component. Any lines that pass through the box are considered twisted or cabled.
Replace the generic name of the component with a unique name.
Do not exceed a maximum of 2,000 twist components or cable components per design.
You can place a different twist component at each end of a connection. If you do this, the different components can be reported as "from" and "to" entries in a from-to list. You can place only one cable on a connection.
Steps:
Use menu options /COMPONENTS/ /MOVE/ to move a copy of a generic twist or cable component to a position where it intersects the lines you want twisted or cabled.
If necessary, adjust the size or position of the component so that it intersects the lines you want twisted or cabled.
Use function key NOTE to edit the name of the component.
360
The name you assign can be up to 72 alphanumeric characters. If you do not assign a name, CADEX assigns the twist a name of TWTn, where n represents the number of each different twist component. CADEX assigns the cable a name of CABn, where n represents the number of each different cable component.
Placing Individual Solder Dots

Use this procedure to place a dot symbol on a drawing. A dot functions as a solder dot and allows CADEX to properly trace intersecting lines on connectivity diagrams. Generally, designers do not use this procedure to place individual dots; instead, designers place solder dots or branch components on a design automatically using menu options /UTILS/ /BRANCH/. Place individual dots at every three-way (T) intersection and crossed-line intersection (+) that you want traced.
Steps:
Use function key SYMBOL to place a copy of a dot symbol on the drawing.
Position the pivot of the symbol on a three-way or crossed-line intersection.
361
Chapter 12. Using Utilities

What You Should Know About Using Utilities
With menu option /UTILS/, you can: Create components that can be added to the system libraries. Create a part number replacement table. Create a zone matrix. Align text. Create and place branch components or solder dots. Find and change text strings. Create busses to connect components. Add or remove ladders on a wiring diagram.
Menu Structure When you select menu option /UTILS/, the following menu is / LADDER / BRANCH / BUS // RETURN / displayed:
/ NEW PART / TEXT FLIP / PART REPL TABLE / ZONE
Creating Components in System Libraries

Menu options /UTILS/ /NEW PART/ allow you to create new components that can be added to system libraries. Chapter 7 describes how to create libraries.
362
Creating a Part Number Replacement Table

Menu options /UTILS/ /PART REPL TABLE/ allow you to create a table that associates reference designators assigned to components with their part numbers. Part number replacement tables are especially useful if your design calls for many of the same components and you want to uniquely identify each one on a design without displaying its part number. When you submit a CADEX Extraction background process and turn on part number replacement, the resulting report displays the correct part number for every reference designator entered in a part number replacement table. For example, you may label 10 identical resistors in a design as R01 through R10 and then specify in the part number replacement table that values of R01 through R10 are equal to a part number, such as RLR07. When you submit a CADEX Extraction process and turn on the replacement of part numbers, values of R01 through R10 are reported as the reference designators for components with a part number of RLR07. The part number replacement table affects the reporting of reference designators only in background processes. You cannot replace part numbers when you generate reports interactively using menu option /REPORT/. For a description of how to turn on the replacement of part numbers in a CADEX Extraction process, see Chapter 15.
Creating a Zone Matrix

Menu options /UTILS/ /ZONE/ allow you to create a matrix that divides your drawing into zones. You can then define a report format with a zone field to generate a report that lists the location of components by their zone coordinates.
Flipping Misaligned Text

Menu options /UTILS/ /TEXT FLIP/ allow you to flip text so that it is oriented correctly. Text strings rotated so that they are oriented within 91 and 270 degrees are flipped so that they read left to right. When you flip text, any text strings rotated so that they are oriented within 271 and 90 degrees are not affected. When CADEX flips text like this, it also flips the justification of every affected text string. The figures below illustrate how CADEX flips text strings.
363
90
180
271
Text Rotated Between 271 and 90 Degrees Does Not Flip
91
91
180
180
0 ?
270
270
BEFORE
AFTER
Text Rotated Between 91 and 270 Degrees Flips
364
Creating and Placing Branch Components or Solder Dots

Menu options /UTILS/ /BRANCH/ allow you to automatically place branch components or symbols wherever lines connecting components form three-way (T) intersections. Branch components enable CADEX to trace these intersections correctly. You must place a branch component or a symbol (generally a solder dot symbol) at every three-way intersection. Usually, placing branch components is the last procedure you perform when creating a design and before you run a background process to trace the design.
Creating Busses
Menu options /UTILS/ /BUS/ allows you to create busses to connect a series of pins on one component to a series of pins on another component. Creating busses is described in Chapter 11.
Creating and Removing Ladders

Menu options /UTILS/ /LADDER/ allow you to add ladders to or remove ladders from a drawing. Ladder diagrams are used only in wiring diagrams and feature a series of horizontal or vertical lines called rungs that can be designed to span any part of the drawing. Typically, relay component sets are scattered along the rungs of a ladder and are cross-referenced by their sheet number and rung location when you run a background process. For more information about creating, using, and cross-referencing relays in a ladder diagram, see Chapter 13 .
365
Creating a Part Number Replacement Table: /PART REPL TABLE/

Use this procedure to create a part number replacement table that associates reference designators assigned to components with their part numbers. A typical part number replacement table is shown in the figure below.
Sample Part Number Replacement Table If you are using sequential sheet numbering, create this table on a detail page of the first sheet of your design. If you are using an overlay family, place the part number replacement table on a detail page of the first model in the overlay family list. Use only one part number replacement table per design. Do not rotate or flip the table. After you create the frame of a part number replacement table, you must fill it in with component information. The left side of the table contains notes listing reference designators; the right side contains notes listing part numbers that correspond to these reference designators. For notes on each side of the table to correspond, their pivot points must be placed at the same Y coordinate.
366
Before You Begin: Use function key DETAIL to access a detail page of the first sheet of the design.
Steps:
Select /UTILS/.
Select /PART REPL TABLE/.

Message:
Ind corner
Indicate a location on the detail page for one corner of the part number replacement table. One corner of a rectangle is defined at the indicated point, and the opposite corner moves with the cursor.
Message:
Indicate the opposite corner. A rectangle is displayed.

Message:
Redefine corner / YN create columns and headers
Optional: To redefine a corner of the rectangle, indicate near that corner. The nearest corner of the rectangle moves to where you indicate.
Press YN. The rectangle transforms from a box into a table with column headers.
367
To enter a reference designator in the table, do the following: a. Use function key NOTE to place the pivot point of a note on the left half of the table. Key in a reference designator. Follow these guidelines when keying in reference designators: Limit the note to 32 characters, including leading blanks. Match the reference designator in the table with the reference designator of a component used in the design. Use commas to separate references designators that are not sequential, such as R01,R03,R07. Use hyphens to denote a range between two reference designators. If you are listing a range of reference designators where the first has a prefix, then the second does not need one. For example, R01-10 is the same as R01-R10. Do not exceed a maximum of 2,000 reference designators in a part number replacement table. Remember that an entry such as R01-2000 means 2,000 reference designators. When 2,000 reference designators are exceeded and you run a background process, a system error is written to the documentation model generated for that background process. Do not enter a generic reference designator (an alphanumeric character followed by xx, such as Uxx or Cxx) in the left side of the table.
b.
To enter a part number that corresponds to a reference designator in the table, do the following: a. Use function key LINE to create a horizontal line through the pivot point of the note representing the reference designator.
368
b.
Place the pivot point of the part number note on the horizontal line in the right half of the table. Alternately, you can place the pivot point of the note at the same Y coordinate as the pivot point of the reference designator note.
c.
Key in the part number. Follow these guidelines when keying in part numbers: Limit the part number to 16 characters. The part number must be on the same horizontal line (the same Y coordinate) as the corresponding reference designators.
To enter more corresponding reference designators and part numbers, return and repeat steps 7 and 8 as necessary.
369
Creating a Zone Matrix: /ZONE/

Use this procedure to create a zone matrix that can be used to report the location of components in a design. After you define it, the zone matrix is displayed only when menu option /ZONE/ is selected. To report the zone coordinates of components, you must also define a zone field for your report format. Defining fields in a report is described in Chapter 14.
Steps:
Select /UTILS/.
Menu:
Message:
Sel menu
Select /ZONE/.
Message:
Ind, sel first corner of zone boundary
Indicate or select a point to define the first corner of the zone boundary.
Message:
Ind, sel opposite corner of zone boundary
Indicate or select a point to define the opposite corner of the zone boundary.
Message:
Ind, sel point to redefine zone boundary / Key horizontal units
Optional: To redefine the zone boundary, indicate or select a point near a corner of the boundary.
370
Key in the range of units, separated by a hyphen, for the horizontal axis of the matrix. The range can be expressed as either alphabetic or numeric characters. For example, for a numeric, four-unit range, key in 1-4.
Message:
Key vertical units
Key in the range of units, separated by a hyphen, for the vertical axis of the matrix. The spacing between each horizontal unit and each vertical unit is calculated from the range of units you keyed in, and the completed matrix is displayed over the current drawing. The Zone Matrix Parameters panel is also displayed, shown in the figure below.
Zone
Zone Matrix Parameters
Distance from origin Left to right characters Left to right spacing Bottom to top spacing
= = = =
-2.3, -40.5 1-4 A-D 15.85 12.85
Bottom to top characters =
Zone Matrix Parameters Panel
Message:
Ind, sel point to redefine zone boundary / Select option
Optional: To modify the zone matrix, do one of the following: To redefine the zone boundary box, indicate or select a point near a corner of the box.
371
The revised zone matrix is displayed, and the values for any affected zone matrix parameters are updated on the panel to reflect the changes. To change one of the zone matrix parameters, select that option on the panel and key in a new value. The new value is displayed on the panel, and the revised zone matrix is displayed.
372
Flipping Misaligned Text: /TEXT FLIP/

Use this procedure to flip text so that it is oriented correctly. Any text string rotated so that it is oriented between 271 and 90 degrees is not affected. Text strings rotated so they are oriented between 91 and 270 degrees are flipped. When you use this procedure to flip text, the justification of every text string is inverted. This allows flipped text to behave correctly when you modify it in the future.
Steps:
Select /UTILS/.
Menu:
/ NEW PART / TEXT FLIP / PART REPL TABLE / BRANCH / BUS // RETURN /
Select /TEXT FLIP/.

Message:
YN align text
Press YN. CADEX realigns all text strings oriented between 91 and 270 degrees.
373
Placing Branch Components and Solder Dots: /BRANCH/

Use this procedure to automatically place branch components or symbols wherever lines that connect components form three-way (T) intersections. Branch components enable CADEX to trace these connections correctly. Before you automatically place branch components, you must first use function key GROUP to trap the geometry in which you want them placed. You can then specify the type of component or symbol you want placed. Your options vary as follows: Application:Procedure: Printed circuit boards Wiring diagrams Place a dot symbol at all three-way connections. Place a 1-pin branch component at all three-way connections, or define some other 1-pin component as a branch component and place it at all three-way connections.
When you place a branch component or symbol at an intersection, CADEX breaks the lines around the component so that all three lines terminate at the center of the component. A branch component is automatically placed at all intersections that meet the following requirements:
The intersection is trapped using function key GROUP.
The lines at the intersection meet at a 90-degree angle.
374
One line terminating
Three lines terminating
375
Only one terminates at the intersection, or all three lines terminate at the intersection. These situations are shown in the drawing above.
A branch component does not already exist at that intersection.

When you perform this procedure, you can place any of the following at three way intersections:
Any arbitrary dot, which CADEX automatically defines as a branch component.
Any component that exists on the drawing.
The default solder dot symbol.

Rather than place branch components on your drawing automatically, you can also use menu option /MOVE/ to place individual copies of branch components at intersections.
Steps:
Use menu option /TRAP/ under function key GROUP to trap the part of the drawing in which you want branch components automatically placed. If you want to place branch components on the entire drawing, use menu option /TRAP OUT/ under function key GROUP to trap the entire drawing. For more information on function key GROUP, see the CATIA/CADAM Drafting User's Guide.
Select /UTILS/.
376
Menu:
Message:
Sel menu
Select /BRANCH/.
Message:
Key dot radius / Key negative detail / Sel comp / YN accept dot radius
CADEX lists the default solder dot radius on the information line.
To define the type of branch component or symbol that is placed at all intersections, do one of the following: To define any arbitrary dot as a branch component, key in its radius. To use a branch component that resides on a detail page of the active drawing, key in a dash (-) followed by the detail page number. For example, key in detail page number 2 as -2. CADEX copies the contents of the detail page and places the 0,0 coordinate of those contents at the intersection. You can create 1-pin components for wiring diagram drawings on the detail pages of the drawing and then automatically place them on the drawing using this option. To use a branch component that already exists on the drawing, select that component. To use the default dot symbol, press YN. CADEX places the defined branch component at each three-way intersection in the trapped group.
Message:
YN delete
377
Optional: To erase the branch components or symbols you just placed, press YN.
378
Creating a Ladder: /LADDER/

Use this procedure to create the frame for a ladder diagram. CADEX background processes can use the horizontal or vertical rungs on a ladder to reference the location of component sets placed in your design.
Steps:
Select /UTILS/.
Menu:
Select /LADDER/.
Message:
Ind, sel top / Key top X,Y / YN accept

Menu:
/ CREATE / DELETE // VERT / HORIZ // TEXT / RUNGS / DOTS // RETURN /
Optional: Define the horizontal or vertical placement of the ladder by selecting /HORIZ/ or /VERT/. You can select /HORIZ/ or /VERT/ to toggle between these two options. When /HORIZ/ is active CADEX creates a ladder with horizontal rails and vertical rungs. When /VERT/ is active CADEX creates a ladder with vertical rails and horizontal rungs.
Optional: Use the following menu options to display or to not display text, rungs, or dots: Select /TEXT/ to toggle between displaying and not displaying the ladder rung text.
379
Rung text is always created but can be noshown. Select /RUNGS/ to toggle between displaying and not displaying the ladder's rungs. Select /DOTS/ to toggle between displaying and not displaying the dots that show the rung connections to the ladder borders.
Define the upper-left location of the ladder by doing one of the following: Indicate a location or select a point in the upper-left corner of the drawing. Key in the X and Y coordinates of a point in the upper-left corner of the drawing. Press YN to accept the default top values. Optional: Toggle the vertical and horizontal placement of the ladder rungs by selecting /HORIZ/ or /VERT/.
Message:
Key distance between each rung / YN accept

Info:
Distance between rungs = .500000
The default distance between each rung is .500000.
Specify the distance between each rung by doing one of the following: Key in a distance. Press YN to accept the displayed default distance.
Message:
Ind, sel bottom / Key number of rungs / YN accept

Info:
Number of rungs = 40
The default number of rungs is 40.
380
Define the number of rungs for the ladder diagram by doing one of the following: Indicate a location or select a point at the bottom of the ladder diagram. CADEX uses your previous specifications for rung distance and upper and lower ladder location to determine the number of rungs. Key in the number of rungs that you want displayed. Press YN to accept the default value.
Message:
Ind, sel width of ladder / Key width / YN accept

Info:
Ladder width = 13.5000
The default ladder width is 13.5000.
Define the ladder width by doing one of the following: Indicate a location or select a point on the drawing for the right edge of the ladder. Key in the width of the ladder. Press YN to accept the default width value.
Message:
Key starting rung number / YN accept

Info:
Starting rung number = 1
The default starting rung number is 1.
Define the text value for the ladder rungs by doing one of the following: Key in a number for the starting rung value. Press YN to accept the default starting rung value. The ladder is displayed.
381
Message:
Select menu / YN delete
10 Optional: Press YN to delete the ladder you just created.
382
Removing a Ladder: /LADDER/

Use this procedure to remove a defined ladder from your drawing at any time. Menu options /LADDER/ /DELETE/ remove only the text on the ladder. You must use function key SHOW to remove its rungs and dots.
Before You Begin: A ladder must be displayed
Steps:
Select /UTILS/.
Menu:
Select /LADDER/.
Menu:
/ CREATE / DELETE // VERT / HORIZ // TEXT / RUNGS / DOTS // RETURN /

Message:
Ind,sel top / Key top X,Y /YN accept
Select /DELETE/.
Message:
Select ladder rung text
Select on the ladder any ladder rung text you want to erase. CADEX highlights the text along the ladder you selected and displays a box depicting the boundary of the ladder.
Message:
Select new rung text / YN delete
383
Optional: Select new rung text if the ladder you selected was not the ladder you wish to delete. CADEX highlights the text of the new ladder selection.
Press YN to delete the text of the ladder.
Optional: Use function key SHOW to delete the ladder's rungs and dots.
384
385
Chapter 13. Using Relays

What You Should Know About Using Relays
CADEX allows you to create relays, store them in libraries, and copy them into wiring diagrams. It also allows you to perform the following procedures using background processes:
Cross-reference relay parts to each other. Cross-reference a complete relay and display the cross-references next to a "dummy" version of the relay. Check for errors in a relay and package it by assigning physical pin numbers to logical pin names. Back-annotate a drawing, replacing logical pin names with physical pin numbers.
All of the procedures in this chapter are normally used for creating electrical designs.
Defining a Relay
To define a relay, you first build a separate component set for the coil and for each contact. Together these separate subcomponents constitute the relay. Each of these component sets should include a string of generic text; when you run a cross-referencing background process, CADEX replaces this string with the location of the other parts of the relay. The relay geometry you create can depict the complete relay or, more typically, just the coil and each type of contact you need. You can later copy each type of contact into the drawing as many times as is necessary to create a full representation of the relay. For example, if your relay has five normally open contacts, create a component for one normally open contact. When you retrieve the relay from your library, you can place five copies of the normally open contact onto your wiring diagram. After you define the subcomponents that comprise a relay, you create and attach to each the following special attributes.
You attach an xref attribute to the generic text included in every component. You attach a relay attribute and assign a data value for that attribute to every component in a relay.
386
The data value you assign to the relay attribute is determined by the function of the relay component: assign a COIL value to coils, an NC value to normally closed contacts, and an NOC value to normally open contacts. If you plan to package the relay, its subcomponents must also have the following elements: Element Package ID Description An identifier used to match the subcomponent with its packaging data stored in a packaging library. The package ID can be either the subcomponent's part number or a user attribute whose data value matches the PART NUMBER field on the Data Packaging NPI page. Within each component, only one of its subcomponents must have a package ID. If you assign package IDs to more than one subcomponent, be sure that the package IDs match. Subcomponent Type An identifier used to match the subcomponent with its packaging data on a Data Packaging NPI page. The logical pin names on the subcomponents, which must match the pseudo-pin names on the Data Packaging NPI page. Component packaging replaces the pseudo-pin names with package (physical) pin names. Associativity Data Component cross-referencing information which defines the relationship between subcomponents. (Subcomponents may be associated by reference designators, reference designators and part numbers, or reference designators and group and location attributes.) This data must be provided because component cross-referencing is required for component packaging. You can also create as part of each subcomponent a generic note that will be replaced by SLOT ID text when the model is backCATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide 387
Pin Names
annotated with packaging data. This allows you to control the size and placement of the data on your drawing. After you have defined a relay, you can place it in a user library, or your system administrator can place it in a system library.
Defining an NPI Page for Packaging Data

If you plan to package the relay, you must also define a Packaging Data NPI page. Unlike the New Part Information page used to place components in a system library, this NPI page contains fields for subcomponent definitions needed to accomplish the packaging. The following list describes the fields on the Packaging Data NPI page: Field PART NUMBER Description The part number of the master component (also called the package ID). Any text you want to use to describe the component. The number 3, which identifies this NPI page as packaging data. An identifier that corresponds to the subcomponent in your drawing. You can identify the subcomponent by its part number, or you can attach a user attribute called subcomponent type and use its data value as an identifier. The subcomponent type typically describes the function of the subcomponent, such as a coil or a contact in a relay. SLOT ID The section of the package to which subcomponents are assigned. Slot IDs must be unique, and each slot must have a subcomponent type associated with it. A "place-holder" name for a pin. This name is replaced with a package pin name when the subcomponent is packaged. Pseudo-pin names must be unique within each subcomponent type.
DESCRIPTION APPLICATION NUMBER
SUBCOMP TYPE
PSEUDO-PIN
388
PACKAGE PIN
The physical pin number that is ultimately assigned to each pin on a packaged component. Package pin names must be unique within the package.
Placing Relays in a Design

After you have created a relay and stored it in a library, you can copy it into your design and move the parts of the relay to their correct positions. Then you can associate the parts of each relay by editing their generic reference designators so they match. For example, when you place your first relay into a design, replace all of its generic KXX reference designators with K01. Replace the reference designators of the second relay with K02, the third with K03, etc. During a cross-referencing background process, relay parts with the same reference designator and part number are crossreferenced to each other. If you need additional attributes to specify the relay, you can also associate the parts of a relay using a group attribute, a location attribute, or both. If you want relay components that have the same reference designator and part number to be treated as separate relays, you can use a group or location attribute to associate them in any of the following ways:
Assign a group or location attribute and a particular data value to each of the associated components.
The data value functions as the group number of each component.
Assign a group or location attribute to the same note in each of the associated components.
The note functions as the group number of each component.
Assign a group or location attribute to a note that is not in a component set.

The attributed note functions as the default group number for all of the parts on the sheet that do not have another group number assigned to them. The component cross-referencing background process allows you to cross-reference the parts of each relay. You can do this in either of two ways: by cross-referencing the parts of the relay to each other
389
within a wiring or ladder diagram, or by cross-referencing the parts of the relay to a "dummy" component that you draw next to the diagram. The cross-reference locations are expressed in terms of ladder rungs or zone locations, depending on which you have defined in your design. This procedure automatically erases any old cross-referencing text created by earlier iterations of this background process and replaces that text with new cross-references. The component cross-referencing background process also generates a Component Report, which lists each relay component and its constituent pieces (coils and contacts). It also reports the following relay component discrepancies:
Contacts without coils Coils without any contacts Duplicate coils Cross-Referencing Relay Parts to Each Other
In order to cross-reference relay parts to each other in a wiring diagram, each coil and contact component set you create must have a relay attribute and a generic note with an xref attribute. When you submit the cross-referencing background process, CADEX replaces the generic note with the location of its corresponding parts. For every contact, it provides the location of the coil; for the coil, it provides the location of every contact. Typically, relay parts in vertical ladder diagrams are cross-referenced in this way. The figure below shows a portion of a vertical ladder diagram before and after a component cross-referencing background process.
390
BEFORE 2-27 2-28 2-29 2-30 2-31 2-32 2-33 2-34 2-35 2-36 2-37 2-38 2-39 2-40
Generic text
AFTER 2-27 2-28 2-29 2-30 2-31 2-32 2-33 2-34 2-35 2-36 2-37 2-38 2-39 2-40
Text showing the location of the components in the relay
Results of a Component Cross-Referencing Background Process on a Vertical Ladder Diagram
391
Cross-Referencing Relay Parts to a "Dummy" Relay

CADEX also allows you to cross-reference relay parts to a "dummy" version of the relay. To do this, you create on your drawing some geometry that represents the relay you want to cross-reference and define it so that it functions exclusively as a cross-referencing tool. When you run the component cross-referencing background process, CADEX traces only the real parts of the relay in the wiring diagram, not the dummy relay. For each pin in the relay that CADEX traces, it lists the location of that pin beside the same pin in the dummy relay. Beside each relay pin used in the diagram, CADEX lists the location of the dummy relay. Typically, relay parts in horizontal ladder diagrams are cross-referenced in this way. The figure below shows a portion of a horizontal ladder diagram after a component cross-referencing background process.
0001-01
0001-02
0001-03
0001-04
0001-05
0001-06
K01
RELAY 1-6 L K RELAY 1-6 K01 J D
RELAY 1-6 H K01 G RELAY 1-6 K01 B
RELAY 1-6 F K01 E
II K01
C RELAY 1-6 A
K01
"Dummy" component
C E G I
K
D F H J L
Results of a Component Cross-Referencing Background Process on a Horizontal Ladder Diagram
392
Packaging a Relay and Back Annotating the Package Data

When you run a background process to cross-reference relay components, you can also package the relays and back-annotate the package data into your model at the same time. To do this, you must:
Create a Packaging Data NPI page that defines the package. List the location of that NPI page on the Profile panel of your active model. Invoke the component cross-referencing option when you submit the background process.
The component packaging feature assigns each subcomponent to a slot in its package, if possible. For example, Figure 50the figure below shows a Packaging Data NPI page for a relay with a coil, one normally open contact (NOC), and one normally closed contact (NC). The coil is assigned SLOT 1, the NOC is assigned SLOT 2, and the NC is assigned SLOT 3. Once the slot ID is determined, the pseudo-pin names (logical pin names on a relay part) are replaced with package pin names (physical pin names on a relay part). This package data is backannotated to the active model, or to an alternate output model, if you defined one.
PACKAGING DATA
SUBCOMP TYPE COIL SLOT ID SLOT 1 PSEUDO-PIN A B NOC SLOT 2 A B NC SLOT 3 A B PACKAGE PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6
393
If you pre-assign package pin names to a subcomponent or you use a dummy relay in your design, the packaging process will check the subcomponent's type and pins against the packaging data to be sure that they are consistent. If any subcomponent cannot be assigned a slot ID, an error message describing the problem is displayed in the Component Report. Subcomponents cannot be assigned a slot ID if:
Errors exist in the subcomponent definitions on the Packaging Data NPI page. Errors exist in the subcomponent definitions in the design. Subcomponents are improperly allocated.
The results of the packaging process are reported in the Component Packaging Report, shown in the figure below.
"cadx" "sample" "ladder "
EXTRACTION SUMMARY REPORT EXTRACTION PROGRAM RESULTS COMPONENT REPORT COMPONENT PACKAGING REPORT
<-----
FULL DOWN
FULL UP
HALF DOWN
HALF UP
TOP
BOTTOM
----->
PRINT
DELETE
RETURN
Sample Component Packaging Report
394
Defining a Relay
Use this procedure to define a relay. You can then place the coils and contacts of the relay in a diagram and then run a background process to cross-reference the separate parts of each relay. You can also create a specially attributed "dummy" relay that allows you to display the cross-references next to a drawing of the relay.
Steps:
Use CATIA/CADAM Drafting and CADEX to create on a detail page the geometry and pin text for each different part of the relay. The figure above shows a sample relay. Typically, the parts of a relay consist of the coil, normally open contacts, and normally closed contacts. Draw each unique part of the relay only once. For example, if your relay has five normally open contacts, draw the normally open contact once. When you retrieve the relay from your library, you can place five copies of the normally open contact onto your wiring diagram.
395
For each component, create a note to use as a generic reference designator. In the figure above, the generic reference designator is KXX.
For each component, create a note to use as a generic part number. In the figure above, the generic part number is PT NO. If you plan to store the relay component sets in a system library, you can use the same generic part number for each part. If you plan to place the relay in a user library, the generic part number must be different for each different coil and contact (for example, PT NO.COIL for the coil, PT NO.NOC for normally open contacts, and PT NO.NC for normally closed contacts). This allows you to access each of the relay parts when you copy them from your user library to your design.
Optional: For each component, create a generic text string for each piece of data that will be backannotated into the model. Creating this text string allows you to control the position and font characteristics of data such as cross-reference notes that are back-annotated into the model during a background process. (If you plan to package the relay, you can also create a note for the SLOT ID.) If you use system-generated notes, you can define only the height of the note. In the figure on the previous page, the generic text assigned to each component is TEXT.
Use menu options /BUILD/ /DEFINE/ to define each subcomponent of the relay (the coil and each of the contacts) and its corresponding notes as a component set.
396
Using menu option /ATTRIBUTE/, create two attributes, relay and xref, and assign them any available attribute number.
Optional: Using menu option /ATTRIBUTE/, create a group attribute, a location attribute, or both, and assign them any available attribute number. These attributes can later be used to associate relay parts in your design.
Optional: If you plan to package the relay, do the following:
a.
Using menu option /ATTRIBUTE/, create two attributes, slot ID and subcomponent type, and assign them any available attribute number. Use menu options /ATTRIBUTE/ /ADD/ to assign to a slot ID and subcomponent type to each subcomponent. If you created a generic note for the slot ID in step 4 on page 403, assign the slot ID attribute to the note.
b.
c.
Optional: To use an attribute for the subcomponent's package ID, do the following: 1) Use menu option /ATTRIBUTE/ to create a package ID attribute, and assign it any available attribute number. Use menu options /ATTRIBUTE/ /ADD/ to attach a package ID attribute to at least one of the subcomponents. Assign to the package ID attribute(s) a data value that matches the PART NUMBER of its corresponding Packaging Data NPI page. If you assign a package ID attribute to more than one of the subcomponents, be sure that the data value for each is the same.
2)
3)
Use menu options /ATTRIBUTE/ /ADD/ to assign to each subcomponent the relay attribute and one of the following data values for that attribute:
397
Note: If you plan to cross reference the location of relay parts to a dummy relay, assigning a data value for the relay attribute is optional. Data Value COIL Type of Relay Component Assign this value to the subcomponent representing a coil. A relay can have only one coil. Assign this value to the subcomponent representing a normally closed contact. Assign this value to the subcomponent representing a normally open contact.
NC
NOC
10 Assign the cross-referencing attribute xref to the generic notes you created for each component in step 4. Note: If you plan to cross reference the location of relay parts to a dummy relay, assigning an xref attribute to the coil is optional. You do not have to define a data value for the xref attribute.
11 Optional: If you plan to package the relay, create an NPI page for packaging data.
12 Move the relay into a library by doing one of the following: Place the relay in a user library. Have your system administrator place the relay in a system library.
398
Creating a "Dummy" Relay

Use this procedure to create a "dummy" version of a relay that you can use to cross-reference relay parts. CADEX does not trace this relay. When you use a dummy relay in your design, the component cross-referencing background process lists the location of corresponding relay parts next to the dummy relay.
KX
B A D C F E H G
Steps:
Use CATIA/CADAM Drafting and CADEX to create the geometry and pin text for the dummy relay. Include as many contacts and pins in the dummy as there are on the corresponding relay. The pin numbers must match the corresponding pins on the relay. The figure at left shows an example of a dummy relay.
Create a note to use as a generic reference designator (usually KXX). In the figure above left, the generic reference designator is KXX.
399
Optional: Create a note to use as a generic part number.
Define the geometry and notes for the dummy relay as a component set. The reference designator for the dummy relay must match that of its corresponding relay.
Define the dummy relay as a cross-reference component by doing one of the following: Define the part number as xref or include xref as part of the part number. Attach an xref attribute to the component and assign it a data value xref_part.
400
Placing Relays in a Design

Use this procedure to place relays in a design. This procedure gives you the option of associating the parts of a relay using group and location attributes in addition to the normal procedure of associating parts by matching their reference designator and part number. Group and location attributes allow CADEX to distinguish between relays with the same reference designator and part number. Before You Begin: Define a relay and place it in a system library.
To prepare the frame of reference by which CADEX can later cross reference the parts of a relay, use menu options /UTILS/ /LADDER/ to create a ladder or use menu options /UTILS/ /ZONE/ to define a zone matrix.
Steps:
Copy one or more relays from the system library into your design by using menu options /COMPONENTS/ /MOVE/ /LISTS/ or /COMPONENTS/ /MOVE/ /PANEL/.
Using menu option /COMPONENTS/, move the parts of each relay to their correct positions in the design.
Optional: To cross-reference relay components to a "dummy" relay, do the following: a. b. Create a "dummy" relay component. Use menu options /COMPONENTS/ /MOVE/ to place the pivot of the dummy relay component on the same x axis as the rung containing the coil for that relay.
401
Use function key NOTE to replace the generic reference designators of the relay parts with a unique reference designator. Replace the generic reference designator with the next available reference designator. For example, if the last relay components placed in the design have reference designators of K24, replace the reference designators of this set with K25. CADEX cross-references those relay components that have the same reference designator and part number.
Optional: To associate the parts of a relay by using a group or location attribute (in addition to associating them by reference designator and part number), do the following: a. b. Use menu option /ATTRIBUTE/ to create an attribute group. Assign any available attribute number it. Assign a group or location attribute and a data value for that attribute to a component or group of components by doing one of the following: Assign a group or location attribute and a data value to a component set. The data value functions as an identifying name for the component. Assign a group or location attribute to a note in a component set. The note functions as an identifying name for the component set. Assign a group or location attribute to a note that is not in a component set. The attributed note functions as a default identifying name for all of the parts on the sheet that do not have another identifying name assigned to them.
402
Cross-Referencing Relay Components

Use this procedure to cross-reference the location of the different parts of each relay. When you run the component cross-referencing background process, the location of each coil is listed beside its corresponding contacts, and the location of all the contacts is listed beside the coil. If you include a "dummy" relay as part of your design, the location of all contacts is displayed next to the corresponding pins on the dummy version of the relay. The location can be either a ladder rung number or zone coordinates, depending on which you define in your drawing. Before You Begin: To prepare the frame of reference by which CADEX cross references the parts of a relay, use menu options /UTILS/ /LADDER/ to create a ladder or use menu options /UTILS/ / ZONE/ to define a zone matrix. Define a relay and place it in your design. If you want to cross = reference relay parts to a dummy relay, create a dummy version for each relay in your design.
Steps:
Use function key FILES to call any sheet of your design if it is not already displayed.
Submit the component cross-referencing background process. The sheet number and location of each pin that is traced is placed next to the corresponding pin on the dummy relay. The sheet number and location of the cross-referenced part are placed next to each relay pin used in the design.
403
Locations are displayed in terms of ladder rungs if you have created a ladder; they are displayed in terms of zone coordinates if you have defined a zone matrix.
When the cross-referencing background process finishes, you can examine its results by doing any of the following: To examine the cross-referenced drawing, use function key FILES to call the modified drawing. If you did not define an alternate output drawing on the CADEX Extraction Options panel, call your original drawing. If you defined an alternate output drawing on the CADEX Extraction Options panel, call that drawing. The generic note you added to each component is replaced with the location of the corresponding contact or coils. The location is displayed using an SSSS-RRR format. SSSS represents the sheet number; RRR represents the ladder rung or zone location. If the component that was cross-referenced was outside the ladder or zone, the note SSSS-RRR replaces the generic text. If the zone or ladder was not correctly defined, CADEX replaces the generic text with the sheet number and three asterisks, such as S01A-***. To examine the report generated by this background process, do the following: a. b. c. Select the background process on the Background Process List. Select REPORT. Select the Component Report option on the Report panel. The Component Report lists all drawings and components that are cross-referenced. It also lists contacts without coils, coils without any contacts, and duplicate coils.
404
Creating or Modifying an NPI Page for Package Data

Use this procedure to create or modify the subcomponent definitions needed to package components in your design. Components such as relays require packaging to associate and annotate their various subcomponents. To establish a library of packages that you can access repeatedly for various designs, create your packaging data NPI pages in designated package models, not in your design models. Before You Begin: If you want to modify existing package information, be sure that the NPI page for that package exists on a detail page in the active model.
Steps:
Select /UTILS/.
Menu: / NEW PART / TEXT FLIP / PART REPL TABLE / ZONE / LADDER / BRANCH / BUS // RETURN / Sel menu
Message:
Select /NEW PART/. A panel displays a list of the packages NPI pages on detail pages in the active model. If no NPI pages exist in the active model, the panel is still displayed, but it is blank. An information message reports the total number of NPI pages contained on detail pages of the active model.
Do one of the following: To modify an existing NPI page, key in or select its part number. To create a new NPI page, do the following:
405
a.
Select START NPI PAGE.

Message: Key NPI part number / YN application number =3
Info:
Application Number =1
b. Press YN to toggle the application number to 3. c. Key in a number for the new part.
An NPI panel for packaging data and some additional buttons are displayed, as shown in the figure below. If you specified the number of an existing package, the data for that package is displayed. If you are starting a new NPI page, the panel is filled in with dummy data. The text of the active field in the NPI panel is highlighted and is also displayed in the input line at the bottom of the screen.
Message: Select line to edit / Key new field / YN next line
406
Part Number
CONNA TESTPT 2n2222A 54ls01 54t172a 2732
Model
Detail
6 5 4 3 2 1
cadex newlib cadex newlib cadex newlib cadex newlib cadex newlib cadex newlib
START NPI PAGE DELETE NPI PAGE VERIFY NPI PAGE WINDOW
DELETE FIELD IINSERT LINE DELETE LINE PROFILE BACKGROUND

PART NUMBER = PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION = RELAY APPLICATION NUMBER = 3
PACKAGING DATA
SUBCOMP TYPE SLOT ID PSEUDO-PIN PACKAGE PIN
New Part Information Panel for Package Data
407
To edit fields on an NPI panel, do the following: Note: When you edit the PART NUMBER field, the text string of each part number can include blanks. You must, however, separate equivalent part numbers with commas. a. Move to the field you want to change by doing one of the following: Select the line of text. Press YN to move to the next line. Press ENTER to move to the next field. If the next field is empty, a small circle is displayed to denote the starting point for any string of text you key in. Moving to another field makes that field active. b. Key in text to replace the active field. The new text replaces the old text. c. Optional: To insert or delete lines or to delete a field, do one of the following: To insert a line, do the following: 1) Select INSERT LINE.
Message: Select line to insert after / YN insert before current
2)
Select a line or press YN. If you select a line, a line with the word NEW on it is inserted after that line. If you press YN, a line with the word NEW is inserted before the highlighted line.
To delete a line, do the following: 1) Select DELETE LINE.

Message: Select line to delete / YN delete current
2)
Select a line or press YN.
408
If you select a line, it is deleted. If you press YN, the currently highlighted line is deleted. When a line is deleted, all lines below it move up. To delete a field, do the following: 1) Select DELETE FIELD.
Message: Select field to delete
2)
Select a field.
Message: YN delete field
3)
Press YN to delete the selected field. The highlighted field is deleted.
To file the NPI page you have modified, do the following: a. Select /EXIT/. A panel displays the name of the active model. This panel is illustrated in the figure below.
Modified NPI Models cadex newlib 0000 FILE
Select FILE to toggle the model to ABRT (for abort).
WINDOW
PROFILE BACKGROUND
409
410
Menu: Message:
/ ABORT / Select model name to toggle / YN file designated models
b.
Optional: Select the name of the active model on the Modified NPI Models panel if you do not want to save any modified packages. Selecting the name of the active model toggles its designation from FILE to ABRT (for abort). To save your modified NPI packages, skip this step.
c.
Optional: To abort this filing procedure, select /ABORT/ and skip step d. When you select /ABORT/, the new packages you have created are not filed, but they remain in the active model.
d.
Press YN. If the active model is flagged with the word FILE beside its name, the modified packages on its detail pages are filed. If the active model on the list is flagged with the word ABRT beside its name, no modified packages are filed.
411
Packaging a Relay and Back-Annotating the Package Data

Use this procedure to package components such as relays that are made up of associated subcomponents. For relay components, this process changes logical pin names (pseudo pin identifiers) to physical pin numbers (package pin identifiers). It also provides information in the Component Report that shows which parts of the component are used and unused, and back-annotates the active model with the package data. You can define an alternate output ID for a background process to verify the accuracy of the package data before you back-annotate your original drawing.
Before You Begin: Define an NPI page with the subcomponent definitions necessary to package the relay.
Steps:
Use function key FILES to call any sheet of your design if it is not already displayed.
Select BACKGROUND. The Background Process List and the Process Results panel are displayed.
Message: Select process title to view or delete process result / Select process name to run background process
412
On the Background Process List panel, select the Extraction option (under CADEX). The CADEX Extraction Options panel is displayed.
If the Component Xref option is set to NO, set it to YES. Setting the Component Xref option is described on page ? .
Optional: Define an alternate output drawing ID. Defining an alternate output drawing ID allows you to execute a trial process without overwriting the backannotation data in your original drawing.
Select START PROCESS. When the background process is complete, package data is back-annotated to the active model or to an alternate output drawing, if you defined one in step 6.
To examine the Component Report, do the following: a. Select the title of the background process you want to display. A pop-up menu is displayed. b. On the pop-up menu, select REPORT. The Report panel is displayed c. Select COMPONENT REPORT. The Component Report is displayed.
If necessary, correct any errors listed in the Component Report and submit the background process again. Continue to submit the background process until all errors have been corrected.
413
414
415
Chapter 14. Generating Reports

What You Should Know About Generating Reports
Menu option /REPORTS/ allows you to create reports using attribute information extracted from your design. You can save the report formats and generate reports that use those formats whenever necessary. When you save a report format, its name is displayed on the Report List panel. Before you run each report, menu option /REPORTS/ also allows you to specify the source of the data for each report: you can run a report on the active model only, or you can run a report on multiple models using the intermediate files created by a previously run background process.
Creating a Report Format

When you create a report format, you essentially create a template that consists of positions where attribute information is reported for every component or connection in a model. You can save a format and, when necessary, run the report that uses the format. You can also use the same format to create reports when you run background processes. To create a report format, you first use menu options /REPORTS/ /ADD/ to name the report. Then, you perform several subprocedures to further define the report. These subprocedures are described in the following sections.
Define a Report Title, Type, and Description Menu option /TITLE/ displays the Report Title panel, which you can use to modify the reports title, type, and description. CADEX provides two types of reports, an Equipment List and a Bill of Materials (BOM). In the Electrical application, CADEX also provides a Connection report.
Specifying if a Relational Data Base Must be Queried You can use the Report Title panel to specify whether or not CADEX must query an external data base for attribute information to be included in the report, and you can specify whether the model data or data in the external data base takes precedence if there is a conflict between the two. In addition, you can report the default value for an attribute for every component in the model that does not have that attribute assigned to it.
416 CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide
Defining Fields in a Report Menu option /FIELDS/ displays the Report Fields panel. With this panel, you define the format in which attribute information is reported. To accomplish this, you must select the attributes you want reported and define a Field Definition panel for each attribute. The Available Attributes panel allows you to select the user and system attributes, as well as attributes in an external data base, if available, that you want to include in your report. You create the available user attributes using menu option /ATTRIBUTE/. The possible system attributes are system-defined and vary depending on the application mode. They are as follows
System Attribute RefDes
Application Mode General and Electrical General and Electrical Electrical Electrical
Description
Reports the reference designator of a component. Reports the part number of a component.
PartNo
Pin Wiredata
Reports a pin name. Reports an unattributed note placed on a wire or part of a set with a wire. Reports the shield closest to the from side of a connection. Reports the shield closest to the to side of a connection Reports the twist closest to the from side of a connection. Reports the twist closest to the to side of a connection. Reports the coax closest to the from side of a connection. Report the coax closest to the to side of a connection. Reports a connection as being part of a cable Reports the X coordinate of the pivot of a
From Shield
Electrical
To Shield
Electrical
From Twist
Electrical
To Twist
Electrical
From Coax
Electrical
To Coax
Electrical
Cable
Electrical
X Location
General and
417
Electrical Y Location General and Electrical General and Electrical
component. Reports the Y coordinate of the pivot of a component. Reports the group in which the model that contains this component or connection resides. Reports the user in which the model that contains this component or connection resides. Reports the sheet number of the model that contains a component or connection if the model uses the 0001 or s01a sheet numbering method. If the model is a member of an overlay family, this attribute reports the number of the model in an overlay list. Reports the length of the wire represented by this connection. Reports the zone location of the components pivot point.
Drawing Group
Drawing User
General and Electrical
Sheet
Wire Length
Electrical
Zone
The Field Definition panel allows you to define the position and length of a field in a report. This panel also allows you to name a header for the column which consists of these fields and to instruct CADEX to perform calculations on the fields in this column, such as adding or averaging them.
Defining Fields That Perform Arithmetic Operations on Two Other Fields in a Report In addition to defining normal report fields, menu option /FIELDS/ also allows you to create a calculated field, which performs arithmetic calculations on two other fields in a report. To accomplish this, you must complete a Field Definition panel for a calculated field. This panel allows you to identify the two other fields on which CADEX will perform calculations to create an entry in a calculated field. You can also identify the type of calculation you want performed, such as averaging or multiplication. For example, if your report included entries for Length and Width, you could create a calculated field called Area that multiplies the length and width of each component to calculate its area.
418
If your report also included an entry for depth, you could create another calculated field called Volume, which multiplies the area and the depth of each component to determine its volume. Defining Net ID Field for a NetList Report In addition to defining Normal report fields, menu option /FIELDS/ also allows you to use the keyword 'Net Number' to define a NetID field for a NetList report.
Defining Sorting Criteria for Entries in a Report Menu option /SORT CRITERIA/ allows you to define criteria that CADEX uses to determines the order of entries on a report. Using the Sort Criteria panel, you can define three attributes as providing primary, secondary, and tertiary criteria for sorting. For each of these criteria, the sorting direction can be ascending or descending. For example, if you define the primary sorting criteria to be part number and the secondary to be size, CADEX sorts the entries for each component by part number. CADEX performs a secondary sort by size on any components with the same part number.
Defining Options for Grouping Entries in a Report Menu option /GROUP OPTIONS/ allows you to define options by which CADEX groups entries in a report. Using the Group Options panel, you can define three attributes that CADEX uses to group entries in a report. For example, if you define a group option called Color, CADEX groups all components with a color attribute assigned to them. All components with the same color value would then be reported as one line item on the report.
Defining Rules for Reporting Entries in a Report

Menu option /SELECTION RULES/ allows you to define rules that CADEX uses to determine if a component should be reported in a final report. Using the Selection Rules panel, you can define the attribute names and data values that must be assigned to a component (or not assigned to a component) in order for it to be listed in a report. You can define a data value that the attribute cannot equal if the component is to be reported. You can also use and and or to specify combinations of names and values that qualify a component to be reported.
419
Editing and Deleting a Report

After you create a report, you can use menu options /REPORTS/ /EDIT/ to redefine the parameters of the report and menu options /REPORTS/ /DELETE/ to remove a report format from the Report List Panel.
Specifying the Source of the Report Data

You can specify whether you want CADEX to gather report data from the active model or from intermediate files generated by a previously run background process. This allows you to quickly view reports on your active model, another model in your design, or any other model for which intermediate files exist. You can also generate a report from the intermediate files as part of the background process, but you can interactively generate a report from intermediate files using menu option /REPORTS/ whether or not you generated a report when you ran the background process.
Running a Report
After you establish the format for a report and the source of the report data, you can run the report. When you run a report on the active model, CADEX examines the model and extracts from each component or connection the attribute information you have specified. When you run a report using intermediate files. CADEX examines the files you specify in order to gather the required data. If you set the Query RDB Table option to Yes in the report format, CADEX also extracts attribute information from an external data base. CADEX then compiles the attribute information into the format you have defined and performs any arithmetic calculations you have specified.
420
Creating a Format for a New Report

Use this procedure to create a format that CADEX uses when it generates a report. You can create up to 10 different formats for any report. Steps:
Select /REPORTS/. The Report List panel lists default report formats (derived from the CADEX installation), as well as any formats you have defined previously.
Menu:/ RUN / ADD / EDIT / DELETE // ACTIVE MODEL / IFX FILES / RETURN / Message: Select report to execute
Select /ADD/.
Select name of report to create
Message:
Key in the name of the report you want to add.

Menu: / TITLE / FIELDS / SORT CRITERIA / GROUP OPTIONS / SELECTION RULES // ABORT / RETURN /
421
Editing an Existing Format for a Report

Use this procedure to alter an existing format for a report. Steps:
Select /REPORTS/.
The Report List panel is displayed

Menu:/ RUN / ADD / EDIT / DELETE // ACTIVE MODEL / IFX FILES / RETURN / Message: Select report to execute
Select /EDIT/.
Select name of report to edit
Message:
Select the name of the report format you want to edit.

Menu: / TITLE / FIELDS / SORT CRITERIA / GROUP OPTIONS / SELECTION RULES // ABORT / RETURN /
Optional: To cancel changes at any time during the edit procedure, do the following: a. Select /ABORT/
YN cancel changes
Message:
b.
Press YN. The report is restored to the format that existed before the beginning of this edit.
422
Defining the Report Title, Type, and Description

Use this subprocedure to define the title, type, and description of a report. To do this, you complete the Report Title panel. The Report Title panel also allows you to do the following:
Specify whether or not CADEX must query an external data base for attribute information to be included in the report.
Specify which takes precedence if there is a conflict between data in the model and data in the external data base.
Instruct CADEX to use the default value for an attribute for each component in the model that does not have that attribute assigned to it.
Specify the number or not to report all instances of split components.
Specify the number of blank lines that CADEX places between each entry in the report.
Only reports created in a background process can generate fields on more than one line. Consequently, blank lines are only placed between lines of reports that are created using background processes.
Steps:
Select /TITLE/ if it is not already active (underlined). The Report Title is displayed.
Message:
Select option
To change an existing report name, do the following:
423
a.
Select the Report Title option. CADEX displays the current report name on the input line.
Message:
Key report name
b.
Key in a new report name up to 16 characters long. The name you key in is displayed on the panel. Changing a report name creates a report with the new name that is a copy of the report with the old name.
Message:
Select option
To change the report type, select the Report Type option. The report type toggles between Part List and BOM (Connection report and NetList report if you are in the Electrical application).
To create a report description, do the following: a. Select the Description option.

Key report description
Message:
b.
Key in a new description up to 48 characters long. The description you key in is displayed on the panel.
Message:
Select option
Optional: To specify that CADEX will not query an external data base to extract attribute information for this report, do the following: a. Select the Query RDB Table option until it toggles to No. Go to step 7.
b.
424
To specify that CADEX will query an external data base to extract attribute information for this report, do the following: a. Select the Query RDB Table option until it toggles to Yes. A DEFINE button is displayed on the Report Title panel. b. Optional: To change the data source that takes precedence in this report, select the option that reads: MODEL data takes precedence over RDB when conflict. The option toggles to read: RDB data takes precedence over Model when conflict. c. d. Select the DEFINE button. Optional: To update the attribute on the RDB Tables panel, do the following: 1) 2) Select the UPDATE button on the RDB Tables panel. Select ACCEPT to update the RDB Tables panel, or select CANCEL to cancel the update.
e.
Select the name of the external data base table you want to access for this report The table name is highlighted, and its current values for the Model Key attribute and RDB Key Column are displayed.
f.
To change the Model Key Attribute for the selected table, do the following: 1) 2) Select the current Model Key Attribute displayed on the RDB Tables panel. Select a new attribute or select CANCEL to not change the Model Key Attribute value.
g.
To change the RDB Key Column value, do the following: 1) Select the current RDB Key Column value displayed on the RDB Tables panel.
425
2)
Select a new name or select CANCEL to not define a new RDB Key Column.
h.
To complete your modifications to the RDB Tables panel, select DEFINE. Respond to the confirmation panel by doing one of the following: Select ACCEPT to file your settings on the RDB Tables panels. Select CANCEL so that your settings are used only in the current session.
i.
To report default values for attributes, select the Use default attribute data option. This option toggles between Yes and No. When set to Yes, it causes a report to list the default value for an attribute for every component in the model without an assigned attribute. For example, if you set this option to Yes for an attribute called Color, CADEX reports the default value for Color for every component that does not have a Color attribute assigned to it. If the default is red, every component without a Color attribute is listed as being red. Using menu option /ATTRIBUTE/ to set the default value for an attribute is described on page .
To set the number of blank lines between report entries, do the following: a. Select the Number of blank lines between entries option.
Message: Key number of blank lines between
entries b. Key in the number you want. The number you key in is displayed on the panel.
426
To specify whether or not to report all instances of a split component, select the List All Occurrences option. This option toggles between yes and no. When set to Yes, it causes CADEX to count every instance of a component when it generates an equipment list or a bill of materials. When set to No, CADEX considers components with the same reference designator and part number, or components with the same part number and no reference designator, as being separate pieces of the same physical part. CADEX counts all such components as one occurrence. For example, split equipment consists of separate components that have the same part number and reference designator. CADEX counts these as a single component when the List All Occurrences option is set to No.
427
Defining a Field in a Report

Use this subprocedure to define a field that reports attribute information assigned to a component. To do this, you select an attribute name from the Available Attributes panel, and the Field Definition panel is displayed. The Field Definition panel allows you to define the line and column where the field for this attribute appears in a report, as well as the field's length. Using this panel, you can define a header for the column in the report that consists of these fields. You can also instruct CADEX to perform calculations on the fields, such as adding or averaging them. You can select user and system attributes, as well as attributes in an external data base, if available, from the Available Attributes panel. When you are satisfied with the Field Definition options for that attribute, you can accept the format, and the attribute name is then displayed on the Report Fields panel.
Steps:
Select /FIELDS/. The Report Fields panel, and the Available Attributes panel, are displayed.
Message:
Select attribute / Key calculated field name or keyword
On the Available Attributes panel, do the following: a. Select SYSTEM, USER, or RDB to display the available attributes. Select the attribute for which you want to create a field. CADEX displays the Field Definition panel for the attribute you select.
Message: Select option
b.
To modify the format of the field, use the Field Definition panel to do any of the following:
428
To specify the line in the report entry on which data for this attribute is generated, do the following: a. Select the Line no. option.
Message: Key line number
b.
Key in a different line number.
You can generate fields on up to nine different lines,
To change the position of the first column in which data for this attribute is reported, do the following: so you can key in a number between 1 and 9. a. Select the Column option.
Message: Key column number
b.
Key in a different column number.
For example, if you key in 20, the first character of every entry for this attribute is generated in a column that begins 20 characters from the left. The maximum number of characters you can generate in one line is 256. To change the length of the field in which data for this attribute is reported, do the following: a. Select the Length option.
Message: Key field length
b.
Key in a different field length.
For example, if you key in 12, up to 12 characters can be used to report data for this attribute. To change the heading of the column that consists of fields for this attribute, do the following: The maximum field length is 72 characters. a. Select the Column option.
429
Message:
Key column header
b.
Key in a new column heading.
The column heading appears at the top of the column for this attribute. The maximum length for a column heading is 16 characters. To perform subtotal operations on the data reported in the column generated by this field, select a value for the Total option. The possible values are described below:
Option None Sum Max Min Count Average
Function Reports nothing on the total line (default value). Adds the data reported for this attribute. Reports the highest data value listed for this attribute. Reports the lowest data value listed for this attribute. Counts all the instances of this attribute. Averages all the data values listed for this attribute.
Optional: To cancel any changes to the panel, do the following: a. Select CANCEL. Press YN.
Message:
YN cancel changes
b.
Select to confirm the information on the Field Definition panel.
The field information you have defined for an attribute is displayed on the Report Fields panel.
To define additional attribute fields, return to step 2 on page .
430
Defining a Calculated Field in a Report

Use this subprocedure to define a calculated field. This type of field performs arithmetic calculations on two other fields in a report. To create a calculated field, you must key in a name for it, which displays the Field Definition panel for a calculated field. The name serves as the header for the column generated by this field. The Field Definition panel allows you to define the length of the field and the line and column where this field appears. On the panel, you identify the two other fields on which CADEX performs a calculation, and you identify the type of calculation you want performed, such as addition or multiplication. For count operations, you can select fields that contain either alphabetic or numeric values. For all other operations, you must select fields that contain numeric values (i.e., a calculated field or an attribute field whose type is defined as Real or Integer). Using the Field Definition panel, you can also instruct CADEX to perform calculations on the entries generated in the calculated column, such adding or averaging them. The result is displayed in the total line at the bottom of the report.
Steps:
Select /FIELDS/. The Report Fields panel and the Available Attributes panel are displayed.
Message
Sellect attribute / Key calculated field name or keyword
Key in the name of the calculated field. The maximum length for the name is 16 characters. The name you key in serves as the heading for the column of calculated fields you are generating in the report.
Message:
Select option
431
To specify the fields CADEX operates on to generate this calculated field, do the following: a. Select the Field 1 option.
Message:
Select report field
b.
Message:
On the Report Fields panel, select the name of the field that will be operated on.
Select option.
c.
Message:
Select the Field 2 option.
Select report field
d.
Select the name of the field that will operate on Field 1.
To specify the type of operation performed, select a value for the Operator option. The possible values are Add, Subtract, Multiply, Divide, and Count.
To modify the format of the calculated field, use the To specify the line in the report entry on which data for the calculated field is generated, do the following: Field Definition panel to do any of the following: a. Select the Line no. option.
Message:
Key line number
b.
Key in a different line number. If you are running reports using menu options /REPORTS/ /RUN/, you can generate only fields on line 1.
If you are using this report format in a background process, you can generate fields on up to nine different lines, so you can key in a number between 1 and 9. To change the position of the column that consists of calculated data, do the following: a.
Message:
Select the Column option.
Key column number
432
b.
Key in a different column number. The maximum number of characters you can generate in one line is 256.
To change the length of the field in which data for the calculated field is reported, do the following: a. Select the Length option.
Message: Key field length
b.
Key in a different field length. The maximum field length is 72 characters.
To perform subtotal operations on the data generated for the calculated field, select a new value for the Total option. The possible values are described below: To perform arithmetic calculations on the data generated for the calculated field, select a new value for the Total option. The type of operations CADEX can perform on columns are described below:
Option None Sum Max Min Count Average Option Add Subtract Multiply Divide Count Function Performs no calculations (the default value). Adds the data values generated in the calculated field. Reports the highest data value generated in the calculated field. Reports the lowest data value generated in the calculated field. Counts all the instances of this attribute. Averages all the data values generated for the calculated field. Function Adds the value of Field 1 and Field 2. Subtracts the value of Field 2 from Field 1. Multiplies the value of Field 1 by Field 2. Divides the value of Field 1 by Field 2. Counts all instances of the attribute defined in the Field 1 option. This option should be used in conjunction with menu option /GROUP OPTIONS/; otherwise, the count is always 1. Using menu option /GROUP OPTIONS/ is described on page . Unlike all the other arithmetic options, the Count option operates only on Field 1.
433
Optional: To cancel any changes to the panel, do the following: a. Select CANCEL.
Message:
YN cancel changes
b. 7
Press YN.
Select to confirm the information on the Field Definition panel. The field information you have defined is displayed on the Report Fields panel.
Defining a Net Number Field in a NetList Report

Use this subprocedure to define a NetNumber field in a NetList report.
Steps:
1. Select /FIELDS/. The Report Fields panel and the Available Attributes panel are displayed.
Message
Select attribute / Key calculated field name or keyword
2. 3.
Key in the keyword 'Net Number' with the quotes. Modify the format of the Net Number field and select "None" for Total.
434
Defining Sorting Criteria for Entries in a Report

Use this subprocedure to define the criteria by which CADEX determines the order of entries on a report. Using the Sort Criteria panel, you can define three attributes as providing primary, secondary, and tertiary criteria for sorting. For each of these criteria, you can also set the sorting direction as ascending or descending.
Steps:
Select /SORT CRITERIA/.
The Sort Criteria panel is displayed, shown in Figure 100the figure below.
Message:
Select option
Sort Criteria
Field Name Primary Secondary Tertiary Rating Size ** Unused **
Direction Ascend Descend
Sort Criteria Panel
To define the primary sorting value, do the following in the Primary row on the Sort Criteria panel:
435
a.
Select the data listed under the Field Name column. If no attribute has been placed here previously, the data reads ** Unused **.
If the selected field currently has: An attribute defined No attribute defined b.
The message reads: Select report field / YN reset Select report field
Optional: To delete the entry currently displayed in the field, press YN. On the Report Fields panel, select the attribute by which you want to sort entries in a report. CADEX displays the attribute name you select and displays the default sorting direction as Ascending. CADEX will use the data values for this attribute as the primary criteria for sorting entries in a report.
c.
Message:
Select option
d.
Optional: To toggle the sorting direction between ascending and descending, select Ascend. The option toggles between Ascend and Descend. Ascending textual values are arranged alphabetically; descending textual values are arranged in reverse alphabetical order.
To define secondary and tertiary sorting values, repeat step 2 for the Secondary and Tertiary rows on the Sort Criteria panel.
436
437
Defining Options for Grouping Entries in a Report

Use this subprocedure to define options by which CADEX groups entries in a report. Using the Group Options panel, you can define three attributes that CADEX will use to group entries in a report. The figure below shows an example of a Group Options panel.
Group Options
Parts with the same data in the following fields will be grouped together in the report.
Field 1 ==> Part Number Field 2 ==> Location Field 3 ==> ** Unused **
Steps:
Select /GROUP OPTIONS/.
The Group Options panel is displayed.
Message:
Select option
To define the first attribute that CADEX will use to group report entries, do the following in the Field 1 row on the Group Options panel:
438
a.
Select the displayed attribute. If no attribute has been placed here, the attribute reads ** Unused **.
If the selected field currently has: An attribute defined No attribute defined The message reads: Select report field / YN reset Select report field
b.
Optional: To delete the attribute currently displayed in the field, press YN. On the Report Fields panel, select the attribute by which you want to group entries in a report. CADEX displays the attribute name you select. In a report, CADEX group entries for components that have this attribute assigned to them.
c.
Message:
Select option
To define additional grouping options, repeat step 2 for the Field 2 and Field 3 rows on the Group Options panel.
439
Defining Rules for Reporting Entries in a Report

Use this subprocedure to define rules that CADEX uses to determine if a component should be reported in a final report. Using the Selection Rules panel, you can:
Define the attribute names and data values that must be assigned to a component (or not assigned to a component) for it to be listed in a report. Define what the data value for the attribute cannot equal for a component to be reported. Define a wide range of attributes that qualify a component to be reported by using combinations of "and" and "or".
Steps:
Select /SELECTION RULES/.
The Selection Rules panel is displayed.
Message:
Select option
To define a selection rule, do the following:
a.
Select the "have/do not have" portion of the rule to toggle between the two different values. Selecting toggles the rule between "have" and "do not have."
b.
Select the current attribute name (or the ** Unused ** portion of the rule, if no attribute is defined).
440
If the selected field currently has: An attribute defined No attribute defined
The message reads: Select report field / YN reset Select report field
c.
Optional: To delete the attribute currently displayed, press YN. On the Report Fields panel, select an attribute. CADEX displays the attribute name you select and displays a data value for this attribute equal to "anything."
d.
Message:
Select option
e.
Select the "=/ not=" portion of the rule. Selecting toggles the rule between equals and does not equal. To define a new value for the attribute, select the value that is currently displayed.
f.
Message:
Key field data
g.
Message:
Key in a new data value for the attribute.
Select option
To define additional selection rules, repeat step 2.
441
Running a Report
Use this procedure to run a report using an existing format. The report extracts information from either the active model or the intermediate files that you specify and compiles it according to the format you have defined. This procedure also allows you to copy a report to a detail page or a text file, which you can then print. In addition, a .csv format file is also generated for each FromTo and NetList report and can be found in the directory $CCD_ROOT/tmp along with the other intermediate files created.
Steps:
Select /REPORTS/. The Report List panel is displayed. The panel displays default reports (derived from the CADEX installation), as well as any reports you have defined.
Menu:/ RUN / ADD / EDIT / DELETE // ACTIVE MODEL / IFX FILES / RETURN /
Message:
Select report to execute
Select /RUN/ if it is not already active (underlined).
Optional: To run a report on the intermediate files generated by a previously run background process, do the following: a. Select /IFX FILES/.
Message:
Select report to execute / Key in an alternate IFx file name
b.
Key in the name of an intermediate file (including the full UNIX path).
442
You do not need to key in an ifx suffix. For example, to use a set of intermediate files named /tmp/filename.if1, /tmp/filename.if2, /tmp/filename.if3, /tmp/filename.if4, and /tmp/filename.if5, enter only the filename /tmp/filename. The name of the intermediate file is displayed in the message line.
On the Report List panel, select the report you want to run.
CADEX generates and displays the report in a panel.
Menu:
/ PRINT / DETAIL // RETURN /
If you run the report on: The active model (using menu options /REPORTS/ /ACTIVE MODEL/) Intermediate files (using menu options /REPORTS/ /IFX FILES/)
The message reads: Select report entry to center window on Sel menu
Optional: To scroll left or right, select
or
Optional: To display the area of your drawing that contains an entry in the list, select that entry.
The report panel is removed from display, and the area of the drawing that contains the selected item is displayed.
Message:
Select entry to center window on / Sel List button to toggle panel
443
To redisplay the report panel, select the List button in the top left corner of the screen.
Optional: To copy the report onto a detail page of the active model, do the following: a. Select /DETAIL/.
Message:
YN create report on detail
b.
Press YN. The text of the report is copied onto the next available detail page of the active model.
Optional: To print a copy of the report, do the following:
a.
Message:
Select /PRINT/.
Key file name
b.
Message:
Key in a unique file name.
YN create file
c.
Press YN. CADEX writes the report to your UNIX directory called /tmp. For example, if you key in a file name of partlist, CADEX writes the report to /tmp/partlist. You can then print the UNIX file.
444
Deleting a Format for a Report

Use this procedure to delete an existing format for a report.
Steps:
1 Select /REPORTS/.
Message:
Select /DELETE/.
Select report to delete
Message:
On the Report List panel, select the name of the report format you want to delete.
YN delete report format
Message:
Press YN. CADEX deletes the report format.
445
Resetting Report Formats to the Installation Defaults

Use this procedure to reset the report formats to the default report formats derived from the CADEX installation.
Steps:
1 Select /REPORTS/.
Message:
On the Report List panel, select RESET.

YN read report formats from installation defaults
Message:
Press YN. CADEX erases all existing report formats and reads in the default report formats.
446
Chapter 15. Submitting and Viewing the Results of Background Processes

What You Should Know About Submitting and Viewing the Results of Background Processes
You can submit background processes and view their results using BACKGROUND. Selecting BACKGROUND displays two panels: the Process Results panel and the Background Process List panel. The figure below shows these panels.
447
Process Title Extraction Extraction Extraction Extraction
Submit Time 2/14/99 10:09:21 2/14/99 10:25:18 2/14/99 15:32:03 2/14/99 15:40:33
Output ID
UPDATE Status Complete
Complete Complete Executing
Background Process List CADEX Extraction Host to WS Drawing Convert WS to Host Drawing Convert WINDOW PROFILE BACKGROUND
Process Results Panel and Background Process List Panel
448
Process Results Panel The Process Results panel lists previously run and currently running processes and gives you access to their results. Selecting UPDATE displays the current status of all background processes. By selecting a completed process on this panel, you display a pop-up menu, which allows you to view any errors, warnings, reports, and other documentation generated. With the pop-up menu, you can also cancel a running background process or delete the results of a completed background process. Background Process List Panel The Background Process List panel displays the background processes that you can run. When you select a background process from this panel, it is highlighted, and a panel containing options that control the background process is displayed. Background Processes Available The CADEX Extraction process extracts attribute information assigned to components and connections and stores it in intermediate files. You can then use it to generate reports as part of the background process, use it to generate reports interactively using menu options /REPORTS/ /IFX FILES/, submit it to post-processor programs, or load it into an external data base. Generating reports interactively is described in Chapter 5. A CADEX Extraction background process also flags all the situations in the design that generate errors and warnings. By displaying error and warning models, you can examine the geometry and components that cause each violation and fix those that need to be corrected. You can also submit background processes that convert host CADEX models into a format compatible with workstation CADEX or convert workstation models into a format compatible with host CADEX.
Submitting a CADEX Extraction Background Process

You can define the options listed on the CADEX Extraction Options panel to customize a background process so that it meets your needs. Then, you can submit the background process. The option settings for your background process are stored in a separate model associated with your design. This model is called the cadx model (cadx). The system creates a cadx model if one does not already exist. The cadx model has the same base name as the active model or the overlay parent of the active model, if the active model is a member of
an overlay family. If this model is not found, the system searchs for the design rules to be used. CADEX first searchs the active GROUP/USER for a drawing 'cadex_design_rules' and then the group/user CADX/SAMPLE. If these are not found, the system defaults are used.
Options You Can Define for a CADEX Extraction Background Process When you run a CADEX Extraction background process, you can define the following options on the CADEX Extraction Options panel:
Generate Errors
This option allows you to specify conditions in a drawing that generate error or warning messages. When you run a background process, CADEX analyzes a design. When it encounters a violation of one of the conditions you have defined, CADEX stores this information in a separate error model (err) or warning model (wrn). The possible error and warning conditions are listed below. Component without a part number Component without a reference designator Required component attribute not found Inheritance data conflict Requested attribute not inherited Coincident pins Duplicate pin IDs Unused pins Multiple attribute names on the same wire No connection at this location Unmatched sheet extension No pin name found Required wire attribute not found
Trace All Line Types (Electrical Application Only)

You can define the types of lines that are traced during a background process. This can determine the information in a design that is included in any reports. For example, if you create various systems on one drawing, using a different line type for each system, you can use this option to
450
trace only those connections drawn with the line types you specify.
451
Trace Method
This option allows you to specify whether CADEX reports the logical or physical connections of pins in a design.
1 4
Dark line represents an unbroken multiline
Solder Dots
Both trace methods list the minimum set of connections required to report all the pins in a circuit. However, the physical method also reports any physical connections (i.e., connections drawn with an unbroken multiline), even if those pins are consequently reported twice. The logical method excludes any redundant connections from the list. The following connection lines show the results of a logical and physical trace for the circuit example shown above. Logical Trace 1 connects to 2 2 connects to 3 3 connects to 4 Physical Trace 1 connects to 2 2 connects to 3 1 connects to 4 The connection between pins 1 and 4 is reported because it is an unbroken multiline.
452
The following connection lists show the results of a logical and physical trace for the closed loop circuit example shown above. Logical Trace 1 connects to 2 1 connects to 4 2 connects to 3 Pins 1, 2, 3, and 4 are all listed, but the connection from pin 3 to 4 is not listed. Physical Trace 1 connects to 2 1 connects to 4 2 connects to 3 3 connects to 4 All connections in the circuit are listed.
Replace Part Numbers

You can specify whether or not the part numbers stored in a part number replacement table are used in an extraction process. A part number replacement table associates part numbers with a value or range of values that you have assigned to some components by editing their original reference designators. For any component with one of these values, the part number replacement table causes the correct number to be listed in any reports generated by the CADEX Extraction process.
Generate Reports
For every background process you submit, CADEX allows you to generate up to 10 different reports. This option allows you to specify which reports are generated, using predefined formats. Defining reports is described in Chapter 5.
Intermediate File Name

When you run a background process, CADEX generates up to five intermediate files that contain all of the CADEX data from the
453
models you processed. CADEX assigns a name to those files and writes them to your UNIX directory called $CCD_ROOT/TMP. With this option, you can assign to the intermediate files a name of your choosing. You can later refer to this file name to generate reports interactively using menu options /REPORTS/ /IFX FILES/.
Output Drawing ID
You can use this option to define an alternate output drawing when you run a background process that changes your design in some way (by generating cross-reference notes, for example). This allows you to execute a trial process without overwriting your original drawing.
Non-Sequential Sheets
This option allows you to specify which of the models in a design CADEX must process. Setting this option to No instructs CADEX to process all of the models in the design in sequence, starting with find names s01a or 0001 and continuing until a gap is encountered. Setting this option to Yes instructs CADEX to process a range of models, starting and ending with find names that you specify, regardless of gaps in sequence. This allows you to process a selected segment or the entire design, even if some sheet numbers are missing.
Trace All Views

This option allows you to specify the views you want processed in a background process. CADEX can process all views or up to 12 explicitly specified views.
Sheet Extension Cross-Referencing (Electrical Application Only)

When you use sheet extensions to connect lines across sheets in a design, you can use this option to show the location of the sheet extensions that correspond to those on the active model. To cross-reference sheet extension components, you create a cross-reference note in each sheet extension component. During a background process, CADEX replaces the note with the sheet number and zone location of the sheet extension component on the other end. If there is more than one corresponding sheet extension, you can display the location of all of them or just the previous and next connections.
Component Cross-Referencing (Electrical Application Only)
454
This option allows you to cross-reference relay components. You can display the cross-reference information next to the appropriate components in the wiring diagram, or next to a "dummy" version of the relay that you create near the diagram. The following suboptions on the Component Cross-Referencing panel allow you to control which components are cross referenced and how the cross-reference notes are displayed. Suboption Use Group/Location Purpose These suboptions allow you to specify the criteria for associating relay components. For example, you can use group and/or location attributes or part numbers to associate the components in a relay. Sets the height for cross-reference notes generated by CADEX. You do not need to use this suboption if you create generic cross-reference notes as part of the relay. Sets the number of entries that are printed in a cross-reference note before a new line is added to the note.
Use Part Number
Xref Note Height
Entries Per Line
455
Suboption Modify Existing
Purpose Controls whether or not new notes are generated each time the cross-reference option is executed. When this option is set to No, all eligible components are cross-referenced. When this option is set to Yes, only components with existing notes are crossreferenced.
Xref Note Header
Specifies a number of characters at the beginning of each note that are not modified during cross-referencing. This allows you to include consistent "headers" in your notes. If you specify a header length longer than an existing note, the number of blank characters needed to achieve the header length total is added after the note, and information generated by the cross-referencing process is appended at the end.
Master Relay 2-9, 2-13, 3-2, 3-12, 3-15,3-20
When the Entries Per Line option is set to 2, CADEX adds a line feed after two entries.
Results of Entries Per Line Option for Component Cross-Reference Notes For more information about defining relay components, see Chapter 4.
Automatic Numbering
456
This option performs automatic connection numbering when this rule is set to "Yes". Only wire-data notes that meet one of the following criteria will participate in the automatic numbering process: If the wire-data note has 32703 attribute with two numbers in the attribute data separated by commas, those numbers are taken as the starting and ending characters positions where the assigned connection number should be placed. For example, the note of "ABCNNNXYZ" and has a 32703 attribute with data "4,6" will be replaced with ABC001XYZ if the starting number is 1. If the wire-data note contains an ampersand, '&', it is removed and the following characters are replaced by the assigned number. If the note contains two '&', the characters between the two '&' are replaced by the assigned number. For example: The wire-data note "A&replace" will be replaced with "A0000001" and "A&xxx&XYZ" will be replaced with "A001XYZ" if the starting number is 1.
Start Number
This option allows you to specify the starting number for the automatic numbering.
Back Annotation
This option performs automatic back annotating on wiring when this rule is set to "Yes". Shield, coax, cable, and twist components will have their reference designators automatically generated during a report if: They do not have a defined name. Their names contain a zero, one or two characters prefix followed by "xx". The generated name will consist of a new prefix, followed by a number. New prefixes for the four components are: "SHL" "TWT" "CX" "CBL"
457
Results of a CADEX Extraction Process

A CADEX Extraction background process generates four types of models:
Report model (rpt). The report model contains the text of any reports generated. Error model (err). The error model flags every situation in a design that violates the error conditions specified when you submitted the background process. Warning model (wrn). The warning model flags every situation in a design that violates the warning conditions specified when you submitted the background process. Documentation model (doc). The documentation model contains the Extraction Summary Report and the Extraction Program Results.
The Extraction Summary Report provides a statistical summary for each sheet analyzed during the background process. The Extraction Program Results lists all the system messages generated by the process and provides descriptions of any error or warning violations. If a severe design problem exists or if CADEX encounters technical difficulties, a background process may not complete successfully. System messages can help you diagnose and correct these problems.
Viewing Reports
After a background process is complete, you can view any reports it generates by selecting the process name on the Process Results panel. This displays a pop-up menu, from which you can accesses a list of reports generated by the background process, as well as the Extraction Summary Report and the Extraction Program Results. You can also use this panel to delete the current report or copy the contents of a report to a UNIX file so that it can be printed.
Viewing and Correcting Errors and Warnings

CADEX also allows you to view and correct errors and warnings generated by a background process. You can view the results of a background process by selecting its name on the Process Results panel, which displays a pop-up menu. Selecting from the pop-up menu can display a graphical error or warning report and a list of all the other available groups of errors or
458
warnings generated by this background process. One group is created for each sheet of the design that contains errors or warnings. When you select a sheet number, the number is highlighted, and the error group for that sheet is displayed. When you display an error or warning group, the geometry of the active model is positioned so that the first error is centered on screen. A circle marks that violation. At the top of the screen, explanatory text describes the current error or warning. You can examine error or warning conditions one by one, or you can display an entire group. As you examine each error, the display moves so that it is centered around the current violation. The error group you are examining, however, must be the same as the active model. Otherwise, the circles highlighting errors will not correspond to the geometry displayed. As you display error or warnings, you can correct violations by modifying geometry or redefining the components in the design. While viewing errors or warnings, you can also erase individual errors (deleting the circle and the error message) or simultaneously delete all error group information.
Submitting the Conversion Background Processes

You can submit background processes that convert drawings created using host CADEX into drawings compatible with workstation CADEX. You can also submit a background process to convert workstation drawings with the same base name as the active model into drawings compatible with host CADEX. The latter procedure can also convert attribute names and numbers stored in the cadx model (cadx) into an attribute format compatible with host CADEX.
CADEX System Limits

When you run a CADEX Extraction background process, you should be aware of the limits of the CADEX system.
459
Defining and Running a CADEX Extraction Background Process

Use this procedure to submit a CADEX Extraction background process. When you select the CADEX Extraction option on the Background Process List panel, CADEX displays the CADEX Extraction Options panel, listing the available options for this background process. You can select options on this panel and modify them to create a background process customized to meet your needs. Modifying each of these options is a procedure in itself and is described on subsequent pages. During the CADEX Extraction background process, CADEX processes models according to the following rules:
If the active drawing is an overlay parent, CADEX extracts information from all the drawings that are members of the overlay family.
If the active drawing has a find name of s01a, s02a, etc. or 0001, 0002, etc., you can process the sheets sequentially or non-sequentially.
For sequential processing, CADEX extracts information from all of the sequentially numbered drawings in the design, starting with s01a or 0001. When CADEX encounters a gap in the numbering sequence, it stops processing drawings. For non-sequential processing, CADEX extracts information from only the range of drawings that you specify. This option allows you to process any segment of a design, even if there are one or more gaps in the sequence. Before You Begin: Be sure that the drawings to be processed are not read only protected. CADEX cannot process read only drawings. Read only protection is set using function key FILES. Use function key FILES to file the active model if you have modified it and you want the changes to be included in this background process. Use menu option /REPORTS/ to define the report formats you want. Defining report formats is described in Chapter 5.
460
Steps:
Select BACKGROUND Two panels are displayed, the Background Process List and the Process Results panel.
On the Background Process List panel, select the Extraction option (under CADEX). The CADEX Extraction Options panel is displayed. As shown in the figures on the next page, the options on this panel vary, depending on the application mode.
Message:
Select option
461
General Application CADEX Extraction Options DEFINE Generate Diagnostics = Replace Part Numbers = DEFINE Generate Reports = Yes Yes Yes
Intermediate File Name = Output Drawing ID DEFINE DEFINE = Yes No
Non-Sequential Sheets = Trace All Views =
START PROCESS CANCEL
Electrical Application
CADEX Extraction Options DEFINE DEFINE Generate Diagnostics = Trace All Line Types Trace Method = = Yes No Logical No Yes
Replace Part Numbers = DEFINE Generate Reports =
Intermediate File Name = Output Drawing ID DEFINE DEFINE DEFINE DEFINE = Yes No Yes Yes No 1 No
Non-Sequential Sheets = Trace All Views Sheet Extension Xref Component Xref = = =
Automatic Numbering = Start Number Back Annotation = =
462
Select an option to modify.

Message:
Modify the selected option. Refer to the pages listed below for instructions on modifying each option using any of the following procedures. Option Generate Diagnostics Trace All Line Types (Electrical Application) Trace Method Replace Part Numbers Generate Reports Intermediate File Name Output Drawing ID Non-Sequential Sheets Trace All Views Sheet Extension Cross-Referencing (Electrical Application) Component Cross-Referencing (Electrical Application) Automatic Numbering Start Number Back Annotation
Optional: To save your option settings without running the background process, reselect BACKGROUND. Your settings are saved in the cadx model (cadx).
463
Optional: To erase your option settings without running a background process, select CANCEL and press YN. The procedure is terminated.
To run the background process using your option settings, select START PROCESS.
464
General Application CADEX Extraction Options DEFINE Generate Diagnostics = Replace Part Numbers = DEFINE Generate Reports = Yes Yes Yes
Intermediate File Name = Output Drawing ID DEFINE DEFINE = Yes No
Non-Sequential Sheets = Trace All Views =
CADEX Extraction Options DEFINE DEFINE Generate Diagnostics = Trace All Line Types Trace Method = = Yes No Logical No Yes
Replace Part Numbers = DEFINE Generate Reports =
Intermediate File Name = Output Drawing ID DEFINE DEFINE DEFINE DEFINE = Yes No Yes Yes No 1 No
Non-Sequential Sheets = Trace All Views Sheet Extension Xref Component Xref = = =
Automatic Numbering = Start Number Back Annotation = =
465
CADEX Extraction Options Panel for the General and Electrical Applications
Generate Diagnostics
Use this subprocedure to diagnose problems in a design by generating error and warning messages for specified conditions. When you run a background process, it traces all the sheets of the design and reports all error and warning conditions. You can use the Diagnostic Messages panel to select the messages you want to generate. For each message, you can specify whether it generates an error or warning message or no message at all. The figure below shows the possible Diagnostic Messages panels. Before You Begin: Select BACKGROUND On the Background Process List panel, select the Extraction option (under CADEX).
Steps:
Select the Generate Diagnostics option. The default value for this option is Yes. When set to Yes, a DEFINE button is displayed beside the Generate Diagnostics option.
Optional: To turn off the detection of all errors and warnings, set the option to No by pressing YN. This terminates this subprocedure.
Select DEFINE. The Generate Errors option must be set to Yes for DEFINE to be displayed. The Diagnostic Messages panel is displayed, shown in the figure below.
466
General Application
Diagnostic Messages Component without a part number Component without a ref des Required component attribute not found Inheritance data conflict Requested attribute not inherited = Error = Error = Error = Error = Error
ACCEPT
Diagnostic Messages Component without a part number Component without a ref des Required component attribute not found Inheritance data conflict Requested attribute not inherited Coincident pins Duplicate pin IDs Unused pins Mult. attribute names on the same wire No connection at this location Unmatched sheet extension No pin name found Required wire attribute not found ACCEPT = Error = Error = Error = Error = Error = Error = Error = Error = Error = Error = Error = Error = Error
Diagnostic Messages Panels
467
Message:
Select option
To change the value of an option on the Diagnostic Messages panel, select that option. The value of an option changes every time you select it, cycling between three possible settings: Error, Warning, and No. The effects of these values are described below:
Setting Error Warning No Result Generates error messages for the selected option. Generates warning messages for the selected option. Generates no messages for the selected option. Select option / Key new value / YN default, toggle or next
Message:
To set the value of additional options, repeat step 4.
To close the Diagnostic Messages panel, select ACCEPT or select another option from the CADEX Extraction Options panel.
468
Trace All Line Types Electrical Application

Using this subprocedure to define which types of lines CADEX traces during a background process. By doing this, you can define what information in a design is traced. You can create various systems on one drawing, each system drawn with a different line type. The CADEX Extraction process will only trace those systems drawn with the line styles you specify with this subprocedure. For example, if you do not want a certain wire traced, draw that wire with dashed lines. Draw wires that you do want traced with solid lines. Then, when you run a background process, use this subprocedure to instruct CADEX to trace only solid lines.
Before You Begin: Select BACKGROUND On the Background Process List panel, select the Extraction option (under CADEX).
Steps:
1 Select the Trace All Line Types option. The default value for this option is No. When the option is set to No, CADEX traces only solid-medium and solid-light lines.
When the Trace All Line Types option is set to No, a DEFINE button is displayed beside the option.
Optional: To trace all types of lines, set this option to Yes by pressing YN. This terminates this subprocedure.
Select DEFINE. The Types All Line Types option must be set to No for DEFINE to be displayed.
469
The Traceable Line Types panel is displayed. It lists all the possible line types CADEX can trace.
Traceable Line Types Solid heavy Solid medium Solid light Dashed medium Dashed light Centerline Phantom NC Break = = = = = = = = = No Yes Yes No No No No No No ACCEPT
Traceable Line Types Panel

To change the value of a line type listed on the Traceable Line Types panel, select that type. When you select a line type, its value toggles between Yes (for tracing that line type) and No (for not tracing that line type).
Message: Select option / Key new value / YN default, toggle or next
To change the value of additional line types, repeat step 4.
To close the Traceable Line Types panel, select ACCEPT or select another option from the CADEX Extraction Options panel.
470
Trace Method Electrical Application

Use this subprocedure to define whether to generate a list of logical connections or physical connections.
Before You Begin:
Select BACKGROUND.
On the Background Process List panel, select the Extraction option (under CADEX).
Steps:
Select the Trace Method option.
Press YN to toggle the option between Logical and Physical.
Replace Part Numbers

Use this subprocedure to instruct the background process to list the correct part numbers in a report for those components with reference designators entered in a part number replacement table. Before You Begin:
Select BACKGROUND.
471
Steps:
Select the Replace Part Numbers option.
Press YN so the option toggles to Yes.
Generate Reports
Use this subprocedure to designate which formats you want the background process to use to extract attribute information from a design and compile that information into reports. For every background process you submit, you can generate up to 10 different reports. Defining report formats is described in Chapter 5. If you want to generate a report whose format requires CADEX to query an external data base, you must generate the report interactively using menu option /REPORTS/. Before You Begin:
Select BACKGROUND.
Steps:
Select the Generate Reports option. When this option is set to Yes, a DEFINE button is displayed beside the option.
Optional: To not generate any reports, set this option to No by pressing YN. This terminates this subprocedure.
472
Select DEFINE. The Generate Reports option must be set to Yes for DEFINE to be displayed. A panel is displayed, shown in the figure below. It lists all the types of reports you have defined using menu option /REPORTS/. Defining reports is described in Chapter 5.
Report Name Generate? No Yes Yes No No No No No ACCEPT
Equipment List BOM Connection List Valve List Motor Report Assembly 101 Part List Assembly 301 Part List Just-in-Time List
Reports to be Generated by an Extraction Process
Message:
Select option
To change the value of a report listed, select that report. When you select a report, its value toggles between Yes (for generating that report) and No (for not generating that report).
To generate additional reports, repeat step 4. You can generate up to 10 reports for each background process.
473
To close the panel, select ACCEPT or select another option from the CADEX Extraction Options panel.
Intermediate File Name

Use this subprocedure to name the intermediate files that contain the CADEX data in a design. Once the data resides in the intermediate files, you can use it to generate reports, submit it to a post-processor, or load it into an external data base.
Before You Begin:
Select BACKGROUND
Steps:
Select the Intermediate File Name option.
Key in a filename (including the full UNIX path). For example, to create a file called inter1 in directory /fred, key in /fred/inter1. If you do not key in a name, CADEX creates the files in the directory called /tmp.
Output Drawing ID
Use this subprocedure to define an alternate drawing ID for the output of a background process. If this option is blank, CADEX files the modified drawing using the original drawing ID.
Before You Begin:
Select BACKGROUND
474
Steps:
Select the Output Drawing ID option.

Key in any alternate drawing ID. Do not key in a find name. You can key in TEST, for example. The name you key in is displayed in the information line.
Non-Sequential Sheets
Use this subprocedure to define which sheets of a design CADEX must process. You can process all of the consecutive sheets until a gap occurs in the sequence, or specify a range of sheets to process all or part of the design, regardless of gaps. Before You Begin: Select BACKGROUND On the Background Process List panel, select the Extraction option (under CADEX).
Steps:
Select the Non-Sequential Sheets option. When this option is set to Yes, a DEFINE button is displayed beside the option.
Optional: To process all of the consecutive sheets in the active design, set this option to No by pressing YN. When this option is set to No, CADEX processes all of the models in the active design beginning with s01a or 0001 and continuing in sequence until a gap is encountered. This terminates this subprocedure.
475
Select DEFINE. The Sheets to Trace panel is displayed, as shown below. Message: Select option
Sheets to Trace Starting FindNo = 0001 Ending FindNo = 0010
ACCEPT
Select the Starting FindNo. option.

Message: Select option / Key text
Key in the find name of the first model you want to process. The format for the find name must be either sXXa or XXXX, and the starting number may not be lower than s01a or 0001.
Select the Ending FindNo. option.

Message: Select option / Key text
Key in the find number of the last model you want to process. The format for the ending find name must match that of the starting find name in step 5, and the ending number may not be greater than s99a or 9999.
To close the Sheets to Trace panel, select ACCEPT or select another option from the CADEX Extraction Options panel. If the format for the starting and ending find names do not match, the Sheets to Trace panel will not close, and the following error message is displayed: Sheet numbers must have matching formats.
476
Trace All Views

Use this subprocedure to specify the views you want to trace.
Before You Begin:
Select BACKGROUND
On the Background Process List panel, select the Extraction option (under CADEX). Steps:
Select the Trace All Views option. When this option is set to No, a DEFINE button is displayed beside the option.
Optional: To trace all views, press YN to toggle this option to Yes. This terminates this subprocedure.
Select DEFINE. The Trace All Views option must be set to No for DEFINE to be displayed. The Views to Trace panel is displayed, shown in the figure below. It lists the views to be traced during a background process. The default option is the primary view (PV).
Views to Trace PV ACCEPT
Views to Trace Panel
477
Message:
Select option
Key in the names of the views you want to trace, separating each with a comma. You can key in up to 12 distinct view names. If you key in more than 12 view names, CADEX recognizes the first 12 names and ignores the rest. If you key in duplicate view names, CADEX rejects the entry and the following error message is displayed: Each view may appear only once. (view name was duplicated in the input).
Sheet Extension Xref Electrical Application

Use this subprocedure to instruct the background process to generate sheet extension cross-reference notes that identify the location of corresponding sheet extension components. Before You Begin:
To control the positioning of cross-reference notes, create a generic note with a sheet xref user attribute in each sheet extension component.
Select Background
On the Background Process List panel, select the Extraction option (under CADX).
Steps:
Select the Sheet Extension Cross-Reference option.
478
When this option is set to Yes, a DEFINE button is displayed beside the option.
Optional: To not cross-reference the sheet extension components in your design, set this option to No by pressing YN. This terminates this subprocedure.
Select DEFINE. The Sheet Extension Cross - Reference option must be set to Yes for DEFINE to be displayed. A panel is displayed, shown in the figure below.
Sheet Extension Xref Options Source-Destination Number of Entries Per Line = = No 1 ACCEPT
Sheet Extension Cross-Reference Options Panel
Message:
Select Option
To specify which cross-references are displayed, do the following: a. Select the Source-Destination option.
Message: Select option / YN toggle
b.
Do one of the following: Toggle this option to Yes to display the sheet extension cross-references from only the previous (source) and next (destination) connections.
479
Toggle this option to No to display the sheet extension cross-references from all corresponding connections.
To set the number of entries per line in a crossreference note, do the following: a. Select the Number of Entries Per Line option.
Message: Select option / Key value
b.
Key in the number of entries you want to have in a cross-reference note before a new line is added to the note. The minimum value is one. The number you key in is displayed on the panel.
Optional: To run a test before you cross-reference your original drawing, define an alternate output drawing ID for the background process.
Component Xref Electrical Application

Use this subprocedure to instruct the background process to cross-reference the location of the different parts of each relay. The background process then lists the location of the coil beside each contact and the location of all the contacts beside the coil. If you include a "dummy" relay in your design, the location of all contacts is displayed next to the corresponding pins on the dummy version of the relay. The location can be either a ladder rung or a zone location, depending on which you define. You can cross-reference parts by only their reference designator or by part number and reference designator. You can also crossreference groups of parts that have been associated by the attributes group, location, or both. When CADEX generates cross-referencing text for a normally closed contact, the text is always followed by a plus sign (+). Before You Begin:
480
To prepare the frame of reference by which CADEX crossreferences the parts of a relay, use menu options /UTILS/ -> /LADDER/ to create a ladder of use menu options /UTILS/ > /ZONE/ to define a zone matrix.
Select Background
On the Background Process panel, select the Extraction option (under CADEX).
Steps:
1 Select the Component Cross-Reference option. When this option is set to Yes, a DELETE button is displayed beside the option.
Optional: To not cross-reference components in your design, set this option to No by pressing YN. This terminates this subprocedure.
Select DEFINE. The Component Cross-Reference option must be set to Yes for DEFINE to be displayed. A panel is displayed, shown in the figure below.
Component Xref Options Use Group/Location Use Part Number Xref Note Height Entries Per Line = = = = No Yes .164000 1 No 0
Modify Existing Notes Only = Xref Note Header Length =
481
ACCEPT
To specify the criteria for associating components, do one of the following: To specify whether or not CADEX must recognize the associations made using group or location attributes, select the Use Group/Location option. The option toggles between Yes and No. Toggle the option to Yes to associate components according to the group and location attributes attached to them. Toggle the option to No to ignore these attributes. To specify whether or not CADEX considers the part number to associate parts, select the Use Part Number option. The option toggles between Yes and No. When this option is set to Yes, CADEX uses the part numbers to determine which parts make up a component. When this option is set to No, CADEX ignores part numbers when processing components.
Optional: To define the height of system-generated back-annotation notes, do the following: a. Select the Cross-Reference Note Height option.
b.
Key in a new value. You can skip this step if you created generic crossreference notes or slot ID notes when you defined the relay components.
To define the number of entries per line in a crossreference note, do the following: a. Select the Entries Per Line option.
482
Message:
Select option / Key value
b.
Key in the number of entries you want to have in a cross-reference note before a new line is added to the note. The minimum value is one. The number you key in is displayed on the panel.
To specify whether or not all eligible components are cross-referenced, select the Modify Existing Notes Only option.
Message: Select option / YN toggle
The option toggles between Yes and No. Toggle the option to Yes to cross-reference only those components with existing cross-reference notes. Toggle the option to No to cross-reference all eligible components in the model(s) submitted. If a component has no existing cross-reference text, a text element will be created and added to the component set.
To specify a header length for existing crossreference notes, do the following: a. Select the Cross-Reference Note Header Length option.
b.
Enter a value between 0 and 128, inclusive.
10 Optional: To run a test before you cross-reference your original drawing, define an alternate output drawing for the background process.
483
Automatic Numbering Electrical Application

Use this subprocedure to instruct the background process to perform the automatic numbering. Only wire-data notes that meet one of the following criteria will participate in the automatic numbering process: If the wire-data note has 32703 attribute with two numbers in the attribute data separated by commas, those numbers are taken as the starting and ending characters positions where the assigned connection number should be placed. For example, the note of "ABCNNNXYZ" and has a 32703 attribute with data "4,6" will be replaced with ABC001XYZ if the starting number is 1. If the wire-data note contains an ampersand, '&', it is removed and the following characters are replaced by the assigned number. If the note contains two '&', the characters between the two '&' are replaced by the assigned number. For example: The wire-data note "A&replace" will be replaced with "A0000001" and "A&xxx&XYZ" will be replaced with "A001XYZ" if the starting number is 1. Before You Begin:
Select Background
On the Background Process List panel, select the Extraction option (under CADX). Steps:
1 Select the Automatic Numbering option
Optional: Press YN to toggle between Yes and No When this option is set to "Yes", the Start Number specify next will be used to generate the replacement characters for the wire data.
Start Number Electrical Application

484 CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide
Use this subprocedure to specify the starting number for the automatic numbering.
Before You Begin:
Select Background
1 Select the Start Number option.
Key in a start number.
Back Annotation Electrical Application

Use this subprocedure to specify if back annotation should be saved in the model. Shield, coax, cable, and twist components will have their reference designators automatically generated during a report if they do not have a defined name or their names contain a zero, one The generated name will consist of a new prefix, followed by a number. New prefixes for the four components are: "SHL" "TWT" "CX" "CBL"
Before You Begin:
Select Background
485
1 Select the Back Annotation option.
Optional: Press YN to toggle between Yes and No.
486
Running a Background Process That Converts a Host CADEX Design Into a Workstation CADEX Design
Use this procedure to submit a background process that converts drawings created using host CADEX into drawings compatible with workstation CADEX. When you run this background process, CADEX converts models according to the following rules:
If the active drawing is an overlay parent, CADEX converts all the drawings that are members of the overlay family.
If the active drawing has a find name of s01a, s02a, etc. or 0001, 0002, etc., CADEX converts any sequentially numbered drawings that use the same numbering format. When CADEX encounters a gap in the numbering sequence, it stops converting drawings.
"Converting Host CADEX Designs to Workstation CADEX Format" describes the overall process for converting a host CADEX design into a workstation CADEX design. In general, the process consists of several steps. The procedure described here is one part of that overall process. Before You Begin: Use Data Transfer to move to the workstation any host drawings you want to convert. For more information on Data Transfer, see the CATIA/CADAM Drafting Data Transfer Procedures Guide.
487
Steps:
Select BACKGROUND. Two panels are displayed, the Background Process List and the Process Results panel.
On the Background Process List panel under CADEX, select the Host to WS Drawing Convert option. The following panel is displayed:
Host to WS Drawing Convert Job Options ** This process has no options **
Message:
Select option
Optional: To cancel the background process, select CANCEL and press YN. The procedure is terminated.
Select START PROCESS.
488
Running a Background Process That Converts a Workstation CADEX Design Into a Host CADEX Design
Use this procedure to submit a background process that converts workstation CADEX drawings into drawings compatible with host CADEX. This procedure can also convert attribute names and numbers stored in a cadx model into a format compatible with host CADEX. You must, however, have previously transferred a host CADEX Job Options model to workstation. If you do convert attributes, this procedure actually transfers back to the host the Job Options model you previously moved and files it under the same name as the drawing being converted in this procedure. CADEX fills in the format panel of the Job Options model with the attribute names and numbers stored in the workstation cadx model (cadx). When you run this background process, CADEX converts models according to the following rules:
If the active drawing is an overlay parent, CADEX converts all the drawings that are members of the overlay family.
If the active drawing has a find name of s01a, s02a, etc. or 0001, 0002, etc., CADEX converts any sequentially numbered drawings that use the same numbering format. When CADEX encounters a gap in the numbering sequence, it stops converting drawings.
Before You Begin: On the host, call up a CADEX Job Options model (CADX) and delete all attribute names and numbers from its format panel. Use Data Transfer to move the Job Options model to workstation CADEX and file the model. For more information on Data Transfer, see the CATIA/CADAM Drafting Data Transfer Procedures Guide.
489
Steps:
1 Select BACKGROUND. Two panels are displayed, the Background Process List and the Process Results panel.
On the Background Process List panel under CADEX, select the WS to Host Drawing Convert option. The following panel is displayed: WS To Host Drawing Convert Job Options Base cadx drawing = Start Process Cancel
To convert attribute information stored in the cadx model (cadx), do the following: a. Select the Base cadx drawing option.
b.
Key in the drawing ID of the host CADEX Job Options model (CADX) that you previously moved with Data Transfer to the workstation.
Optional: To cancel the background process, select CANCEL and press YN. The procedure is terminated.
490
To run the background process, select START PROCESS.
491
Viewing Reports Generated by a Background Process

Use this procedure to view any reports generated by a background process. After you submit a background process, the process is listed on the Process Results panel in the order it was submitted. Selecting UPDATE displays the current status of all background processes. Keeping the list in the Process Results panel as short as possible improves the performance of the UPDATE feature. You can view the reports generated by a background process by selecting the process name on the Process Results panel. This displays a pop-up menu, which you can use to access the report panel. This panel can display any customized reports you have generated as well as the Extraction Summary Report (a statistical summary for each sheet analyzed during the background process) and the Extraction Program Results (a list all the system messages generated by the process). The figure on the next page shows a typical Extraction Summary Report.
492
EXTRACTION SUMMARY REPORT EXTRACTION PROGRAM RESULTS Parts List

<- FULL DOWN FULL UP HALF DOWN HALF UP TOP BOTTOM - -> PRINT DELETE RETURN
Types of reports available
Returns you to the Process Results panel Deletes the currently displayed report Scrolling options Prints the currently displayed report to a UNIX file
Report Panel for a Background Process
When you examine a report displayed on the Report panel, you can scroll through it using the buttons at the bottom of the panel. You can also search for a particular occurrence of a text string. A DELETE button allows you to delete an entire report. A PRINT button allows you to dump the contents of a report to a UNIX file from which the report can be printed.
Steps:
1 Select BACKGROUND. The Background Process List panel and the Process Results panel are displayed.
493
Message:
Select process title to view or delete process result / Select process name to run background process
Select the title of the background process you want to display. A pop-up menu is displayed
On the pop-up menu, select REPORT. CADEX displays the Report panel, which allows you to view the reports and other documentation generated by the background process. Figure 93 on page 567 shows this panel. An information message tells you the active report type, its time and date of creation, and the total number of pages.
Message: Select report / Key text to find / YN next occurrence
Optional: To display a different portion of the report, do one of the following: To scroll through a report, use the scrolling buttons at the bottom of the panel. They are described below: FULL DOWN FULL UP HALF DOWN HALF UP TOP BOTTOM Scrolls down one full screen. Scrolls up one full screen. Scrolls down one half screen. Scrolls up one half screen. Scrolls to the top of the report. Scrolls to the bottom of the report. Shifts the screen left. Shifts the screen right.
To search for a text string in the report, do the following: a. Key in the desired text string. The text string is highlighted. b. To search for the next occurrence of the same text string, press YN.
494
Optional: To view a different report, select its name from the list in the lower-right corner. The selected report is displayed.
Optional: To delete the displayed report, do the following: a. Select the DELETE button.
Message: YN del
b.
Press YN to confirm the deletion.
495
Copying a Report Generated by a Background Process to a File

As you view a textual report, you can dump the contents of that report to a file. From there you can send the file to a printer. The file you create with this procedure is filed under the directory called $CCD_ROOT/TMP.
Steps:
Select BACKGROUND. The Background Process List panel and the Process Results panel are displayed.
Select the title of the background process you want to display. CADEX displays a pop-up menu.
On the pop-up menu, select REPORT. CADEX displays a panel that allows you to view the reports and other documentation generated by the background process.
Message: Select report / Key text to find / YN next occurrence
Select PRINT.
Message: Key file name
Key in the name of the file that will contain the report. The name of the file can be 1 to 16 alphanumeric characters and must not already exist. If the file
496
name you key in does exist, an error message is displayed. Message: Key line spacing / YN create file
Optional: To change the line spacing, key in a positive real value. An information message shows the value you key in.
Message: YN create file
Press YN. The file is created and stored in the directory called $CCD_ROOT/TMP.
497
Viewing and Correcting Errors and Warnings Generated by a Background Process

Use this procedure to view and correct errors and warnings generated by a background process. You can view the results of a background processes by selecting its name on the Process Results panel, which displays a pop-up menu. To examine errors, you select ERROR; to examine warnings, select WARNING. Selecting either ERROR or WARNING displays a graphical error or warning report and a list of all the other available groups of errors or warnings generated by this background process. One group is created for each sheet of the design that contains errors or warnings. When you select a sheet number, the number is highlighted, and the error group for that sheet is displayed. The figure on the next page illustrates a panel displaying an error report.
sheet number 01 sheet number 02 sheet number 03 SHOW ALL ERASE ERROR DELETE RETURN
Available groups of errors or warnings Returns you to the Process Results panel
Deletes all information in the active error group Erases the currently displayed error highlight Displays all error or warning situations simultaneously
Panel Displaying an Error Generated by a Background Process
498
You can examine error or warning violations one by one or all at once. When viewed individually, each error or warning is displayed in the center of the screen and circled. An information message describes the current error or warning violation. While viewing an error group, you can delete individual errors or the entire error group. You can correct errors and warnings as you display them. To correct violations, use CADAM function keys to modify the geometry of the design. Use function key CADEX to redefine components and other aspects of the design. Before You Begin: Display the model that contains the errors or warnings you want to examine.
Steps:
Select the title of the background process for which you want to display errors and warnings. CADEX displays a pop-up menu.
On the pop-up menu, select ERROR or WARNING. CADEX displays geometry for the active model, and a circle marks the first violation in the model. An information message describes the violation. For example, one common error message reads: Component without a part number.
If you are viewing: An error group A warning group The message reads: Select error group / Select error / Key error number / YN next error Select warning group / Sel warning / Key warning number / YN next warning
499
To display violations on the active model, do any of the following: To display the next error or warning, press YN. The geometry for the next error or warning is displayed in the center of the screen. A description of the first violation is displayed in the information line. To display a particular error or warning, key in its number. The geometry for that error or warning is displayed in the center of the screen. A description of the violation is displayed in the information line. To display simultaneously all errors or warnings on a sheet, select SHOW ALL. The window is scaled so that the geometry for all the errors or warnings on the current sheet is displayed. To activate an error or warning whose circle is visible, select the circle. The geometry for that error or warning is displayed in the center of the screen. A description of the violation is displayed in the information line.
Optional: To display errors or warnings generated from a different sheet, select its name from the list displayed in the lower-right corner of the panel. The name of the group you select is highlighted. Circles marking the violations in that group are displayed. For those circles to be useful, however, you must display the geometry for the model that corresponds to that error group.
To correct an error or warning, do the following: a. To access other menus or function keys necessary to perform a correction, do one of the following:
500
To use the menus available in function key CADEX, do the following: 1) 2) Select RETURN. Select BACKGROUND.
To modify the geometry of the design using another function key, press that other function key. b. c. Correct the violation. Optional: To redisplay errors or warnings, return to step 1. If you have used another function key, you must first select function key CADEX. 7 Optional: To delete a single violation or one of the available groups of errors or warnings, do one the following: To delete the error or warning you are currently viewing, select ERASE ERROR. The error message and the circle highlighting the current error or warning are deleted. All subsequent errors or warnings are renumbered. To delete an entire group of errors or warnings, do the following: a. b. Select the name of the error group to delete. Select the DELETE button.
Message: YN delete
c.
Press YN to confirm the deletion.
All information for the entire group (messages and highlighting circles) is deleted.
501
Deleting All Reports, Errors, and Warnings Generated by a Background Process

Use this procedure to delete the results of a background process. When you delete a background process listed on the Process Results panel, all reports, errors, warnings, and other documentation generated by the background process are deleted. Selecting UPDATE on the Process Results panel displays the current status of all background processes. Keeping the list in the Process Results panel as short as possible improves the performance of the UPDATE feature.
Steps:
Select the title of the background process for which you want to display errors and warnings. CADEX displays a pop-up menu.
On the pop-up menu, select DELETE.

Message: YN delete
Press YN. The results of the entire background process are deleted, including all reports, errors, warnings, and documentation.
502
Appendix A. Messages
Design Error and Warning Messages
Each of the following describes a message, which could be an error message generated in the error model or a warning message generated in the warning model:
Message: Meaning:
Could not create SHEET XREF attribute Sheet Extension Cross-Reference will not be done This can be caused by one of the following:
The cadx model is read-only, and the modified version cannot be filed. There is no more room in the Master Attribute List (the user attributes limit is 100 per model in Unrestricted Mode, and 50 in Mainframe Compatibility Mode).
Response: Do one of the following:
Check the permissions on the cadx model and reset them if necessary. Create space in the Master Attribute List by using menu option /ATTRIBUTE/ to delete an existing attribute.
Message: Meaning: Response:
Component with no part number found: Sheet: nnn xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz A component set with its Type set to Schematic Part exists on sheet nnn, and the component set has no part number. Use /BUILD/ /DEFINE/ to define a part number for the detected component or use function key NOTE to add a part number to the
503
component's reference designator. Precede the part number with at least one dollar sign ($).
If you are using a part number replacement table, add the part number for this reference designator to the table.
Message: Meaning:
Component with no reference designator found: Sheet: nnn xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz A component set with its Type set to Schematic Part exists on sheet nnn, and this component set has no reference designator; or, a component set with its Type set to anything other than Schematic Part exists on sheet nnn, and this component set has no name. Use /BUILD/ /DEFINE/ to define a reference designator or a name for the detected component.
Response:
Message:
Duplicate pin name on sheet: nnn - ref des: xxxxx aaaaa - xloc, yloc: yyyyy,yyy, zzzzz.zzz aaaaa - xloc, yloc: yyyyy,yyy, zzzzz.zzz On sheet nnn, a component with reference designator xxxxx contains two or more pins with the same name. The message provides the name and the coordinates of each duplicate pin. Check the duplicate pins that are circled in the error model. When you find a duplicate, change that pin name. Note: No error message is reported for duplicate pins if generic reference designators, such as Cxx or Rxx, are used for components. Also, connector pins labeled with a question mark (?) are not reported as duplicate pins.
Meaning:
Response:
Message:
Inheritance data conflict: ref des: aaaaa partno: bbbbb sheet: nnn xloc, yloc: yyyyy,yyy zzzzz.zzz attribute name: ccccc first data: ddddd second data: eeeee On sheet nnn, a component with a reference designator of aaaaa and a part number of bbbbb is the child of more than one parent and is supposed to inherit data for attribute ccccc. The parents, however, have different attribute data for attribute ccccc. The message provides the coordinates of the component, the attribute name and the two conflicting data values.
Meaning:
504
Response:
Remove the inherited attribute from one of the parent components or redefine the nested component set so that the component is no longer the child of two parents. Maximum number of sheet extensions reached. Only the first 1000 will be cross-referenced. The system can cross-reference a maximum of 1000 sheet extensions. If your design contains more than 1000, the excess will not be cross-referenced. Reduce the number of sheet extensions in your design. No connection at this point: Sheet: nnn xloc, yloc: yyyyy,yyy, zzzzz.zzz On sheet nnn, a line connected to a pin at one end does not connect to anything at the other end. The message provides the coordinates of the unconnected endpoint of the line. This condition can be caused by one of the following:
Message: Meaning:
Response: Message: Meaning:
The line is not connected. The line appears to be connected, but the endpoint of the line does not meet a component pin. Duplicate lines exist at the same location. A solder dot or branch component is missing at a T-connection.
Response: Do one of the following:
Connect the line. Resolve any other errors affecting the connection. Erase any duplicate lines. Place a solder dot or branch component at the T-connection.
Message:
No match found for the following sheet extensions: id xloc yloc sheet
505
Meaning:
Sheet extension components appear in the design for which CADEX cannot find a matching name on another sheet extension component set. The message provides the name (id) for each unmatched sheet extension component, its coordinates, and the sheet that contains it. For each of the unmatched sheet extensions, do one of the following:
Response:
Add a sheet extension component set with the matching name to the design, or delete the unmatched sheet extension component. Use /BUILD/ /DEFINE/ to redefine the detected sheet extension name so it matches another sheet extension component set. Use /BUILD/ /DEFINE/ to redefine the name of another sheet extension component set so it matches the name of the detected sheet extension component set.
Message: Meaning: On sheet: nnn - ref des: xxxxx No pin name found at xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz On sheet nnn, CADEX failed to find a name for a pin in a component with a reference designator of xxxxx. The message provides the coordinates of the unnamed pin. Do one of the following:
Response:
Ignore the message if you intentionally omitted the pin ID. Move the pivot point of the pin name to within .05 inches of the pin.
Message:
Requested attribute data was not inherited: ref des: aaaaa partno: bbbbb sheet: nnn xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz attribute name: ccccc On sheet nnn, a component with a reference designator of aaaaa and a part number of bbbbb has failed to inherit data for attribute ccccc. The component is either not nested correctly, or the inherited attribute has not been assigned to its parent. The message provides the coordinates of the component.
Meaning:
506
Response:
Nest the component under its correct parent or assign inheritance attribute ccccc to its parent component.
Message:
Required attribute not found on component: Attribute name: ccccc Refdes: aaaaa PartNo: bbbbb Sheet: nnn xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz On sheet nnn, a component with a reference designator of aaaaa and a part number of bbbbb has not been assigned a required attribute named ccccc. (You can define an attribute as required when you create the attribute with the Edit panel.) The message provides the coordinates of the component. Assign the required attribute ccccc to the detected component.
Meaning:
Response:
Message:
Sheet: nnn - Attribute aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa is multiply-defined: Value 1: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Value 2: yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy on net from (aaaaaaaa, bbbb) to (aaaaaaaa, bbbb) On sheet nnn, an attribute named aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa has been assigned to a connection, but it has been assigned two different values, xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy. The message provides the starting and ending point of the connection. Delete one of the attributes from the connection. Sheet: nnn - Three COAXES in the same net: Coax 1: aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz Coax 2: bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz Coax 3: cccccccccccccccc xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz On sheet nnn, a coax named aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa, a coax named bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb, and a coax named cccccccccccccccc have all been assigned to the same connection. The message provides the coordinates of the coaxes. Delete one of the coaxes.
Meaning:
Response: Message:
Meaning:
Response:
Message:
Sheet: nnn - Three SHIELDS in the same net: Shield 1: aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy,
507
zzzzz.zzz Shield 2: bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz Shield 3: cccccccccccccccc xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz Meaning: On sheet nnn, a shield named aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa, a shield named bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb, and a shield named cccccccccccccccc have all been assigned to the same connection. The message provides the coordinates of the shields. Delete one of the shields.
Response:
Message:
Sheet: nnn - Three TWISTS in the same net: Twist 1: aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz Twist 2: bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz Twist 3: cccccccccccccccc xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz On sheet nnn, a twist named aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa, a twist named bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb, and a twist named cccccccccccccccc have all been assigned to the same connection. The message provides the coordinates of the twists. Delete one of the twists.
Meaning:
Response:
Message:
Sheet: nnn - Two CABLES in the same net: Cable 1: aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz Cable 2: bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz On sheet nnn, a cable named aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa and a cable named bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb have both been assigned to the same connection. The message provides the coordinates of both cables. Delete one of the cables. Unused pin found: Reference designator: aaaaaa Part number: bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb Pin: xxxxx Sheet: nnn xloc, yloc: yyyyy.yyy, zzzzz.zzz
Meaning:
Response: Message:
508
Meaning:
On sheet nnn, a pin in a component set with a reference designator of aaaaaa and a part number of bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb does not connect to a multiline, or the multiline that connects to the pin is mistakenly defined as part of the component set. Do one of the following:
Response:
Ignore this message if the pin was intentionally left unused. Connect a multiline to the pin. Remove the connecting multiline from the component set.
509
System Messages
When you run a background process, CADEX generates system messages that explain design and system problems not covered in the Design Error and Warning messages. These system messages are described below:
Message: Meaning:
APPLICATION is not 3 (three) The NPI page for the specified component has been defined incorrectly. The application number should be set to 3 to display the Packaging Data fields. Either create a Packaging Data NPI page (with the application number set to 3) for the specified component or delete it from the library.
Response:
Message: Meaning:
Bad or Missing Data One or more of the data fields on the Packaging Data NPI page for the specified component is either blank or is filled in with invalid data. Be sure that all the fields on the Packaging Data NPI page are filled in correctly.
Response:
Message: Meaning:
Bad PSEUDO PINS defined On the Packaging Data NPI page for the specified component, the pseudo-pin names defined for multiple instances of a subcomponent type do not match. Check each subcomponent type which appears more than once on the Packaging Data NPI page and make sure that each instance has the same pseudo-pin names. The order of the subcomponent types is unimportant.
Response:
Message: Meaning:
*** Coil without any contacts *** No contacts were found for the specified coil.
510
Response:
Define a contact for that component, if desired.
*** Contact without any coil *** There are one or more contacts for the specified component, but no coil was defined. Define a coil for that component, if desired.
*** Duplicate coil *** There are two or more coils defined for the specified component. Do one of the following:
Delete the erroneous coil. Change the part number or reference designator of the erroneous coil.
Duplicate PACKAGE PINS defined For the component specified, at least two package pins on the Packaging Data NPI page have the same name. Change the package pins on the Packaging Data NPI page so that each is unique.
Duplicate PSEUDO PINS defined For the component specified, at least two pseudo-pins within a slot on the Packaging Data NPI page have the same name. Change the pseudo-pins on the Packaging Data NPI page so that each is unique within the slot.
Duplicate SLOT ID defined For the component specified, at least two Slot IDs on the Packaging Data NPI page have the same name. Change the Slot IDs on the Packaging Data NPI page so that each is unique.
511
Duplicate value - connection: xxxxx field: yyyyy Two values were found for attribute yyyyy on connection xxxxx. Delete multiple occurrences of the same attribute.
ERROR - File 1 was empty - no components to process Intermediate File 1 did not contain any components. Check to see if the input drawings actually contained components or if there was a problem creating Intermediate File 1.
ERROR - File 4 was empty - no pins to process Intermediate File 4 did not contain any pins. Verify under menu option /BUILD/ that components do have pins. If none of the components in the design have pins or connection points, ignore this message.
Message: Meaning:
*** ERROR *** - Invalid report type for report: xxxxx The report type is invalid for the application mode. Usually, this means you are trying to run a connectivity report from the General application. Change the application mode.
Response:
Message: Meaning:
Keywords Missing from detail page The template for the Packaging Data NPI page has been modified so that one or more keywords which allow the system to read and interpret data is missing. Be sure that the Packaging Data NPI page template matches."Creating or Modifying an NPI Page for Package Data" in "Using Relays."
Response:
Message:
Missing PACKAGE PIN
512
Meaning: Response:
At least one Package Pin field on the Packaging Data NPI page has not been defined. Fill in the missing package pin name. All fields on the Packaging Data NPI must be filled in for component packaging to be accomplished.
Missing PSEUDO PIN One Pseudo-Pin field on the Packaging Data NPI page has not been defined. Fill in the missing pseudo-pin name. All fields on the Packaging Data NPI must be filled in for component packaging to be accomplished.
Missing SLOT ID One Slot ID field on the Packaging Data NPI page has not been defined. Fill in the missing Slot ID. All fields on the Packaging Data NPI must be filled in for component packaging to be accomplished.
Missing SUB-COMPONENT type One Subcomponent Type field on the Packaging Data NPI page has not been defined. Fill in the missing Subcomponent Type. All fields on the Packaging Data NPI must be filled in for component packaging to be accomplished.
*** ERROR *** - No components found in the design no reports will be generated No components were found to report. Verify under menu option /BUILD/ that components exist in the design.
Message:
*** ERROR *** - No connections found in the design no reports will be generated
513
Meaning: Response:
CADEX is unable to create a connectivity report because no connections were found in the design. Verify under menu option /BUILD/ that components do have pins and that lines connect those pins. *** ERROR *** - Requested report format not found: xxxxx The report requested (xxxxx) does not exist in the report list. Use menu option /REPORTS/ to check the report list.
*** ERROR *** - Unable to allocate memory to process no reports will be generated The system was unable to allocate memory to process the intermediate files. Check the available memory on the machine.
ERROR - Unable to open file: xxxxx CADEX was unable to open file xxxxx. Check the permissions on the file and the directory that contains the file.
ERROR - Unable to write file 3 - record: xxxxx CADEX was unable to add this line (xxxxx) to Intermediate File 3. Check that Intermediate File 3 exists, check the permissions on the directory containing the file, and check your available disk space. ERROR - Unable to write file: xxxxx CADEX was unable unable to write to file xxxxx. Check the permissions on the file and the directory that contains the file.
Message:
Field: xxxxx - Invalid output line number: nnnnn
514
Meaning: Response:
The field line number (nnnnn) for this field is invalid. Line numbers must be between 1 and 9. Use menu option /REPORT/ to correct the line number.
File3 (pin file) does not exist or is empty Intermediate File 3 ( the connection file) does not contain any entries. If you are creating a connectivity report, be sure the application mode is set to Electrical.
Invalid GROUP specified = xxxxx The specified group xxxxx does not exist. Check the group.
Invalid USER specified = xxxxx The specified user xxxxx does not exist. Check the user.
*** Library error for Package ID
***
The library definition for the package was incorrectly specified. See the Extraction Program Results report for a listing of invalid packages and the errors that need to be corrected.
No match found for the following sheet extensions: The sheet extensions listed do not have a match on another sheet and could not be connected. Redefine the sheet extensions listed so that they have a match on another sheet. No models found for base name:
Message:
515
Meaning:
CADEX was unable to call any drawings using the drawing ID given (that is, no drawings had find numbers using the 0001 or s01a numbering system, or the active drawing was not an overlay parent). Check the drawing ID of the design.
Response:
Message: Meaning:
*** No open slot for this sub-comp *** There are more subcomponents defined in the design model than there are slots defined for the package in the library for that package ID (i.e., although a Packaging Data NPI page exists in the package library, it cannot contain as many subcomponents as the design model specifies). Either redefine the Packaging Data NPI page, or rename some of the subcomponents in the design so that another component is defined.
Response:
Message: Meaning:
*** No Package ID, PartNo mismatch *** Neither of the methods used to associate this component and its subcomponents with its package data can be resolved. No package ID attribute has been defined for this component, and the part number cannot be used as a package identifier because the part numbers of the subcomponents do not match. (Part numbers for each subcomponent are listed in the Component Packaging Report.) Either attach a package ID attribute to one of the subcomponents and specify the correct value, or assign the same part number to all of the subcomponents.
Response:
Message: Meaning:
*** No XREF component in part *** In a design that uses a "dummy" relay as a special crossreference component, no cross-reference component was found for the specified part. Define a cross-reference component for the specified component.
Response:
Message:
*** Package ID mismatch:
***
516
Meaning:
Two or more subcomponents have a package ID attribute, but the values do not match. (The data values for each subcomponent's package ID attribute is displayed in the message.) Either change the data value for the package ID attribute on the subcomponents so that they match, or delete all but one of the package ID attributes. Within each master component, only one subcomponent must have a package ID.
Response:
*** Package ID not in library *** The component's package ID was correctly derived, but it was not found in the packaging library. Either add a component definition for that package to the library, or change the package ID to a value that exists in the library.
Message: Meaning:
*** Pins not matched in Package ID *** The Packaging Data NPI page was found in the Packaging Library, and there was a match between the subcomponent values, but the pins defined in the design do not match either the pseudo-pins or package pins as defined in the library. Change the pin names in the design or on the Packaging Data NPI page so that they match. *** Pins not matched to XREF *** In a design that uses a "dummy" relay as a special crossreference component, the pin numbers on the specified component did not match the pin numbers on the cross-reference component. Edit the pin name (or number) on either the cross-reference component or the constituent component so that they match.
Response:
Message: Meaning:
Response:
Message: Meaning:
*** Sub-component not matched *** The subcomponent type listed in the Component Package Report does not match any of the subcomponent types on the Packaging Data NPI page. Change the subcomponent type either on the Packaging Data NPI page or in the design so that they match.
Response:
517
Unable to call model: CADEX was unable to call up a model to process. Check that the group, user, and drawing ID exist and that the permissions on those files are correct.
Unable to create the summary report: An error occurred when trying to create the summary report in the documentation model (doc). Check to see that that the drawing and the /tmp directory are accessible.
Unable to read in the user attribute definitions CADEX was unable to read in the attribute table from either the cadx model (cadx) or the cdx_attrdefs file. Check to make sure that attributes were defined in the cadx model or that the cdx_attrdefs file is accessible. Unable to file model: CADEX was unable to file a model that it needed to process. CADEX does not process models that are read-only protected. Change the protection.
Undefined field: xxxxx Field xxxxx specified in a report does not exist. Use menu option /REPORT/ to check the report fields.
Undefined field: xxxxx - part of field: yyyyy A field that should be operated on to create a calculated field in a report does not exist. Check the field definition for the field yyyyy.
518
Unused bus component with pin name = A bus bit was not associated with any bus. Either remove the bus bit or place it on a bus wire.
*** Warning: Multiple part number replacement tables were found The design contains multiple part number replacement tables. CADEX will use the first table. All others will be ignored. Remove the unnecessary part number replacement tables.
*** Warning: No background job options were found No background job options were found. System defaults will be used. To set the job options, use BACKGROUND
*** Warning: Part number replacement table contains more than 2000 entries The part number replacement table contains more than 2000 entries. Consequently, some entries were ignored. Edit the table to include only the reference designator entries you actually are using.
*** Warning: Sheet: nnn - Attribute xxxxx is multiply-defined on connection Attribute xxxxx has been defined more than once for a connection on sheet nnn. Delete unwanted instances of the attribute.
519
520
Appendix B. CADEX Limits

CADEX Limits
When you run a background process, your design must stay within certain limits. The table below lists the limits of the CADEX system.
Attributes
Type of Limit Type of Limit per design
per component per line character length for name character length for data Component Sets Hierarchies Lines and Solder Dots (together) Part Number Part Number Replacement Table per sheet pins per component set levels per sheet character length values per table character length for reference designator entries character length for part number entries Pins Reference Designators Reports per component set character length for name character length per design fields per report
Limit Limit 100 (If the Profile under function key FILES is set to Visual or Structural, the limit is 50) 50 50 16 72 2,000 1,000 99 5,000 72 2,000 32 16 1,000 16 72 10 100
521
Sheets
Type of Limit per design using s01a sheet numbering method per design using overlay parent per design using 0001 sheet numbering methods model size unique sheet extension names per design character length for name per sheet lines that can be intersected by a shield, cable, or twist character length for name
Limit 99 200 9,999 unlimited 5,000 24 2,000 unlimited 72 5,000 72 4
Sheet Extensions
Shields, Cables, or Twists
Solder Dots and Lines (together) Wiredata (signal name) Zone Location
per sheet character length character length
522
Appendix C. CADEX Attribute Numbers

CADEX Attribute Numbers
All elements used in CADEX have attribute numbers assigned to them. Usually, these numbers are invisible to you. In some instances, however, such as when you create an icon panel, you may have to assign attribute numbers to certain elements. All the attribute numbers used by CADEX are listed below.
Number 32000 32001 32701 32702 32703 32704 32705 32706 32707 32708 32709 32710 32711 32712 32713 32714 32715 32716 32717 32718 32719 32720 32722 32723 32724 32725 32750 32751 32752
Description Used on icon panels. The data for this attribute should be a part number. Used on icon panels. The data for this attribute should be the name of an icon panel drawing. Assigned to the reference designator in a component set. Assigned to a pin or connection point in a component set. Assigned to a signal name. Assigned to a connector. Assigned to a part number in a component set. Assigned to a rung number in a ladder diagram. Assigned to a node point in a component set. Assigned to a wire number for a component plan. Assigned to a cable number for a component plan. Assigned to text used to cross-reference a sheet extension. Assigned to text used to cross-reference a component. Assigned to a pivot in a component set. Assigned to a sheet extension component set. Assigned to a ground component set. Assigned to a power component set. Assigned to a shield component set. Assigned to a twist component set. Assigned to a cable component set. Assigned to the line in a bus. Assigned to a bit in a bus. Assigned to a part number replacement table. Assigned to a hierarchy attribute. Assigned to a coax component set. Assigned to a hierarchy component set. Assigned to a miscellaneous component set. Assigned to an assembly component set. Assigned to a flow attribute.
523
524
Appendix D. Converting Host CADEX Designs to Workstation CADEX Format

What You Should Know About Converting Host CADEX Designs to Workstation CADEX Format
This appendix describes how to convert a host CADEX design into a format compatible with workstation CADEX. The conversions described in this appendix enable your drawings to function correctly in the CADEX function key on the workstation. The process of converting a host CADEX design into a format compatible with workstation CADEX consists of three basic steps: 1. 2. 3. Using Data Transfer to move drawings from the host to the workstation. Running a program that converts the drawings you have moved into a format compatible with workstation CADEX. Defining aspects of your workstation CADEX design so that they match the equivalent definitions in the host design.
Each of these steps is discussed in detail in the sections on the following pages. This process leaves untouched the portions of your drawing created using CATIA/CADAM Drafting . It only affects those parts of the design that employ CADEX. You can use the process described in this appendix to convert a design into workstation format, then convert these drawings back into a host-compatible version of CADEX, and finally use data transfer to move them back to the host. Both the CADEX and the Interactive Design portions of your design will still function correctly on the host.
525
Using Data Transfer to Move CADEX Designs From Host to Workstation

In host CADEX, a design consists of the following types of models:
Geometry drawings
Typically these models have been assigned find names using the 0001 or the S01A numbering format, or they are all members of an overlay family.
Job Options model

This model contains the categories of information listed below: Job options Format panel (report format and attribute information) From-to list options Bill of materials and equipment list options Diagnostics (error and warning messages) Zone location settings Non-sequential sheet numbering information The Job Options model has the same base name as the rest of the design but has a find name of CADX. In Release 21 and earlier releases of CADEX, the Job Options model had a find name of WD.
CADEX Profile
This model contains the CADEX Profile information. It has a drawing ID of CADEX PROFILE. In Release 21 and earlier releases of CADEX, the name of this model was ELEC PROFILE,BD. Of the models listed above, you must move the geometry drawings and the Job Options model to the workstation. For reference purposes, you may also want to transfer the CADEX Profile model, but it is not necessary for creating a CADEX design on the workstation, since workstation CADEX allows you to create a user profile with command bar option PROFILE. To move the necessary models from the host to the workstation, use CATIA/CADAM Drafting Data Transfer. For more information on Data Transfer, see the CATIA/CADAM Drafting Data Transfer Procedures Guide.
526
Converting Data Transfer Information Into a Workstation CADEX Design

After you have used Data Transfer to move a host CADEX design to the workstation, you must run a background process on the drawings you have moved. This converts the drawings into a workstation CADEX design. The background process is available on the Background Process List panel, displayed when you select BACKGROUND in function key CADEX. The process is called Host to WS Drawing Convert. When you run the Host to WS Drawing Convert background process, CADEX converts the following models:
All of the drawings that are members of the overlay family, if the active drawing is an overlay parent.
Any sequentially numbered drawings that use the same numbering format as the active drawing. The two numbering formats are s01a or 0001. Objects in CADEX Geometry Model That are Converted
The table below lists the objects in a geometry model that are converted by the Host to WS Drawing Convert background process. It also describes what form the objects have when they are converted into workstation CADEX.
Object in a Geometry Model Before Conversion Sheet extension symbol Wire bundling symbol Hierarchy symbol Part number replacement table symbol Power Ground Connector Object in a CADEX Design After Conversion Component with a Type System Attribute set to Sheet Extension Component with a Type System Attribute set to Sheet Extension Component with a Type System Attribute set to Hierarchy Part number replacement table Component with a Type System Attribute set to Power Component with a Type System Attribute set to Ground Component with pins defined as nodes
Objects Affected by a Conversion Process
527
CADEX obtains the symbol numbers and the ground and power values necessary to run these conversions from a file called $CCD_ROOT/CADEX/TABLES/cdx_convert. The values in this file can be customized by editing them during an installation procedure.
Definitions in the Job Options Model That are Converted

The table below lists the definitions in the Job Options model that are converted by the Host to WS Drawing Convert background process and describes how the equivalent definitions are created in workstation CADEX.
Definitions in the Job Options Model Job Options
Format Panel
How the Same Definition Is Made in Workstation CADEX The conversion process reads the attribute names and the report format and creates a report called MF Equip List, MF BOM, or MF From-To List, depending on how the Report Selection option is set in the Job Options panel. The conversion process uses the sort direction and the number of blank lines options to determine the sort direction and number of blank lines in the report it defines. The conversion process uses the attribute names and numbers and creates the same attributes, displaying them on the Attribute List panel. The conversion process uses the report format on the Format Panel to create the report described in the Job Options row above.
Definitions Affected by a Conversion Process
528
How Workstation CADEX Matches Host CADEX

How Workstation CADEX Matches Host CADEX
The table below lists aspects of a host CADEX design and the workstation CADEX equivalent.
Aspect of a Host CADEX Design Job options Workstation CADEX Equivalent Defined using CADEX Extraction process in BACKGROUND
Report format Attributes Diagnostics (errors and warnings) CADEX Profile
Defined in menu option /REPORTS/ Defined in menu option /ATTRIBUTE/

Defined using CADEX Extraction process in BACKGROUND
Defined using PROFILE
Matching a Workstation Design to a Host Design
529
530
Appendix E. Intermediate Files

What You Should Know About Intermediate Files
When you run a CADEX Extraction background process, CADEX creates a set of intermediate files that contain all of the information contained in the design. These files are used by the CADEX report generator to create reports. They can also be uploaded into a relational data base or used as input to a postprocessor. The intermediate files contain the following information: File 1 Lists every component used in the design, assigns a unique ID to every component, and lists every user and system attribute assigned to each component. Flags attribute information for every component, establishing whether the attribute is local or inherited and visible or invisible. Lists information for every connection in a design, including the from-pin ID, to-pin ID, and connection attribute data. File 3 applies to only the Electrical application. Lists every connection pin in the design and assigns it a unique ID, lists the component that contains each pin (by showing the ID assigned to that component in File 1), and lists the pin's coordinates. Flags attribute information for every connection listed in File 3, establishing whether the attribute is local or inherited and visible or invisible. File 5 applies to only the Electrical application.
File 2
File 3
File 4
File 5
Each intermediate file contains one description record followed by an unlimited number of data records. The description record provides the format of the data records, listing the name, starting and ending columns, data type, and length of each field. Every description record begins with a flag that establishes whether the file is to be uploaded to a relational data base. The record also includes a date stamp. Figure 233The figure below shows the uploading flag and the date stamp.
531
Description record
F 0521921121242
101
7COMP ID
11
823 6REFDES
Date stamp 10 digits month - date - year - time Data base uploading flag T = file to be uploaded F = all other files
Uploading Flag and Date Stamp in the Description Record of All Intermediate Files
The data generated in the five intermediate files interrelates. The figure on the next page shows how the unique component ID assigned in Intermediate File 1 is also used to identify the attribute information in Intermediate File 2 and the pin information in Intermediate File 4. The following figure shows how the unique pin ID assigned in Intermediate File 4 is used to define a connection described in Intermediate File 3.
532
Intermediate File 1
component ID
1 2 3 4A2 5 6 7 8A4 9 10 11 CHAIR CHAIR WALLS & Desk CUBICLE
Intermediate File 2
1X Location 1Y Location 1Group 1User 1Model ID 1Sheet 1Cubicle ID 1Color 1Manufacturer 1Material 1Model 1Type 1PartNo 1Description 1Style 1Pivot LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV INVI LCVI 1 LCVI 2 3 LCVI 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1Y 1A 1B 2? 2? 25 21 22 23 24 2? 2? 27 28 26 3? 2.500 1.000 1.000 -4.625 -4.625 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 4.750
Intermediate File 4
-2.000 -1.750 -2.250 -0.250 0.375 4.125 3.500 2.875 1.625 1.000 -0.875 -1.500 -2.750 -3.375 -4.000 2.250
Unique Component IDs as They Are Used in Intermediate Files 1, 2, and 4
533
Intermediate File 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1Y 2.500 1A 1.000 1B 1.000 2? -4.625 2? -4.625 25 -4.875 21 -4.875 22 -4.875 23 -4.875 24 -4.875 2? -4.875 from-pin ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 5 5 14 14 4 4 3 4 33 37 36 32 40 10 10 11 -2.000 -1.750 -2.250 -0.250 0.375 4.125 3.500 2.875 1.625 1.000 -0.875 to-pin ID
Intermediate File 3
6(comp) 14(comp) 7(comp)6 1(comp) 8(tele) 3(tele) 9(tele) 2(tele) 37 34 32 38 42 13(115v) 11(115v) 12(115v)
Unique Pin IDs and From- and To-pin IDs as They Are Used in Intermediate Files 3 and 4
534
Intermediate File 1
Intermediate File 1 compiles all the possible attributes in the design and lists the data values assigned for those attributes. The possible attributes (both system and user) are displayed horizontally in a description record, along with formatting information establishing where the data values for each attribute are listed in the file. The figure below illustrates the description record and explains the formatting information it includes. The following figure shows how data values for each attribute are listed in Intermediate File 1.
Attribute information. The same format is repeated for every possible attribute in the design.
F052191121242 1 101 7COMP_ID
11 823 6RefDes
83 1543 6 PartNo
155 1583 3Pin
1
Starting column 5 digits right-justified
10 1 7COMP_ID
Attribute name Attribute name length 2 digits right-justified Data type 1 = integer 2 = real 3 = character 4 = logical
Ending column 5 digits right-justified
Attributes and Formatting Information in the Description Record of Intermediate File 1
535
F052191121242 1
101 7COMP_ID
11 823 6RefDes
83 1543 6PartNo 155 1583 3Pin
1 2 3 4 4A2 5 6 7 8A4 9 10 11
CHAIR CHAIR WALLS & DESK CUBICLE BOOK SHELF TRASH CAN TELEPHONE CUBLCLE TRASH CAN TELEPHONE BOOK SHELF
Attribute Data Values Listed According to Format in the Description Record of Intermediate File 1
536
Intermediate File 2
Intermediate File 2 lists all the possible attributes for each component in the design and flags whether that component is inherited or local and visible or invisible. (A visible attribute is a note.) The formatting information for the entries to be listed in the file is displayed horizontally in a description record. Every component's attributes and two flags for each attribute are displayed in a list below the description record. The figure below illustrates the description record, explains the formatting information it includes, and shows how each component's attributes are flagged.
537
Component ID
F052191121242 1 101 7COMP ID 11
Attribute name
261 8ATT NAME 27
Property 1
283 6PROP 1 29
Property 2
303 6PROP 2
The same format is repeated for all four entries
1X Location 1Y Location 1Group 1User 1Model_ID 1Sheet 1Cubicle ID 1Color 1Manufacturer 1Material 1Model 1Type 1PartNo 1Description 1Style 1Pivot 2X Location 2Y Location 2Group 2User 2Model_ID
LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LNVI LCVI LCVI LCVI LCVI LCVI LCVI LCVI LCVI LCVI LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV
1 10 1 7 COMP_ID
Attribute name Starting column 5 digits Right-justified Ending column 5 digits Right-justified Attribute name length 2 digits Right-justified Date type 1 = integer 2 = real 3 = character 4 = logical
Attributes for component 2
Property 2 IV = invisible VI = visible Property 1 LC = local IN = inherited
Attributes for component 1 Attribute name
Attribute Flags and Formatting Information in Intermediate File 2
538
Intermediate File 3
Intermediate File 3 lists information for every connection in the design. This information includes the following: A unique ID for every connection From-pin ID To-pin ID Wiredata From shield To shield From twist To twist From coax To coax Cable Sheet extension Wire length Any other user attributes applicable to connections The format for all the entries in this file is displayed horizontally in a description record. Actual connection information in the design is displayed in lists below the description record. The figure below describes the connection information listed, illustrates the description record, and explains the formatting information it includes.
539
Connection ID
F052191121242 1 101 7CONN ID 11
From-pin name
20111FROM PIN ID 21
To-pin name
301 9TO_PIN ID 31 1023
Wiredata
8Wiredata
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
5 5 14 14 4 4 3 4 33 37 36 32 40 10 10 11 11 41
6(comp) 14(comp) 7(comp)6 1(comp) 8(tele) 3(tele) 9(tele) 2(tele) 37 34 32 38 42 13(115v) 11(115v) 12(115v) 41(115v) 31 Wiredata To-pin ID
The same format is repeated for all entries
11
20 111 FROM_PIN_ID
Attribute name
Starting column 5 digits right-justified Ending column 5 digits right-justified
Attribute name length 2 digits right-justified Data type 1 = integer 2 = real 3 = character 4 = logical
From-pin ID Connection ID
Connection Information and Formatting Information in Intermediate File 3
540
Intermediate File 4
Intermediate File 4 lists pin information for every component in the design. This pin information includes the following: A unique ID for every pin ID of the component containing the pin Pin name X-location of the pin Y-location of the pin The format for all the entries in this file is displayed horizontally in a description record. All pin information in the design is displayed in a list below the description record. The figure below describes the pin information listed, illustrates the description record, and explains the formatting information it includes.
541
Pin ID
F052191121242 1 101 6PIN_ID 11
Component ID
201 7COMP ID 21
Pin name
243 8PIN NAME 25
X-coordinate
32210X LOCATION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1Y 1A 1B 2? 2? 25 21 22 23 24 2? 2? 27 28 26 3? 3? 4 5 6Y 6A 6B
2.500 1.000 1.000 -4.625 -4.625 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 -4.875 4.750 4.750 -3.250 -3.250 -1.125 -2.625 -2.625
-2.000 -1.750 -2.250 -0.250 0.375 4.125 3.500 2.875 1.625 1.000 -0.875 -1.500 -2.750 -3.375 -4.000 2.250 -2.250 4.125 -4.375 3.375 3.625 3.125
The same format is repeated for all five entries
11
Starting column 5 digits Right-justified Ending column 5 digits Right-justified
201 7COMP_ID
Attribute name Attribute name length 2 digits Right-justified Data type 1 = integer 2 = real 3 = character 4 = logical
Y-coordinate of pin X-coordinate of pin Pin name ID of component containing pin
Pin ID
Pin Information and Formatting Information in Intermediate File 4
542
Intermediate File 5
Intermediate File 5 lists all the connections in the design and flags whether that connection is inherited or local and visible or invisible. (A visible connection is a note.) The formatting information for the entries to be listed in the file is displayed horizontally in a description record. Every connection and two flags for that connection are displayed in a list below the description record. The figure below shows how each connection is listed and flagged, illustrates the description record, and explains the formatting information it includes.
543
Connection ID
F052191121242 1 101 7CONN ID 11
Attribute name
261 8ATT_NAME 27
Property 1
283 6PROP 1 29
Property 2
303 6PROP 2
1Wiredata 1Wire length 2Wiredata 2Wire length 3Wiredata 3Wire length 4Wiredata 4Wire length 5Wiredata 5Wire length 6Wiredata 6Wire length 7Wiredata 7Wire length 8Wiredata 8Wire length 9From Twist 9Wire length
LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV LCIV
The same format for all fourd i t ti
11
26 1 8ATT_NAME
Attribute name
Starting column 5 digits right-justified Ending column 5 digits right-justified
Attribute name length 2 digits right-justified Data type 1 = integer 2 = real 3 = character 4 = logical
Property 2 IV = invisible VI = visible Connection ID Attribute name Property 1 LC = local IN = inherited
Connection Flags and Formatting Information in Intermediate File 5
544
Appendix F. Customizable Tables

Customizable Tables
A CADEX installation includes many tables that control how CADEX functions. These tables reside in a directory called $CCD_ROOT/CADEX/TABLES. Your system administrator can edit these files to customize your installation. Documentation at the top of each file describes how to modify it. The function of each file is summarized in Table 7.
File Name cdx_attrdefs cdx_colors
Description Contains values that define attributes. These are the same values that you can define using the Edit panel under menu option /ATTRIBUTE/. Defines the colors (by rgb values) used for all the panels displayed during a CADEX session. You can define the color of the background, scroll bar, text, titles, and lines in any of the following panels: Main panel (the first panel displayed when you perform a CADEX function) Auxiliary panels (panels displayed subsequent to the display of the main panel) Help panels The default CADEX color panel is comprised of the color numbers 96120 in the CADAM color table. Used in the Host to WS Drawing Convert background process to do the following: Provide the background process with a list of the host symbols to be converted into workstation components. For each symbol converted, this file specifies how the Type system attribute should be set to correctly describe the component. Provide the background process with a list of the host ground and power values to be converted into workstations components. CADEX assigns each of these components a Type system attribute set to ground or power and a Name system attribute that corresponds to its value in host CADEX.
cdx_convert
545
cdx_formats
cdx_libtable
Contains settings that control how a report is formatted, including: Title line information Description information Field definitions Sorting criteria Grouping options Selection rules With this file you can define settings for up to 10 reports that you can access using menu option /REPORTS/. Provides the names of the files that function as system libraries. The following files are provided with the CADEX installation: $CCD_ROOT/CADEX/COMPLIBS/DIGITAL_SCH $CCD_ROOT/CADEX/COMPLIBS/ANALOG_SCH If CADEX does not find these files, no system libraries are displayed when you select menu options /COMPONENTS/ /LISTS/. Lists the processes displayed on the Process List panel, which is Displayed when you BACKGROUD . To edit this file, you l t Provide the following information: Record type (title or process) Process Name Product Identifier ( enter 1 for CADEX) Name of the executable module in $CCD_ROOT/CADEX/BIN Process option, the text of which is passed to the executable module when a user invokes a process
cdx_processes
546
cdx_profile
cdx_profile.mm
Contains the default values for many of the elements created under menu options /BUILD/ /DRAW/. This file also identifies the drawing IDs of the models CADEX accesses as you work. With this file you can define: File protection User library models Hierarchy library models Icon panel drawing Pin stub length Reference designator text height Bus bit number height Bus line width Bus bit style Solder dot radius Bus bit spacing Minimum line spacing Bus name height Wild card character Icon panel size Defines the same values as the cdx_profile file, only the values in this file are defined in terms of millimeters instead of inches.
547
548
Glossary
active model: The model you are currently working in. Also called the current model. active component: A component you have specified in a panel or parts list, thus making that component ready to be retrieved from a library. AEC Schematics: An application mode that allows you to create connectivity designs for piping applications. The AEC Schematics application mode is only available if AEC Schematics is installed at your site. ANSI SQL: American National Standards Institute Structured Query Language, a data base command language. Also called SQL. application mode: A setting in your user profile that controls how some of the features of CADEX function. There are two application modes: Electrical and General. (If AEC Schematics is installed at your site, it is the third application mode.) attribute: see user attribute. attribute data: Textual information associated with an element by means of function key GROUP. Attribute List panel: A panel displaying all of the attributes defined for the active model or the overlay family of which the active model is a member. attribute number: A number you assign to an attribute on the Edit panel.
Also a numeric identifier associated with an element by means of function key GROUP.
background process: A program that operates in a noninteractive mode after you initiate it. base name: The first 16 alphanumeric characters of a drawing ID. One way to name the models of a CADEX design is to assign the same base name but a different find name to each model. bill of materials: A report that counts instances of certain types of a component. Also called BOM. bit: A line that connects a component pin to a bus. A bus generally contains many bits. BOM: See bill of materials. branch component: A special-purpose component that must be placed at every intersection of three or more lines in order for those lines to be traced correctly. bus: A means of grouping a series of wires together on a drawing without losing their individual connectivity. Usually a bus connects multiple pins on one component to multiple pins on another component.
549
cable: A special-purpose component used to specify wires within a protective sheath. cadx model: A model, automatically created by the CADEX system, that stores the settings you define for your profile, attributes, and background processes. The cadx model has a find name of cadx. CADEX Extraction background process: A background process that traces a design, extracts attribute information assigned to components and connections, and compiles that information into reports. change-to string: A string of alphanumeric characters that you define to replace a find string. child: A component set that is part of a nested component set and is subordinate to another component set in that nested set. chip: An integrated circuit. coax: A special-purpose component used to specify wires within a coaxial cable. command bar: A type of menu that activates functions not directly involved in the interactive design process. component: Another name for a component set. component set: A combination of elements that CADEX treats as one unit. These elements include geometry, system attributes, and units of textual information called user attributes. Also known as a component. component tree: A textual representation of a nested component set. The Traverse panel displays a component tree. connectivity: The information describing pin-to-pin connections in a design. connection point: A system attribute that you can define for a note or point in a component set. Once you define a connection point, you can attach a multiline to that note or point. In the Electrical application, connection points are called pins. connector: A type of schematic part that represents an electrical connector. contiguous: Elements or components that are touching. current model: See active model. data value: The value you assign for a user attribute. default: A value to be used if none is provided. design: A complete diagram that can include many sheets, where each sheet is usually a separate CADAM model. doc: The find name of a documentation model.
550
documentation model: A model containing system information generated by a CADEX Extraction background process. The documentation model has a find name of doc. drawing: An illustration created using the CADAM system. Also called a model. dummy relay: A representation of a relay in a wiring diagram that is not traced during a CADEX background process, but is used to show the location of the real relay components. Dummy relays are typically used in horizontal ladder diagrams. Edit panel: The panel on which you define the characteristics of an attribute. equipment list: A report that lists all of the components used in a design. endpoint: A point that marks the end of a line segment. err: The find name of an error model. error message: A message explaining a flaw in a CADEX design. Error messages are generated according to diagnostic rules you establish when you submit a CADEX Extraction background process. When you review an error model, an error message is displayed in an information line for each error you examine. error model: A model, generated by a CADEX Extraction background process, that highlights all the errors detected in a design. find name: The last four characters of a drawing ID. For example, in a model with a drawing ID of test case,s01a, the find name is s01a. find number: See find name. find string: A string of alphanumeric characters that you search for in a model using the CADEX text find utility. from-to list: A type of list, created by a CADEX Extraction background process, that traces a design and generates information about pairs of pins connected by lines. generic reference designator: A reference designator that is not unique. Generic reference designators consist of one or two alphanumeric characters followed by xx. grid: See lockon grid. ground: A special-purpose component that designates a line as a ground. CADEX will treat that line as a ground when you run a CADEX Extraction background process. hierarchy attribute: An attribute you can attach to a component that defines a drawing and a position on that drawing. By attaching hierarchy attributes to components and elements, you can create a hierarchical drawing. hierarchical drawing: A drawing that consists of other drawings nested within it by means of attaching hierarchy attributes to components or elements in the drawing.
551
hierarchy library: A list of groups and users where CADEX can search for drawings called by hierarchy attributes. You define a hierarchy library in the user profile. host CADEX: The CADEX feature of the CATIA/CADAM Drafting (that is, CADEX running on the mainframe). icon: An object on an icon panel. By selecting an icon, you can retrieve a component from a library or display another icon panel. icon panel: A panel displayed on the right side of the screen or over the full screen. The panel contains icons representing components. When you select one of these icons, CADEX retrieves from a library a copy of the component the icon represents so you can place it in the active drawing. inheritance attribute: A special data value you can assign to a component for any attribute in a nested component. Assigning an inheritance attribute to a component causes that component to receive a data value from the next highest component in the nested set that has this same attribute assigned to it. The inheritance attribute is an asterisk (*). interactive: A mode of operation that enables you to directly control the function of the CADAM system through the use of menu options. interactive report: A report, generated interactively (rather than in a background process), that analyzes the active model. line: A CADAM element that can be used to represent a wire. A line is made up of one line segment. intermediate files: Files CADEX generates when you run a CADEX Extraction background process. Intermediate files contain all of the CADEX data in a design. line name: A CADAM note whose pivot point is placed on a line representing a wire or part of a set that includes a line representing a wire. When you run a CADEX Extraction background process, CADEX can extract that note as wiredata or as the data value for an attribute and list it in a report. line segment: See segment. line type: A kind of line, such as solid or dashed. line weight: The heaviness of line, such as light, medium, or heavy. lockon grid: Points at defined intervals spread across all or part of a drawing. When you activate a lockon grid and you indicate a location for a point, the point is positioned at the grid point nearest to where you indicate. lower-level icon panels: Icon panels that are displayed by selecting icons on an icon panel. These icons must have hierarchy attributes assigned to them that call another icon panel. master icon panel: The first icon panel displayed when you select menu options /COMPONENTS/ /PANEL/.
552
model: An illustration created using CADAM. Also called a drawing. Model Key Attribute: An attribute in a CADEX model that must have data values that correlate with an RDB Key Column in order for an external data base to be queried. multiline: A chain of line segments with coincident endpoints that function as one entity. Multilines are created using function key LINE. name: A string of up to 72 alphanumeric characters defined as a system attribute of a component set. Names apply to only component sets that are not schematic parts. NC point: A numerical control point. nested component set: A component set that contains other component sets, with each component set retaining its individual attributes. New Part Information page: A collection of information that defines a component. An New Part Information page points to the model that contains a component's geometry. It also contains textual information, such as a part number and a part's description. System libraries are organized by New Part Information page. Also called NPI page. NPI page: See New Part Information page. node: A point, logically associated with a pin, that provides an additional connecting point for a line. noshown or not shown: Temporarily suppressed from display. numeric attribute: A user attribute for which you can define only numeric data values. overlay family: A group of models associated by an overlay parent. Members of an overlay family can be displayed simultaneously, allowing you to see their geometric relationship. overlay member: A model associated with an overlay family by means of an overlay parent. Overlay members of the same family can be displayed simultaneously, but only the active model can be edited. overlay parent: A model that points to the members of an overlay family. You can call up an overlay parent, but you cannot edit it, except to create plot data. parent: A superior component set in a nested component set. Parent panel: A panel displayed when you try to traverse up from a component set that has more than one parent component set. part: Another term for a component set. partno: Another term for a part number. part number: A string of up to 72 alphanumeric characters defined as a system attribute of a component set. You can assign part numbers only to component sets that are schematic parts.
553
part number replacement table: A table created with a CADEX utility. A part number replacement table allows you to display an identifying reference designator instead of a part number for components in a design. A CADEX Extraction background process can reference the table and report the correct part number for the components listed in the table. parts list: A list of the part numbers of all the components contained in the active library. PCB: A printed circuit board. P&ID: Piping and instrumentation diagram. pin: A system attribute that you define for a point or a text string in a component set. A pin functions as the point where a multiline connects to a component. Pins apply to only the Electrical application. pin name: Another term for a pin number. pin number: The text associated with each pin. CADEX can extract this information from a design and list it in a report. pivot: A location that you define as a system attribute for a component set. When you move a component set, you actually move the pivot of that component set. The component's geometry moves relative to the pivot. power: A special-purpose component that designates a line as power. CADEX will treat that line as power when you run a CADEX Extraction background process. preset: A pre-defined combination of user attributes. preview panel: A panel that displays geometry for and information about a component you are retrieving from a library. profile: A group of options that allow you to set the application mode, specify default values for graphic elements, and identify the models CADEX must access as you work. You define a profile by selecting . query: An inquiry you can perform to determine how attributes have been assigned. RDB Key Column: A row in a relational data base that must have values that correlate with the data values of the Model Key Attribute in order for an external data base to be queried. refdes: Another term for a reference designator. reference designator: A string of up to 72 alphanumeric characters defined as a system attribute of a component set. When you place more than one copy of a component in a design, reference designators allow you to distinguish between those components. You can assign a reference designator only to component sets that are schematics parts. report field: A position in a report that lists attribute information. When you create a report, you can define the length and position of each report field.
554
report model: A model containing the report information generated by a CADEX Extraction background process. The report model has a find name of rpt. required attribute: A user attribute for which you have set the Required option (on the Edit panel) to Yes. retrieving: Copying a part from a library into the active model. rpt: The find name of the report model. s01a: A sheet numbering format where sheets are numbered s01a, s02a, s03a, etc. schematic: A drawing that illustrates the relationship between entities. schematic part: A value you can assign to a component for its type system attribute. Components defined as schematic parts are real objects (as opposed to special-purpose components). screen layout configuration: The style of window display you are using, such as full-screen or horizontal split screen. You can set the screen layout configuration using . segment: The length of a line. A multiline consists of one or more segments. sheet: One page of a design that consists of multiple pages. sheet connector: See sheet extension. sheet extension: A special-purpose component set that allows a line from one sheet to connect to a line on another sheet. With sheet extensions, lines can be traced across multiple sheets as if they were continuous. Also called a sheet connector. sheet numbering format: The naming convention you can use to number sequential sheets in a design. The primary numbering formats are the 0001 or the s01a styles. Rather than number sheets, you can instead choose to associate sheets with an overlay family. shield: A special-purpose component used to identify wires that are surrounded by a separate conductor to minimize the effects of adjacent electrical circuits. sibling: Components that are part of a nested component set and are the children of the same parent component set. signal: A complete circuit consisting of one or more pin-to-pin connections. signal name: A CADAM note whose pivot point is placed on a line representing a wire or part of a set that includes a line representing a wire. When you run a CADEX Extraction background process, CADEX can extract that note as attribute data and list it in a report. solder dot: A symbol that you place at all three-way intersections between lines in a design. CADEX cannot trace an intersection unless a solder dot or a branch component is placed at that intersection.
555
special-purpose components: Components you can create and use to identify connections that perform a special purpose, such as connect sheets extension or form cables. SQL: See ANSI SQL. stub: A component pin that is automatically drawn using a pre-established format. sublist: A subset of a parts list. system attribute: An essential characteristic, such as a part number or a pivot, that you must define for a component set so that it can function correctly in the CADEX system. system library: A collection of components common to all the designers in an organization. Usually a system library is maintained by one system librarian.
trap polygon: A polygon you can draw that selects all the elements within its boundaries. After trapping elements, you can use other CADAM or CADEX processes to act on them as a group.
trap rectangle: A rectangle you can draw that selects all the elements within its boundaries. After trapping elements, you can use other CADAM or CADEX processes to act on them as a group. traceable: An element in a design, such as a pin or a line, that is recognizable to a CADEX Extraction background process so that it can be listed in a report. tracing: The process of examining and compiling information about each valid connection and component set in a design. traversing: Making another level in a nested component set the active component. Traverse panel: A panel displayed when you select menu option /TRAVERSE/ /LIST/. The traverse panel shows a textual representation of the components in a nested component set. twist: A special-purpose component used to specify wires that are twisted together with a common covering. UPI: Units per inch; a value that determines the scale of displayed geometry. You can set your UPI in inches, feet, millimeters, or meters. user attribute: A unit of textual information you can include in a component set or associate with a note or a line. user profile: See profile. VEDIT symbols: Variable edit symbols; a type of symbol, available only in host CADEX, that you can edit. type: A system attribute that you define for a component set. The type system attribute identifies the component as a schematic part or as some type of special-purpose component, such as a cable or a sheet extension. user library: A group of up to five CADAM models that contain components that you can copy into drawings.
556
user set: Geometry and information organized into a set using function key GROUP. warning message: A message explaining a flaw in a CADEX design. Warning messages are generated according to rules you establish when you submit a CADEX Extraction background process. When you review a warning model, a warning message is displayed in an information line for each warning you examine. warning model: A model generated by a CADEX Extraction background process that highlights all the warnings detected in a design. wildcard: A character, such as an asterisk (*), that you can define to represent any value. You can use wildcards to display sublists of parts lists or to query attributes. wire: A line connecting two pins. wire name: see line name. wrn: The find name of a warning model. zone grid: A frame of reference which you can define and which CADEX uses to identify the location of components in a drawing.
557

Catia Cadam Cadex - Manual 1

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Catia Cadam Cadex - Manual 1

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

November 2000 Edition

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

About This Guide

Function key OVERLAY

Using multilines in function key LINE

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

If the selected field currently has:

The message reads:

Select report field / YN reset

Select report field

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

CADAM Drafting Installation Guide

CADAM Drafting User's Guide

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

Defining groups of geometry as one entity (that is, as a part).

Adding non-graphical information to parts.

Establishing hierarchical relationships between parts or drawings or both.

Creating libraries for storing and retrieving parts.

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

Creating component sets

Copying components from libraries

Manipulating components to create a design

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

Customize report formats

Examine and correct error and warning conditions

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

Before You Use CADEX

CADEX Color Table

Methods for Naming the Sheets of a CADEX Design

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

Naming Conventions for CADEX Models

Cadx model (cadx)

Report model (rpt)

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

Documentation model (doc)

Error and warning models (err and wrn)

Releasing the Network License

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

Menu Structure of CADEX

CADEX Main Menu Line

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

CADEX Command Bar

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

Using the Panel Buttons

Select this icon to move the panel.

Select this icon to change the size of the panel.

The following button is located at the top left of each panel.

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

Scrolling Through a Panel

Up arrow Scroll bar

Scroll bar elevator

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide

Chapter 2. The CADEX Process

Creating Mechanical Applications

CATIA/CADAM CADEX: Intelligent Data Integrator Users Guide